Pastries Like a Pro

  • Home
  • Recipes
  • About Helen
  • Spring Baking
  • Subscribe
  • Contact
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Home
  • Recipes
  • About Helen
  • Spring Baking
  • Subscribe
  • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
    • Twitter
  • subscribe
    search icon
    Homepage link
    • Home
    • Recipes
    • About Helen
    • Spring Baking
    • Subscribe
    • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
    • Twitter
  • ×
    Home

    Traditional Irish Soda Bread

    Modified: Nov 13, 2025 · Published: Feb 5, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 8 Comments

    Slices of Traditional Irish Soda bread are on a lace edged white plate with the loaf and butter behind.

    Traditional Irish Soda Bread is possibly the easiest, fastest bread to make. No yeast, no mixer, no rising - just a bowl, a rubber spatula and a few measuring utensils and in about 10 minutes or less you have a delicious loaf of rustic bread ready for the oven. This is considered a quick bread and quick it is. For more quick breads see my Quick Bread Category.

    Slices of Traditional Irish Soda bread are on a lace edged white plate with the loaf and butter behind.

    The basic Traditional Irish Soda Bread consists of five ingredients and differs from the American version as it has no eggs, butter or sugar. It is a dense, moist, hearty bread thanks to an abundance of buttermilk. The Beauty of Buttermilk in Baking is an in-depth discussion of this important ingredient.

    The addition of currants or raisins, caraway seed, and orange rind adds flavor notes that fit perfectly with this rustic bread.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why you'll love this recipe

    • It's super easy to make. A bowl, a rubber spatula and a few measuring ingredients are all that are required to make the bread.
    • Due to the combination of all purpose flour and whole wheat flour, the bread has a depth of flavor by itself. Adding currants, caraway seeds, and orange rind add even more flavor.
    • This rustic bread requires no shaping skills or involved techniques.
    • It's great served on it's own with butter or cream cheese or as a great side to soup, chili or stew.
    • It's the perfect foil for a ham and cheese or better yet a corned beef and swiss cheese sandwich.
    • This soda bread lasts for days on the kitchen counter or can be frozen to enjoy later.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the Traditional Irish Soda Bread ionclude whole  wheat and all purpose flour, buttermilk, currants, orange rind, baking soda, caraway seed, and salt.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, caraway seed and baking soda

    MIDDLE ROW: Currants, orange for rind

    BACK ROW: Whole wheat flour, all purpose flour and buttermilk

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage includes a bowl of dry ingredients, mixed, currants separated in the flour and the caraway seed and orange rind.

    Step 1. Combine the all-purpose flour, whole wheat flour, salt and baking soda in a large bowl. Step 2. Whisk them together. Step 3. The currants were super moist and in a clump. Separate them by rubbing them with the flour to break them up. If raisins are being substituted, soak them first in hot water and squeeze them out completely before adding to the dry ingredients. Step 4. Mix in the currants and orange rind.

    This collage shows the buttermilk added, mixing it in, mixed in the bowl, and shaped.

    Step 5. Pour the buttermilk over the ingredients. Step 6. Using a rubber spatula, mix in the buttermilk using a folding motion. Step 7. The dough is very sticky and I don't recommend mixing it by hand. The spatula does a great job. Step 8. Turn the dough out onto a lightly floured surface and shape into a ball. Transfer to a parchment lined baking sheet. Bake as directed.

    Recipe FAQs

    What's the difference between traditional and American soda bread?

    Traditional soda bread has only five ingredients, flour, whole wheat flour, salt, baking soda and buttermilk. The American version features egg, butter and sugar.

    Why is it called soda bread?

    It is called soda bread because it is leavened with baking soda. When the baking soda mixes with the buttermilk, it causes the bread to rise.

    What causes soda bread to come out dry after baking?

    Dryness is most often caused by the lack of buttermilk. The dough should be very wet and sticky. Buttermilk naturally helps keep items moist.

    Expert Tips

    • Be sure to use buttermilk or if that is not on hand, substitute milk. Remove 1 tablespoon milk for every cup and add 1 tablespoon lemon juice or white vinegar. Let it sit while the rest of the recipe is prepared. As it sits it will curdle which is fine.
    • See my post on Baking Powder vs. Baking Soda for more information on these two leavening agents.
    • For a basic loaf, just omit the currants, caraway seed, and orange rind.
    • Although the dough may be made with only all-purpose flour, it will not have the depth of flavor as that made with part whole wheat flour.
    • If using raisins instead of currants, be sure to soak them in very hot water while the rest of the ingredients are gathered. Squeeze them very dry before adding them to the flour. Mix them in as for currants.
    • I don't cut a cross in this bread as is traditional because the loaf becomes mis-shapen no matter how shallow the cut.
    Another photo of the bread shows the bread on a white lace edged plate with a napkin, the loaf behind it and a stick of butter.

    More Quick Breads to enjoy

    • Eight Pumpkin Pecan Scones sit on a white plate with mugs and spoons in the background.
      Simple Pumpkin Pecan Scones Recipe
    • A basket lined wth a yellow napkin is filled with Cream Biscuits.
      Cream Biscuits
    • Several slices of Chocolate Cranberry Bread sists on a cream colored plate surrounded by Muffins, cranberries, a teal colored napkin, cup and saucer and a miniature pumpkin gourd.
      Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread Recipe
    • Slices of Banana Bread in a circle with strawberries in the middle on a blue and white plate.
      Best Two Step Banana Nut Bread

    If you love this Traditional Irish Soda Bread, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

    Slices of Traditional Irish Soda bread are on a lace edged white plate with the loaf and butter behind.

    Traditional Irish Soda Bread

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Traditional Irish Soda Bread is possibly the easiest, fastest bread to make. No yeast, no mixer, no rising - just a bowl, a rubber spatula and a few measuring utensils and in about 10 minutes or less you have a delicious loaf of bread ready for the oven.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Bread
    Cuisine Irish
    Servings 12
    Calories 188 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups all-purpose flour (280 grams)
    • 1 ¾ cups whole wheat flour (245 grams)
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking soda
    • 1 ½ teaspoons salt
    • ¾ cup currants or raisins
    • 1 tablespoon caraway seed
    • 1 teaspoon orange rind
    • 2 cups buttermilk

    Instructions
     

    • If using raisins instead of currants, soak them in hot water. Squeeze them very dry when using. Grate the orange rind and set aside.
    • Preheat the oven to 375°F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Set aside.
    • Combine both flour, the salt and baking soda in a large bowl.
    • Add the currants or raisins to the dry ingredients. Rub them together with the flour. The currants may take a bit more effort to separate them if they are stuck together.
    • Mix in the caraway seed and orange rind into the rest of the ingredients.
    • Pour the buttermilk over and using a rubber spatula with a folding motion, combine the buttermilk and dry ingredients completely.
    • Lightly flour your work surface and shape into a ball. Place on the parchment paper.
    • Bake for 45 to 50 minutes until a tester comes out clean.
    • Cool the bread on a rack.
    • The bread may be stored at room temperature in a plastic bag for several days or it can be frozen for longer storage. Thaw it on the counter. Refresh in a 350°F oven, wrapped in foil with a hole left at the top for about 20 minutes.

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. 
    Be sure to use buttermilk or if that is not on hand, substitute milk by remove 1 tablespoon milk for every cup and add 1 tablespoon lemon juice or white vinegar. Let it sit while the rest of the recipe is prepared. As it sits it will curdle which is fine.
    For a basic loaf, just omit the currants, caraway seed, and orange rind.
    Although the dough may be made with only all-purpose flour, it will not have the depth of flavor as that made with part whole wheat flour.
    If using raisins instead of currants, be sure to soak them in very hot water while the rest of the ingredients are gathered. Squeeze them very dry before adding them to the flour. Mix them in as for currants.
    Make sure to use baking soda not baking powder. 
    I don't cut a cross in this bread as is traditional because the loaf becomes mis-shapen no matter how shallow the cut.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 188kcalCarbohydrates: 38gProtein: 6gFat: 2gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.4gCholesterol: 4mgSodium: 474mgPotassium: 217mgFiber: 3gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 77IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 67mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Tarts

    Modified: Jul 24, 2025 · Published: Jan 29, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

    An individual Chocolate Caramel Tart on a white background with raspberries.

    These easy, No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Truffle Tarts for Valentine's Day Dessert or any day consists of a chocolate press in crumb crust, homemade caramel and the same truffle filling used in our Chocolate Chocolate Truffles so popular at the bakery. These six tarts can also be made ahead.

    An individual Chocolate Caramel Tart on a white background with raspberries.

    You won’t believe how easy the basketweave is to make. It gives such a sophisticated and elegant appearance to this special dessert and you don't need to be a professional to pull it off. Everyone will think you bought it at an upscale bakery.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Other Special Valentine's Day Treats

    Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Torte

    Nutella Fudge Hearts

    No Bake Chocolate Raspberry Truffle Tarts

    Chocolate Truffle Raspberry Curd Tart

    Tropical Shortbread Cookies

    Painted Cookies

    Individual Italian Tiramasu

    Why You Need to Make this Recipe

    • They are so easy to make and it looks so professional.
    • These can be made ahead and held in the fridge or frozen and thawed. te
    • The basketweave is simply straight lines made with a basketweave tip.
    • If you're not into piping, just pour the warm ganache over the caramel.
    • Everyone loves an individual dessert made just for them.
    • Valentine's Day is ideal for showing love wit a special dessert.
    • Last, but not least, they taste amazing!

    Recipe Ingredients

    Caramel

    Ingredients for homemade caramel are water, sugar, cream, unsalted butter vanilla, and corn syrup.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, vanilla and corn syrup

    BACK ROW: Water, sugar and heavy cream

    Corn Syrup, an invert sugar, will ensure the caramel doesn't granulate and get grainy. One granule of sugar left in the cooked caramel can turn the whole batch grainy.

    The chocolate I use is is #811 Callebaut Callets. They look like chocolate chips but are pure chocolate. There are many places to purchase this online.

    Crumb Crust

    Ingredients for the chocolate crumb crust are graham cracker crumbs, unsalted butter, powdered sugar and cocoa.

    FRONT ROW: Powdered Sugar, cocoa

    BACK ROW: Graham Cracker Crumbs, unsalted butter

    Chocolate Truffle Filling

    The Chocolate Truffle Filling includes semisweet chocolate, heavy cream,unsalted butter, vanilla and sugar.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, vanilla, granulated sugar

    BACK ROW: Semisweet chocolate, heavy cream

    Corn Syrup, an invert sugar, will ensure the caramel doesn't granulate and get grainy. One granule of sugar left in the cooked caramel can turn the whole batch grainy.

    The chocolate I use is is #811 Callebaut Callets. They look like chocolate chips but are pure chocolate. There are many places to purchase this online.

    Either Dutch cocoa or natural cocoa can be used but the Dutch cocoa will give a deeper color to the crust. When it comes to cocoas my article Cocoa Fundamentals Natural vs. Dutched tells you all about it.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Please see my Caramel - A Building Block of Pastry post for step by step photos as well as a great deal of information on the subject.

    The first collage for the Chocolate Caramel Tarts shows the dry ingredients for the crust in the processor, processed, the butter added to the crumbs and pressed into the side of the tart pan.

    Step 1. Place the dry ingredients in the processor bowl. Step 2. Process to mix completely. Step 3. Pour into a bowl and add the melted butter. Mix with a fork until the crumbs are well coated with the butter. Step 4. Press 35 grams firmly along the sides of the each tart pan.

    This collage shows the bottom of the crust in the pan, the pans filled with caramel, the liquid ingredients for the caramel in a saucepan followed by the chocolate and vanilla.

    Step 5. Press 15 grams into the bottom of the pan. Step 6. Fill with about 3 tablespoons of caramel. Step 7. Place the cream, sugar and unsalted butter in a sauce pan for the caramel and bring it to a simmer, about 180°F. Make sure it is steaming but do not boil. Step 8. Add the chocolate and vanilla and submerge them under the hot cream. Let it sit for a few minutes for the chocolate to melt.

    Collage 3 shows the truffle mixure whisked smooth, filling the tarts,laid out on a tray and the first horizontal line piped onto the tart.

    Step 9. Stir until the chocolate is completely combined with the cream mixture. Make sure you get into the corners of the pan. If using a whisk, do not whisk hard or air bubbles can be incorporated. Step 10. Pour 2 tablespoons ganache on top of each caramel layer leaving about ⅛ to ¼ inch for the basketweave. Chill the tarts until the chocolate layer is firm. Step 11. Lay out the remainder of the truffle filling on a clean sheet tray. Cover with plastic wrap and leave at room temperature to set up but still be able to be piped. Step 12. To start the basketweave, fill a piping bag fitted with a basketweave tip with the reserved chocolate truffle and pipe about 4 horizontal lines from one side to the other.

    The tart is being piped with a basketweave finish.  The tart is turned  90 degrees and a second set of horizontal lines, is drawn, this is repeated one more time and then the edge is finished.

    Step 13. Turn the tart 90° so the previous horizontal lines are now vertical in front of you. Step 14. Pipe a second set of 4 horizontal lines across the vertical ones. Step 15. Turn the tart 90° again so you are always piping horizontally. Pipe one last set of 4 lines across the vertical ones. This will close up any of the ganache below from showing. Step 16. Finish the edge of the tart by piping a ribbon around it or any other finish you wish. Refrigerate or freeze until needed. Thaw in the refrigerator, preferably covered overnight.

    To release the tarts, let them sit at room temperature for a bit and slide the side down. Place a metal spatula between the bottom of the crust and the removable bottom. If the tart is cold enough, it will pop right off with a twist of the spatula. Otherwise, go under the tart with the spatula and lift it off.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why is caramel runny

    Depending upon the use of the caramel, the temperature can register from 215°F for caramel sauce to 315° for hard caramels. It is important to use a thermometer and take the caramel to the correct temperature. My post, Caramel - A Building Block of Pastry tells you all about it.

    How can I make leftover caramel thinner for a sauce

    Depending upon the amount left over add cream to the existing caramel and heat it together. Add cream a bit at a time to thin it out. Remember, it will thicken up at room temperature or when cold.

    What is a chocolate truffle

    A chocolate truffle is a candy made with a base of chocolate and cream and other ingredients such as sugar and butter. See my post on Chocolate, Chocolate Truffles. Truffles can be made with dark, milk or white chocolate and flavored many ways.

    Expert Tips

    • These six tarts are made in 3 ½" tart pans with removable bottoms to easily release. They are extremely rich and bigger size are not needed.
    • Make sure the best ingredients are used. By this I mean heavy cream - lesser creams won't work the same - real chocolate not chocolate chips.
    • Press the crumbs firmly into the tart pans so they don't crumble when released..
    • Caramel can be made weeks ahead and refrigerated. Reheat very gently to liquify again. Do not overheat or it can become harder.
    • A basketweave tip can be found wherever pastry tips are sold.
    • If you're not sure of your piping skills, practice on a piece of waxed paper. A tip here is to look where you are going, not at the piping itself.
    • The key to piping is to apply even, steady pressure to the bag.
    • It is best to use a disposable piping bag as opposed to a plastic bag as they can easily and quickly stretch out of shape.
    • The excess truffle mixture to be piped must be completely free of even the tiniest bit of unincorporated chocolate or it will clog the piping tip.
    • Leave the excess truffle mixture at room temperature to use the next day. Refrigerating it will make it too hard. If it becomes hard at room temperature, pop it in a 200*F oven very briefly to soften it enough to pipe.

    Storage and Freezing Instructions

    The tarts can be made ahead and stored in the refrigerator for at least five days. Be sure to cover them, as chocolate easily picks up any odors in the fridge.

    They can also be frozen up to a couple of months. Freeze the tarts on a tray uncovered until hard. Wrap well afterwards. To thaw, place them in the refrigerator overnight.

    To Serve

    Serve at room temperature to let the full flavor of the chocolate and caramel come through. Raspberry Sauce along with a few fresh rashperries or caramel sauce drizzled on the plate complete the presentation.

    This shot of the Chocolate Caramel Truffle Tarts shows a forkful of the tart with a cut tart in the back ground with a few red raspberries.

    For Your Chocolate Pleasure

    • Chocolate Raspberry Marzipan Gateau
      Chocolate Raspberry Marzipan Gateau
    • Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart
      Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart
    • Chocolate cake base covered with caramel and hazelnuts topped with amaretto ganache.
      Amaretto Truffle Torte
    • Chocolate Glazed Bakewell Tart

    If you love these No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Tarts, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thanks. I appreciate your help.

    An individual Chocolate Caramel Tart on a white background with raspberries.

    No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Tarts

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These easy, No Bake Mini Chocolate Caramel Truffle Tarts for Valentine's Day Dessert or any day are not only easy, they can be made ahead. The basketweave design on top is so easy, you won't believe it. Everyone will swear these came from a bakery - and they did mine!
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 50 minutes mins
    Chilling time 4 hours hrs
    Total Time 4 hours hrs 50 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 tarts
    Calories 1241 kcal

    Equipment

    • 6 3 ½" tart pans with removable bottoms
    • Candy Thermometer
    • # 48 basketweave piping tip
    • Disposable piping bag
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Caramel - this can be made ahead

    • 1 cup water
    • 1 ¼ cups granulated sugar (250 grams)
    • ½ cup corn syrup
    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (60 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla

    Chocolate Crumb Crusts

    • 1 ⅓ cups graham cracker crumbs* (140 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons cocoa, dutch preferred (17 grams)
    • ¼ cup powdered sugar (30 grams)
    • 10 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted (145 grams)
    • *If using whole graham crackers, process them to make crumbs.

    Chocolate Truffle Filling

    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (60 grams)
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
    • 10 ½ ounces semisweet chocoalte (300 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla

    Instructions
     

    Caramel

    • There will be more caramel than needed but it can't cut down further. Add a bit of cream and heat it with the caramel for a delicious caramel syrup.
    • Place the water, sugar and corn syrup in a 2-quart saucepan.  Stir over heat until the sugar is dissolved completely.  Bring to a boil; wash the sides of the pan down with a natural bristle pastry brush dipped in cold water, then boil without stirring until the mixture becomes a medium golden color.
    • Off heat, immediately add the butter and stir until it is melted.  Pour the cream in all at once and stir.  If some of the cream lumps up don’t worry.
    • Return to medium high heat and bring to a boil.  Boil to 235°F on a candy thermometer.
    • Cool in the pan.  Do not stir at this point.  Allow to come to room temperature.  Refrigerate for longer storage.

    Chocolate Crumb Crusts

    • Either Dutch or natural cocoa can be used. The Dutch cocoa will make a darker crust, which is why I recommend it but either is fine.
    • Sift the cocoa and powdered sugar together in a medium bowl. Add the graham cracker crumbs and whisk together. .  Add butter and toss with a fork until crumbs are completely coated. 
    • Spray the center of the tart shells.  Press 35 grams around edges (about ¼ cup loosely packed) and 15 grams (about 2 tablespoons) in the bottom.
    • If the caramel was made ahead and is not spreadable, microwave briefly to soften it. Spread 2 tablespoons in the bottom of each tart. Set aside.

    Chocolate Truffle Filling

    • In a medium saucepan, bring the cream, butter and sugar to a simmer over medium heat.  Whisk gently to make sure butter is melted and sugar is dissolved.  If it is not, reduce heat and continue whisking until all is mixed and mixture is very hot, but not boiling - about 180 degrees on a candy thermometer.  
    • Remove from heat;  Submerge the chocolate under cream mixture and let sit for about 5 minutes. Stir with a rubber spatula to incorporate most of chocolate. Change to a   whisk and whisk gently to smooth out remaining chocolate but not so enthusiastically that you form a lot of air bubbles.
    • Using a rubber spatula, go around all the bottom edges of the pan to make sure all of the chocolate is incorporated.  This is extremely important when finishing the tart. If there are even teeny tiny lumps, it will not bode well as they will stick in the piping tip.
    • Pour 2 tablespoons of chocolate truffle filling over the caramel. Place in refrigerator to set up for several hours or overnight.  
    • Lay out the remainder of the filling in a rimmed pan. Place plastic film directly over the filling and leave at room temperature for several  hours or overnight.  It needs to be soft enough to pipe but firm enough to hold its shape. If it becomes too firm, place it in a 200°F oven very briefly to soften it
    • Fit a pastry bag with a #48 basketweave tip.  Starting at the top of the tart, pipe 4 straight lines from left to right about ½ inch apart.  Turn the tart 90° (¼ turn) and, again, starting at the top pipe another set of straight lines left to right ½ inch apart.  Lastly, turn another 90° (¼ turn) and pipe the last set of lines.  You will now have the basketweave design. 
    • Last, finish the edges of the tart with a ribbon design or another of your choice. Refrigerate to set.
    • To release the tarts, let them sit at room temperature for a bit and slide the side down. Place a metal spatula between the bottom of the crust and the removable bottom. If the tart is cold enough, it will pop right off with a twist of the spatula. Otherwise, go under the tart with the spatula and lift it off.
    • To Serve:  Place in the cooler to firm up briefly if making ahead.  Store in the refrigerator; but serve at cool room temperature.  This can be made several days ahead as long as it is protected from odors in the refrigerator or it freezes well if covered.  

    Notes

    There is always an abundance of photos to guide you in the post.
    As always, I recommend using a scale for accuracy and consistency.  Flour, in particular, is difficult to measure by volume.  I use 140 grams per cup of unsifted  all-purpose, bread or whole wheat flour and 125 grams of cake flour. 
    These six tarts are made in 3 ½" tart pans with removable bottoms to easily release. They are extremely rich and bigger size are not needed.
    Make sure the best ingredients are used. By this I mean heavy cream - lesser creams won't work the same - real chocolate not chocolate chips.
    Either Dutch or natural cocoa can be used.   Dutch is preferred for its darker color.
    Press the crumbs firmly into the tart pans so they don't crumble when released.. 
    Caramel can be made weeks ahead and refrigerated. Reheat very gently to liquify again. Do not overheat or it can become harder.
    A #48 basketweave tip can be found wherever pastry tips are sold. 
    If you're not sure of your piping skills, practice on a piece of waxed paper. A tip here is to look where you are going, not at the piping itself. 
    The key to piping is to apply even, steady pressure to the bag. 
    It is best to use a disposable piping bag as opposed to a plastic bag as they can easily and quickly stretch out of shape. 
    The excess truffle mixture to be piped must be completely free of even the tiniest bit of unincorporated chocolate or it will clog the piping tip. 
    Leave the excess truffle mixture at room temperature to use. Refrigerating it will make it too hard. If it becomes hard at room temperature, pop it in a 200*F oven very briefly to soften it enough to pipe. 
    If you're not into piping, simply pour the chocolate truffle filling to the top of the caramel filled shells.  It will taste every bit as good.  
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 6servingsCalories: 1241kcalCarbohydrates: 121gProtein: 7gFat: 84gSaturated Fat: 51gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 23gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 183mgSodium: 175mgPotassium: 442mgFiber: 6gSugar: 102gVitamin A: 2241IUVitamin C: 0.5mgCalcium: 117mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Buttermilk Flatbreads

    Modified: Jul 13, 2025 · Published: Jan 22, 2024 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 15 Comments

    Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.

    Buttermilk Flatbreads are just the thing when you're looking for a quick, tasty, bread with only 5 ingredients. A type of fry breads found in many cultures, these require no oven - just a few minutes in a skillet. The beauty of these, besides being fast and easy is they can be used in a multitude of ways and are endlessly customizable by adding cheese and herbs to the dough.

    With the Super Bowl just around the corner, they would be sensational with my Make Ahead Chili Party

    Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.

    They're fantastic with a bowl of chili, simply dipped in a spicy salsa, use as a base for individual pizzas, as a stand in for pitas with Gyros, or folded over and filled for a sandwich as well as being used as a wrap. Or, cut them into quarters, brush with a little oil and toast them in a 350°F oven until lightly browned and crisp.....and you have almost instant pita chips.

    Be sure to check out my International Flatbreads, my other version at Soft Flatbreads, Homemade Pizza Dough and Homemade Breakfast Stromboli stuffed with bacon, eggs, cheeses, red peppers and hash brown potatoes and for the easiest, fastest delicious bread check out the English Muffin Bread.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love these Flatbreads

    • This recipe has only 5 ingredients that are probably in your pantry now. No buttermilk, there's a substitute for that.
    • These are fast. The dough takes literally seconds to make in the processor. After a short rise, they are ready to shape and fry with no additional rise.
    • They can be made ahead and frozen for months well wrapped. Thaw and heat wrapped in aluminum foil for a few minutes and there ready to go!
    • There are so many uses for these, they'll become a staple in your kitchen.
    • They are very customizable. Just add cheese and/or spices to vary them according to your taste.
    • Having a fresh, warm bread on hand can perk up any meal.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the buttermilk flatbreads include flour, yeast, salt, oil and buttermilk

    FRONT ROW: Salt, vegetable oil, instant yeast

    BACK ROW: Bread flour, buttermilk

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage for the Buttermmilk Flatbreads shows the ingredients in the food processor, then mixed, rolled into a ball and put in a covered bowl to rise.

    Step 1. Place all of the ingredients in the bowl of a processor. Step 2. Process for about 30 seconds until it comes together. Step 3. Remove the dough from the processor and form into a ball. Step 4. Spray a container with a non-stick baking spray and place dough in it. Turn the dough over so it is coated with the spray. Cover the bowl and let it rise until doubled. To speed up the rising, place the bowl in you oven with the light turned on. The heat of the light makes the oven a great proofer.

    This collage shows the dough has risen, it is divided into six balls which are flattened and shows one flatten ball.

    Step 5. Remove the cover from over the dough. Step 6. Divide the dough into six equal sized balls about 75 grams each. Step 7. Flatten the balls slightly, cover them while you go to the next step. Step 8. Take one flattened ball and place it in front of you.

    The last collage shows the flattened ball rolled into an 8" circle, all of them are placed on a plate with paper between them, one in the frying pan with lots of bubbles on top and the last picture is   flatbread fried on the second side.

    Step 9. Roll one flatbread at a time into an 8" circle. It will be thin. Step 10. Stack them on top of each other with paper in-between. Step 11. Heat the frying pan on medium. Add about a teaspoon or two of oil even if it is nonstick to help with the browning. They may be fried in a dry pan but the color and softness are better with the oil. Fry for about 1 to 1 ½ minutes until speckled on the bottom. It may or may not form big bubbles on top. Step 12. Flip it over and repeat the frying process. You do not need to oil the pan again for the second side. But add oil each time a new flatbread goes into the pan. Stack them up with paper between them.

    Recipe FAQS

    How do you keep flatbreads warm for a party?

    Place them on a parchment lined baking sheet. Cover with foil tightly and keep them warm on the lowest setting of your oven or in a warming drawer.

    What can you eat with flatbreads?

    There are so many things it is hard to list them all. Use the fried flatbread as a base for an individual pizza, using pizza sauce, toppings you like, top it with cheese and heat it all together in a 450°F oven until the cheese melts.

    Do you have to use buttermilk?

    Buttermilk is used for its taste as well as adding softness to the fried breads. But no you don't. Plain yogurt, thinned with a bit of milk, can be used as well as regular milk that has been soured. Just remove 1 tablespoon of milk and replace it with 1 tablespoon of lemon juice or white vinegar. Wait a few minutes until it becomes thicker and can separate slightly.

    Storage

    After they are cool, place them in a plastic bag. These remain soft and keep well for a couple of days at room temperature.

    For longer storage, freeze them individually, stack them together and either wrap well in foil and/or place in a freezer bag. They will keep for several months.

    To use from the freezer, it is best to thaw them first. Wrap loosely in foil. Preheat the oven to 350°F and heat them for 8 to 10 minutes. Be careful of the steam coming out of the foil when they are unwrapped.

    Expert Tips

    • All-purpose flour can be substituted for the bread flour.
    • These can be made in a mixer following the same directions as for the processor.
    • Flavor these as you wish by adding grated cheese and/or herbs of your choice.
    • Serve the flatbreads warm for the best taste and texture.
    This final photo shows the flatbreads folded up on a white tray placed on a colorful runner with 2 glasses in the background.

    Other Flatbreads You'll Enjoy

    • International Flatbreads
      International Flatbreads-An Easier Version of Pizza
    • Garlic Oregano Cracker Bread
      Garlic Oregano Cracker Bread
    • Soft Flatbreads
      Soft Flatbreads
    • Stuffed Focaccia

    If you love these Buttermilk Flatbreads, It would be hugely helpful and so appreciated it if you would take a moment to leave a rating below. Thank you.

    Buttermilk flatbreds on a colorful plate with a bowl of salsa.

    Buttermilk Flatbreads

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Buttermilk Flatbreads are just the thing when you're looking for a quick, tasty, bread with only 5 basic ingredients doesn't go in the oven, is endlessly changeable and versatile.
    5 from 5 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Rising Time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 flatbreads
    Calories 200 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 1 ¾ cups bread flour (250 grams)
    • 1 ½ teaspoons instant yeast
    • ¾ teaspoon salt
    • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil, plus additional for frying
    • ¾ cup buttermilk

    Instructions
     

    • Place all of the ingredients in the bowl of a processor or mixer.
    • Process for 30 seconds or until it comes together. I may not form a ball, that's fine. It may take longer in a mixer.
    • Remove the dough from the container and shape into a ball. Spray a container with non-stick baking spray, placing the dough in it. Turn the dough over so it is coated on top. Cover the container, mark the time on it and let it rise in a warm place. It should double in about an hour or so. See the notes for making and easy proofer.
    • Divide the dough into 6 pieces about 75 grams each and roll them into balls. Flatten the balls.
    • Using very little flour if any, roll each ball into an 8" circle. They don't have to be perfect and they will be very thin. Place them on a plate with paper between them. Continue for the remaining 5 balls. They do not rise again.
    • Heat a skillet on medium. Add a teaspoon or two of oil. Place one of the flatbreads in the pan and fry for about 1 to 1 ½ minutes on each side. Stack them together with paper between them and cover with a tea towel if cooling. Otherwise, serve at once.

    Notes

    Please see the Step by Step Photos above.
    This recipe has only 5 ingredients that are probably in your pantry now. No buttermilk, here's a substitute for that. Use regular milk, whole or 2%.  Remove 1 tablespoon and replace it with 1 tablespoon lemon juice or white vinegar.  Plain, unsweetend  yogurt, thinned with a bit of milk may also be substituted. 
    These are fast. The dough takes literally seconds to make in the processor. After a short rise, they are ready to shape and fry with no additional rise. 
    They can be made ahead and frozen for months well wrapped. Thaw and heat wrapped in aluminum foil for a few minutes and there ready to go!
    There are so many uses for these, from pizza bases to sandwiches to wraps, they'll become a staple in your kitchen.  They go from breakfast (think a bacon, egg and cheese sandwich by folding them over or use as a wrap) to a snack (Cut into wedges and serve with salsa or guacamole for dipping) to dinner (pizzas, as an accompaniment to chili or other dishes).
    They are very customizable. Just add cheese and/or spices to the dough to vary them according to your taste.
    Having a fresh, warm bread on hand can perk up any meal.
    These are fast. The dough takes literally seconds to make in the processor or mixer. After a short rise, they are ready to shape and fry with no additional rise. To speed the rising along, place the covered dough container in the oven with the light on.  The light will provide enough heat to assist in the rising.  Check it to make sure it doesn't exceed  75° to 80° F.
    They can be made ahead and frozen for months well wrapped. Thaw and heat wrapped in aluminum foil for a few minutes and there ready to go!
    They are very customizable. Just add cheese and/or spices to vary them according to your taste.
    Having a fresh, warm bread on hand can perk up any meal.
     
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 6flatbreadsCalories: 200kcalCarbohydrates: 29gProtein: 7gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.03gCholesterol: 3mgSodium: 324mgPotassium: 106mgFiber: 2gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 50IUVitamin C: 0.01mgCalcium: 41mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Zimtsterne - German Cinnamon Stars

    Modified: Dec 20, 2024 · Published: Dec 19, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 11 Comments

    White, star shaped cinnamon Zimtsterne cookies are flowing fro a container surounded by holiday ornaments.

    Zimtsterne star shaped cookies are one of Germany's favorite Christmas cookies. Naturally gluten free with four ingredients, these cookies are fat free and go together in minutes. Germany is famous for its maravelous baking such as Murbteig Pastry, a lemon butter cookie with endless variations and Pfeffernusse cookies, those delightful powdered sugared "peppernuts" as they are known.

    As with some European cookies, Zimtsterne cookies are finished with a snow white meringue that is baked with the cookie. It forms a crispy finish to an otherwise softer textured cookie.

    White, star shaped cinnamon Zimtsterne cookies are flowing fro a container surounded by holiday ornaments.

    Four ingredients including almond flour make up the cookie and the frosting. One of the best things about this cookie is the longer they sit in an airtight tin, the better they taste. As with most spice heavy cookies, they need time to mellow. Honey Diamonds are another example of a spice rich cookie.

    The amount of cinnamon may seem like a lot, but it mellows as they sit.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Variations

    Hazelnut flour can be substituted for the almond flour.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Four ingredients make up Zimtsterne, almond flour, powdered sugar, cinnamon and egg whites.

    FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, egg whites

    BACK ROW: Almond flour, powdered sugar

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions for Zimtsterne

    This collage shows the almond flour and cinnamon in a large bowl, mixed together, egg whites in mixing bowl and powdered sugar being added.

    Step 1. Add the cinnamon to the almond flour in a large bowl. Step 2. Whisk together completely. Step 3. Add the egg whites to the mixing bowl. Beat until soft peaks for. Step 4. Slowly add the powdered sugar to the beaten egg whites.

    The second collage shows the egg whites beating, the egg whites finished beating, ¾ cup whites removed and the almond flour mixture being added to the mixing bowl.

    Step 5. Beat the egg whites for up to 8 minutes until very, very thick. Step 6. They will not reach the firm stage but will have increased. They will fall off the beater in a thick stream. Step 7. Remove ¾ cup for the frosting. Set aside. Step 8. Add the almond/cinnamon mixture to the egg whites and fold in by hand.

    This collage shows the completed dough, the dough rolled between waxed paper, the top paper removed and a star cutter on the dough.

    Step 9. Mix the dough completely. It will be very thick. Step 10. Flatten the dough and place it between waxed paper. Roll to about ⅓". Step 11. Remove the top piece of paper. Step 12. Cut the cookies out with a star shaped cutter. I used a 2 ¼" cutter but smaller sizes would work well also.

    The last collage shows a dollop of meringue on a  cookie, a pointed offset spatula, the meringue covering the cookie and a round moon shaped cookie.

    Step 13. Apply about ½ teaspoon of the reserved meringue on top of the cookie. Step 14. The easiest way to do this is to use an offset spatula with a pointed end. Step 15. Push the meringue from the center to the edges of the cookie. Step 16. Applying the meringue takes a bit of patience and time. Lacking those, simply cut out round "moons" and cover those.

    Recipe FAQS

    What does the name Zimtsterne mean?

    It is German for Cinnamon star.

    What is the origin of Zimtsterne?

    While the origin is unclear, it is first mentioned in the mid 16th century being attributed to Swabian region of Germany. Because cinnamon was very expensive only the very rich or royalty enjoyed these cookies.

    When are these served?

    Zimtsterne is one of the favorite Chistmas cookie in Germany. They are also served at other holidays.

    Expert Tips

    • While really easy to make, it is important to beat the meringue sufficiently to increase the volume and to get it as thick as possible.
    • By working the dough between waxed paper, the dough rolls out without using additional powdered sugar which can caramelize when baked.
    • Use whatever size cutter you want.
    • While the star is the traditional shape of the cookie, other shapes can be used.
    • Because the dough is very thick when mixing is finished, the almond flour and cinnamon should be whisked to combine so they are evenly distributed when mixed.
    • These cookies should be dried for about 24 hours to look their best.
    • Place the cookies on the lowest rung of the oven. The meringue should remain as white as possible even after baking.
    • The cookies should be aged a couple of days before eating. The amount of cinnamon may seem excessive but after storing it will become less strong.
    The photo of the Zimtsterne shows a single cookies surrounded by Christmas decorations.

    More European Cookies to Enjoy

    • A plate of Viennese Whirls with strawberry and chocolate filling in front of gift boxes.
      Viennese Whirl Cookies
    • A plate of 3 Haselnussmakronen -German Hazelnut Macroons on a plate with a cup and saucer and more macaroons in the background.
      HASELNUSSMAKRONEN -German Hazelnut Macaroons
    • A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.
      Cuccidati - Italy's Finest Cookie
    • Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.
      Langue de Chat

    If you love these Zimtsterne or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. Thank you and I appreciate each of you being here!

    White, star shaped cinnamon Zimtsterne cookies are flowing fro a container surounded by holiday ornaments.

    Zimtsterne - German Cinnamon Stars

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Zimtsterne star shaped cookies are one of Germany's favorite Christmas cookies. Naturally gluten free with few ingredients, these cookies are fat free and go together in minutes.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Drying Time 1 day d
    Total Time 1 day d 45 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine German
    Servings 30 cookies
    Calories 103 kcal

    Equipment

    • Star shaped cookie cutter
    • Pointed offset spatula
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 3 ¼ cups almond flour or meal (370 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons cinnamon
    • 3 large egg whites (100 grams)
    • 2 cups sifted powdered sugar (225 grams)

    Instructions
     

    • Line several baking sheets with parchment paper.
    • Whisk the almond or hazelnut flour and cinnamon together completely. Set aside.
    • Place the egg whites in the bowl of a mixer and beat until soft peaks form. Slowly add the powdered sugar and beat for about 8 minutes. This will not form stiff peaks, but it will be very thick and fall from the beater in thick ribbons.
    • Remove ¾ cup of the meringue for the frosting. Set aside.
    • Fold the almond flour/cinnamon mixture into the remaining meringue completely.
    • Flatten the dough into a round and place between waxed paper. Roll out about ⅓" thick.
    • Cut the cookies into stars or moons and place on the parchment lined baking sheets about 1 ½" apart to make finishing them easier. Re-roll the scraps and make more cookies.
    • Drop about ½ to ¾ teaspoon of the reserved meringue in the middle of the cookie. Push it out to the edges, covering the cookie completely. The easiest way I have found to do this is to use a small offset spatula with a pointed end.
    • Let the cookies dry at room temperature for about 24 hours.
    • Preheat the oven to 225°F. Place the cookies on the lowest rack in the oven and bake for 20 to 25 minutes until baked through. The meringue should stay as white as possible.

    Notes

     
    All of my recipes include Step by Step photos to guide you.  
      • While really easy to make, it is important to beat the meringue sufficiently to increase the volume and to get it as thick as possible.
      • By working the dough between waxed paper, the dough rolls out without using additional powdered sugar which can caramelize when baked.
      • Use whatever size cutter you want.
      • While the star is the traditional shape of the cookie, other shapes can be used.
      • Because the dough is very thick when mixing is finished, the almond flour and cinnamon should be whisked to combine so they are evenly distributed when mixed.
      • These cookies should be dried before baking for about 24 hours to look their best.
      • Place the cookies on the lowest rung of the oven. The meringue should remain as white as possible even after baking.
      • The cookies should be aged a couple of days before eating. The amount of cinnamon may seem excessive but after storing it will become less strong.
      • These cookies will last for weeks in an airtight container.  They only get better.  

    Nutrition

    Calories: 103kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 3gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 0.4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.001gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.002gSodium: 6mgPotassium: 9mgFiber: 2gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 2IUVitamin C: 0.03mgCalcium: 34mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Traditional Springerle Cookies

    Modified: Jan 19, 2024 · Published: Dec 11, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 13 Comments

    Springerle Cookies on a mustard colored plate with a springerle rolling pin and mold in the background.

    Springerle Cookies originated in the German province of Swabia in the 15th century. Originally made to honor Church Holy Days, they have become a much loved anise flavored Christmas cookie and are often used as Christmas tree ornaments. 

    Springerle Cookies on a mustard colored plate with a springerle rolling pin and mold in the background.

    Special rolling pins with various carvings, as well as molds are used to imprint the cookie dough.  The oldest known springerle mold carved with an Easter Lamb is from Switzerland and was carved from wood in the 14th century. They can be found online.

    Two springerle rolling pins with impressions and two cookie molds.

    I have used the original leavening agent, baker's ammonia or hartshorn.  It bakes up lighter and crisper than baking powder which is often used in America.  Because there is no fat in Springerle, except for the egg yolks, it is more like a firm cake than what we usually think of as a cookie.  It is also mixed differently than most cookies.  A whole egg meringue is made into which the flour and flavoring is added.  Using cake flour helps keep the cookies a bit softer after baking.  

    While most recipes I have seen recommend storing these up to 2 weeks before eating, I find that the cookies will become much harder and recommend eating them within a week to ten days at the most. If using them as tree ornaments, dry them out after baking.

    More European Cookies for your Enjoyment

    • Murbteig Pastry - Delicate lemon butter cookies form Germany.
    • Sienna Lace - Two delicate spiced lacy cookies are sandwiched with chocolate.
    • Chocolate Spice Olive Oil Biscotti - perfect with tea or coffee.
    • Kifle - A fantastic sour cream pastry is wrapped around a walnut filling.
    • Almond Macaroons - A naturally gluten free cookie half dipped in chocolate.
    • French Macarons with Chocolate Raspberry Filling - What else is there to say?
    • Sarah Bernhardts - A gorgeous naturally gluten free cookie with a macaron base, topped with a kiss of chocolate ganache, dipped in chocolate and finished with gold leaf.
    • Sablé Breton  - One of the most simple cookies but with a big wallop of flavor, this cookie comes from the Brittany region of France with its wonderful butter and sea salt, both used in this cookie.
    • French Butter Cookies, Petit Buerre are simple, buttery, crisp, barely sweet but addictive, easily made and last indefinitely.
    • Zimtsterne or German Cinnamon Stars are meringue based and held together with ground nuts.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    The Most Beautiful Springerle

    A virtual friend of mine Sally BR of Bewitching Kitchen is an artist in the kitchen. While she blogs about food in general, it is her cookies, pastries and breads that are standouts. Here are a couple of pictures she sent of my Springerle cookies beautifully painted. Do check out her blog, she's amazing.

    Springerle cookies press out and baked.

    These are the cookies pressed in from molds. They are baked and perfectly white.

    These are the Springerle cookies painted.

    These are the same cookies gorgeously painted. If these had small holes made in the cookies prior to baking, they would make stunning, keepsake tree ornaments to be treasured tied with gold cord.

    Springerle Ingredients

    The ingredients for the Springerle are flour, sugar, ansie exract, and baker's ammonia.

    FRONT ROW: Anise extract, eggs, ammonium carbonate (Baker's Ammonia)

    BACK ROW: Cake flour, granulated sugar

    Ammonium Carbonate (Baker's Ammonia) is used in Europe as the leavening agent that shows up most in their cookies. It is easily found online at Amazon and Lorann Oils. When the bottle is opened do not take a whiff. This is the same stuff that is used to bring around someone who has fainted. While the smell is strong, it dissipates completely when baked. No hint of the smell or taste is left. Baking powder can be substituted but the results are not quite the same.

    Granulated sugar is used in this recipe. When researching, I found quite a few of the recipes using powdered sugar. When I tested both ways, the granulated sugar cookies held the shape of the cookie and their shape and design better.

    Cake Flour is used for a slightly softer cookies. 2 ¼ cups all-purpose flour can be substituted for the cake flour. They will weigh the same at 315 grams.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage for Springerle shows the eggs in the mixing bowl, the eggs beaten, the ammonia and anise extract mixed and the the egg mixture beaten.

    Step 1. Place the eggs in the mixing bowl fitted with the whisk attachment. Step 2. Beat until pale yellow. Step 3. Combine the anise extract and ammonia and add to the eggs. Step 4. Add the sugar a bit at a time, as when making meringue. Beat until the mixture is very light, has increased in volume and is thick.

    Collage 2 shows the first addition of flour, the mixed in, the second addition of flour and the finished   dough.

    Step 5. Remove the whisk attachment and insert the paddle. This is a heavy, sticky dough so I wouldn't use the scraper paddle. Add half the flour to the egg mixture. Step 6. Incorporate the flour completely. Step 7. Add the remaining flour. Step 8. Beat on low until completely mixed. The dough will be rather sticky. This is as it should be. Do not add more flour.

    The third collage shows the dough wrapped in plastic wrap, placed between waxed paper, rolled out with the end cut off and the pieces of dough place on the sides to even out the dough.

    Step 9. Gather the dough together and knead it a few times into a rectangle. Step 10. Place it in plastic wrap and chill for a couple of hours to firm it up to make it easier to roll. Step 11. As much as I try, I don't always roll the dough into a perfect rectangle. So, cut off the bottom. Step 12. Place the dough around the edges to make a rectangle. Press them together, place the waxed paper on top and roll to make a rectangle about ⅜" thick and a little wider than the width of the springerle rolling pin if using one.

    The fourth collage shows the dough dusted with powdered sugar and rolled out, the springerle rolling pin on the bottom of the dough, the dough with the impressions on it, and then dusted off and cut.

    Step 13. After the dough is rolled out, dust lightly with powdered sugar. Step 14. Place the rolling pin with the dividing line between the cookies on the bottom of the dough. Step 15. Roll upward apply enough pressure to make sure the carvings are marking the dough. Step 16. Divide the cookies between the lines on the dough using a fluted pastry cutter or a knife. As you can see, I preferred the knife as I thought the cutter dragged the dough and didn't make a good cut. Freeze to firm up.

    The last collage shows the cut cookies, between wax paper, bottom side up, one strip of cookies, a tray of cut cookies, one cookie with a hole in it for a tree ornament

    Step 17. When the cookies are firm, keeping them between the waxed paper, turn them upside down. Peel back the paper on one stripe and simply break them apart. Step 19. Place them about and inch apart on a baking sheet. Let dry for 48 hours at room temperature. Bake as directed. Step 20. If using them for ornaments, make a hole in the top of each cookie before baking. Make sure the dough is cleaned off the hole on the backside. I used the tip of an instant read thermometer to make these holes. Reroll the scraps to make more cookies.

    Springerle Molds

    This collage shows the springerle mold, the mold dusted with  powdered sugar, covered with dough, and turned upside down.

    Step 1. This is my wooden mold. Step 2. Dust it with powdered sugar. I don't like to use flour because I feel it can clog up the fine details since it is heavier. Step 3. Make sure the dough is cold and firm. Roll the dough out and make sure it covers the entire mold, including the edges. Press it firmly into the mold. I run my rolling pin lightly over it. Step 4. Turn the mold upside down and press lightly on it to make sure it is getting into the crevices.

    The cookie as it comes from the mold. The finished cookie which is trimmed and brushed to remove the powdered sugar.

    Step 5. Turn the mold over and carefully remove the cookie. Step 6. Trim the cookie and brush off the powdered sugar. Dry and bake as directed.

    Recipe FAQs

    What does Springerle mean in German?

    Springerle means "little knight" or "little jumper" which some people think refers to jumping horses on the molds or rolling pins.

    How is the rolling pin or mold cleaned?

    Use a stiff brush such as a toothbrush to scrub as much as you can from the carving. Then rinse it under water, scrubbing to remove any stubborn dough. Pat dry and then allow to dry completely at room temperature. This is easily done by standing it up in a sturdy container. Store it in a cool, dry place.

    Can anise seeds be used to flavor the dough?

    Yes. Some recipes dust the work surface with anise seeds and place the rolled out dough on top. When the springerle rolling pin is pressed into the dough and rolled the cookies pick up the seeds on the bottom.

    Why are the Springerle cookies dried?

    Drying allows the surface of the cookie to form a “crust” which helps set the desired impression during the baking process.

    Expert Tips

    • The cookies should bake so the top remains white or almost white while the bottom is a golden brown.
    • To test to see if they are done, break a baked one open to make sure there is no doughy center.
    • It is important to dry the cookies so the designs will be set when they are baked. In fact, the designs can be seen more clearly even before going into the oven.
    • The cookies will rise from the bottom. Mine are never evenly risen.
    • These are not a soft cookie. They are firm the first few days and get harder as they are stored. They are perfect with a cup of coffee or tea.
    • To soften them a bit, store them with a piece of bread, changing it as need to keep it fresh. They'll last a long time in an airtight tin.
    • I prefer powdered sugar instead of flour for dusting the molds are sprinkling over the dough before rolling the designs on. It is easier to brush off and even if all of it isn't removed it tastes better than baked flour.
    • Freezing the dough after impressing and cutting it makes it easier to keep the shape without stretching it.
    • Cake flour is preferred for a cookie that stays a bit softer longer. 2 ¼ cups all-purpose flour can be substituted if need be. The weight remains the same.

    A platter of springerle with a springerle rolling pin and mold in the background

    More Cookies to Enjoy

    • Dulche de leche cookies with the five finishes - pecan, pecan and sugar, plain chocolate, plain cookie, with sanding sugar
      Dulce de Leche Cookies - Your Way
    • Crescent shaped
      Kifle with Walnut Filling
    • Honey Diamond cookies
      Honey Diamonds - A cookie? A small cake?
    • Finished photo
      Pfeffernusse Cookies

    If you love this Springerle or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in the comments below. Thank you and I appreciate each of you being here!

    Springerle Cookies on a mustard colored plate with a springerle rolling pin and mold in the background.

    Traditional Springerle Cookies

    Helen S. Fletcher
    With no shortening in Springerle Cookies, it is a combination of a cookie and a cake. The drying time before baking is to dry the top of the cookie so the design becomes prominent. This anise flavored German cookie is great to eat as well as to use for tree ornaments.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 40 minutes mins
    Drying Time 2 days d
    Total Time 2 days d 40 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine German
    Servings 28 cookies
    Calories 73 kcal

    Equipment

    • Springerle rolling pin or molds optional
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
    • ¼ teaspoon ammonium carbonate or baker's ammonia
    • 2 teaspoons anise extract
    • 2 ½ cups cake flour (315 grams)* see substitution below
    • Powdered sugar, as needed
    • *2 ¼ cups all-purpose flour can be substituted. The weight remains the same.

    Instructions
     

    • Line a baking sheet or two with parchment paper. Set aside
    • Fit the mixer with the whisk attchment.
    • Add the eggs to the bowl.
    • Beat until pale yellow.
    • Stir the ammonium carbonate (baker's ammonia) into the anise extract. Mix it into the eggs completely.
    • Add the sugar gradually and beat on high for abut 5 to 8 minutes until very thick, light in color.
    • Switch to the paddle attachment and incorporate half the flour. Add the remaining flour and mix well. The dough will be somewhat sticky at this point and will not completely come together.
    • Remove the dough to a work surface and knead together briefly to make a cohesive rectangle. Wrap it in plastic wrap and refrigerate for an hour or to which will make it easier to roll out.

    Using a Springerle Rolling Pin

    • Roll between waxed paper into a rectangle about ⅜" thick. If your roll out looks less than a rectangle, see the photos on how to fix it. If the dough is warm at this point, refrigerate or freeze still between waxed paper just to firm up a bit.
    • When ready, remove the top piece of waxed paper only and sprinkle lightly with powdered sugar. Place the rolling pin with the dividing line between the cookies on the bottom of the dough. Roll upward applying enough pressure to make sure the carvings are marking the dough. Divide the cookies between the lines on the dough using a fluted pastry cutter or a knife. As you can see, I preferred the knife as I thought the cutter dragged the dough and didn't make a good cut. Freeze to firm up.
    • For the final step, turn the cookies over and pull back the waxed paper on one strip of cookies. Remove the cookies and break along the cut line to divide them. Place them on the parchment line sheets about 1" apart. Reroll any scraps and make more cookies.
    • Let the cookies dry for 48 hours to allow the patterns on the cookies to set before baking.
    • Preheat the oven to 325°F. Double Pan and bake for about 15 to 20 minutes depending upon the thickness. The cookies should stay as white as possible with the bottoms, which will have risen, a golden brown. Don't be concerned if they do not rise evenly. I don't think mine every have and it doesn't really show.

    Using Springerle Molds

    • For the molds, roll the pastry out as above. Cut pieces that will completely cover the mold. Sprinkle the mold with powdered sugar. Press the dough firmly into the mold.
    • To insure a good relief on the cookie, turn them mold upside down and press it on the table.
    • Turn it upright and very carefully remove the cookie from the mold. Trim the edges and place it on the parchment paper. Dry as above.
    • If using the Springerle for ornaments, make a hole in the top of each one. I found the pointed tip of an instant thermometer was perfect for this. Remove any excess dough on the back of the hole.
    • Let them dry at room temperature for 48 hours.
    • Preheat the oven to 325°F. Double Pan and bake for abut 15 to 20 minutes depending upon the thickness. The cookies should stay as white as possible with the bottoms, which will have risen, a golden brown. Don't be concerned if they do not rise evenly. I don't think mine every have and it doesn't really show.
    • To check to see if they are baked through, remove one cookie and break it open to make sure there is no unbaked dough.
    • Yield: 24 to 28 cookies with rerolls.
    • Store the cookies in an airtight container. These are not a soft cookie. They are firm the first few days and get harder as they are stored. They are perfect with a cup of coffee or tea. To soften them a bit, store them with a piece of bread, changing it as need to keep it fresh. They'll last a long time in an airtight tin.

    Notes

    Ammonium Carbonate (Baker's Ammonia) is used in Europe as the leavening agent that shows up most in their cookies. It is easily found online here and here. When the bottle is opened do not take a whiff. This is the same stuff that is used to bring around someone who has fainted. While the smell is strong, it dissipates completely when baked. No hint of the smell or taste is left. Baking powder can be substituted but the results are not quite the same.
    Granulated sugar is used in this recipe. When researching, I found quite a few of the recipes using powdered sugar. When I tested both ways, the granulated sugar cookies held the shape of the cookie and their shape and design better.
    Cake Flour is used for a slightly softer cookies. 2 ¼ cups all-purpose flour can be substituted for the cake flour. They will weigh the same at 315 grams. 
    The cookies should bake so the top remains white or almost white while the bottom is a golden brown.  The cookies will rise from the bottom. Mine are never evenly risen.
    To test to see if they are done, break a baked one open to make sure there is no doughy center. 
    These are not a soft cookie. They area very firm the first week to 10 days and get harder as they are stored. They are perfect with a cup of coffee or tea.
    To soften them a bit, store them with a piece of bread, changing it as need to keep it fresh. They'll last a long time in an airtight tin.
    I prefer powdered sugar instead of flour for dusting the molds and sprinkling over the dough before rolling the designs on. It is easier to brush off and even if all of it isn't removed it tastes better than baked flour. 
    Freezing the dough after impressing and cutting makes it easier to keep the shape.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 28gCalories: 73kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 2gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 0.1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gTrans Fat: 0.001gCholesterol: 13mgSodium: 5mgPotassium: 16mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 20IUCalcium: 4mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Holiday Roundup

    Modified: Dec 3, 2023 · Published: Dec 4, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 10 Comments

    An Orange chiffon Cake is filled with cranberry curd and chocolate. The cake is finished with whipped cream and julienned candied orange zest

    From outstanding desserts to breads, a soup, snacks, gifts and more, you're sure to find something new to add to your holidays. Because I know your days are as filled as mine with things to do, the majority of these recipes can be made in whole or in part ahead of time.

    Orange Cranberry Cake - A Holiday Specialty
    Orange chiffon cake, Cranberry curd and chocolate ganache enclosed in white as snow whipped cream...and it can be made ahead.
    Check out this recipe
    An Orange chiffon Cake is filled with cranberry curd and chocolate. The cake is finished with whipped cream and julienned candied orange zest
    Raspberry Ripple Coffeecake on a white plate with a cup of tea.
    Raspberry Ripple Coffeecake
    If you're looking for a really easy, quick to make, great tasting, crumb topped coffee cake this Raspberry Ripple Coffee Cake is it. A simple cream cheese batter mixes up in minutes for a cake that is perfect anytime of the day.
    Check out this recipe
    The spectacular Buche de Noel
    Buche de Noel
    The Buche de Noel is a spectacular extravaganza from France and is one dessert, among many, of their gifts to the world of food. And what a gift it is! While it looks complicated, it can be done over several weeks.
    Check out this recipe
    Mincemeat Tarts
    A Christmas tradition in England, mincemeat tarts are the perfect ending to a holiday meal and could become your next tradition.
    Check out this recipe
    Mincemeat Tartlets
    Slice of Caramel Apple Tart
    Caramel Apple Tart
    Caramel Apple Tart is everything you would want in an apple dessert.  Full of apples, spices, brown sugar and brandy, it's covered with walnut streusel and caramel. This was a fall favorite with my clientele at the bakery
    Check out this recipe
    Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake
    This Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake shouts out fall.  The tartness of the cranberries is tempered by the streusel in this easily made treat.
    Check out this recipe
    Squares of Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake with cranberries and cinnamon sticks
    Two Chocolate Trufles on a silver server.
    Chocolate Chocolate Truffles
    At the bakery we were known for our chocolate. These Chocolate Chocolate Truffles were the same ones we made - hundreds and hundreds that were hand dipped. The secret is to freeze the fillings first making coating them so much easier to initially coat.
    Check out this recipe
    European Nut Roll with Three Fillings
    This European Nut Roll with Three Fillings is a recipe long in my family.  Every household had their own version.  Nut rolls are especially popular during holidays and celebrations in Central Europe.
    Check out this recipe
    A rich yeast dough is filled three ways one each with almond, poppyseed and walnuts
    Orange Date Bread Pudding with Hard Sauce drizzled on
    Orange Date Bread Pudding
    Bread puddings are a favorite this time of year and this is a standout among them. Easy to make, easier to eat!
    Check out this recipe
    Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread Recipe
     I don’t know about you, but the last thing I want to do is think about on a holiday is making a big breakfast. What if this Chocolate Cranberry Quick Bread is stashed in the freezer waiting to add to the festive feeling?
    Check out this recipe
    Several slices of Chocolate Cranberry Bread sists on a cream colored plate surrounded by Muffins, cranberries, a teal colored napkin, cup and saucer and a miniature pumpkin gourd.
    Super Fast and Easy Brioche Rolls
    These don't get any easier than my 60 second method of making brioche in the food processor...and they can be made ahead and frozen.
    Check out this recipe
    Two Brioche Rolls are on a plate with a jar of jam.
    Double Chocolate Mousse Cake
    Double Chocolate Mousse Cake
    Both white chocolate and dark chocolate mousse team up with a deeply chocolate, yet light textured chocolate chiffon cake. The Double Chocolate Mousse Cake is beautiful, light and easy to make and while full of flavor is not overwhelming sweet.
    Check out this recipe
    Reine de Saba Cake with Candied Cranberries
    This frozen Reine de Saba is the perfect dessert for a busy schedule as the entire thing can be done a month ahead.  If you do freeze it ahead, keep it in the pan so the filling doesn’t get smooshed.
    Check out this recipe
    This Riene de Saba cake features 2 layers of chocolate cake with a mousse like filling, topped with candied cranberries
    Scone with Cranberry Strawberry Jam on a plate
    Scones with Cranberry Strawberry Jam
    The scones are easily made and the jam requires no canning if kept in the refrigerator or freezer.  The combination of the cranberries and strawberries makes a sweet-tart topping for the scones, toast, biscuits, or pancakes and waffles. A jar of the jam makes a perfect hostess gift.
    Check out this recipe
    Beef Stroganoff Soup with Wine and Cheese Bread
    This soup takes all the components of this entrée including red wine and brandy and turns them into a delicious, easy to make soup that only gets better made ahead,
    Check out this recipe
    Beef Strogonoff Soup
    Finished Baguettes
    Wine and Cheese Baguettes- A Favorite bread
    Wine and Cheese Baguettes are one of my all-time favorite breads. This bread couldn't be easier to make with the help of a food processor. While gorgeous to look at this bread actually tastes of the white wine and swiss cheese.
    Check out this recipe
    Dobos Torte - An Hungarian Speciality
    Dobos Torte is a Hungarian multilayered cake consisting of anywhere between 6 to 11 layers of spongecake filled with an intense, but super light, chocolate buttercream made like no other I have seen.  Traditionally it is topped with hard caramel fans.  Since no one ever ate the caramel and it was a pain to make and cut, I changed it to chocolate!
    Check out this recipe
    Finished photo
    Cranberry Fresh Pineapple Relish
    Cranberry Fresh Pineapple Relish
    This quick to put together Cranberry Fresh Pineapple Relish will keep in the refrigerator for a week, so make it ahead of time so you have one less thing to do on the day of the get together.
    Check out this recipe
    Hot Curried Party Mix
    Be sure to make this Hot Curried Party Mix a minimum of one day ahead – a week is better. Stored in an airtight container, this will last a month, if you can keep out of it. It also makes a fantastic gift.
    Check out this recipe
    Hot Curried Party Mix in a bowl
    Hot Peppered Pecans
    Hot Peppered Pecans
    These pecans are a standout. Heat Alert -  they are hot!!  So if you don't favor a lot of heat, tone down all the pepper and the hot pepper sauce. Start with half and go from there. Packaged up with a pretty bow and they make a great gift.
    Check out this recipe
    Puff Pastry Crackers
    I don't know about you, but last minute everything seems to happen at my house and these Puff Pastry Crackers take care of that. With little time to plan or think ahead, it makes it difficult sometimes when your guests expect something a bit out of the ordinary.
    Check out this recipe
    Puff Pastry Crackers
    Cranberry Orange Muffins in three sizes, mini, regular and Texas on a gray plate with a red napkin.
    A Cranberry Orange Muffin
    A Cranberry Orange Muffin recipe features the flavors of fall fruit and is quickly made featuring fresh or frozen cranberries and orange zest.  A great recipe for beginner bakers. 
    Check out this recipe
    Stuffed Cinnamon French Toast and Orange Sauce
    Two pieces of cinnamon bread filled with an orange cream stuffing are dredged in an egg mixture with a few additions to spark it up served with an Orange Cream Sauce borrowed from Crepes Suzette.
    Check out this recipe
    The finished French Toast arranged in a circle on a plate with the fruit and Orange Sauce in the center on top.
    Salmon Wellington cut open to expose the filling on a plate
    Salmon Wellington with Lemon Asparagus Risotto Cakes
    These are particularly good for entertaining as they must be frozen solid -  so you can make them a month in advance, wrap well and tuck away in the freezer.  By freezing them solid, the salmon won't  overcook in the time it takes to bake the puff pastry.   It makes a perfect entrée for entertaining.
    Check out this recipe

    Want more Ideas for the Holidays? Try these Thanksgiving Recipes!

    Viennese Whirl Cookies

    Modified: Nov 29, 2023 · Published: Nov 30, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

    A plate of Viennese Whirls with strawberry and chocolate filling in front of gift boxes.

    These Viennese Whirl Cookies come to you from......England. I was surprised also. It seems they were thought to look like something that came from Vienna. Whatever was thought about them, they are a stunningly delicious, melt in your mouth cookie with only four ingredients for the basic cookie.

    A plate of Viennese Whirls with strawberry and chocolate filling in front of gift boxes.

    While the traditional English version is filled with buttercream and raspberry jam, I've upped the ante with a Strawberry Chocolate filling that will wow you!

    This entire cookie is so easy to make, you won't want to miss it.

    If you love sandwich cookies, here are a few more: Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies, Dulce de Leche Your Way, and the Milano cookie of your dreams Langue de Chat.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why This Recipe is for You

    • Soooo easy to make.
    • 4 ingredients for the cookie that are most likely in your pantry.
    • The Viennese Whirls are good by themselves and extraordinary when sandwiched - your choice.
    • The Strawberry buttercream is great to fill a cake or top cupcakes and it actually tastes like strawberries unlike those made with jam.
    • These last a while if kept in an airtight tin.
    • They can be frozen for longer storage.

    Importance of Double Panning

    Double panning refers to placing one pan on top of another to slow down the bottom of cookies or baked goods becoming overly browned before the rest of the item is baked through. It is especially important when using brown sugar, molasses, honey, corn syrup, light or dark, chocolate and a lot of butter .

    See the photos below to see the differences. For more information on double panning, please see my post.

    Variations

    • A lemon version can be made by adding the zest of a large lemon plus ¾ teaspoon citric acid (optional) to the butter and sugar when creaming. The citric acid can be found online. It adds a tartness to the cookies to emulate the taste of whole lemons.
    • And the zest of a small orange for an orange version.
    • For a citric version, add a teaspoon of lemon zest, orange zest and lime zest for an unusual flavor.
    • There's a killer mincemeat filling that makes a delicious filling

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Viennese Whirl Cookies

    Ingredients for the Viennese Whirls are, flour, powdered sugar, butter and vanilla.

    FRONT ROW:  Unsalted butter, vanilla

    BACK ROW:  Cake flour, powdered sugar

    Filling Ingredients

    Filling ingredients include, freeze dried strawberries, chocolate, heavy cream, red food coloring, butter, powdered sugar, almond extract, and milk.

    FRONT ROW:  Almond extract, milk, powdered sugar

    MIDDLE ROW:  Red food coloring, unsalted butter

    BACK ROW:  Freeze dried strawberries, chocolate, heavy cream

    Freeze Dried Strawberries can be found in stores or online. Trader Joe's has them as well as other freeze-dried fruit at the best prices I have found.

    I don't prefer chocolate chips.  My chocolate of choice is Callebaut #811 Semisweet Callets. They look like chocolate chips but are pure chocolate that can be used where any good chocolate is needed.

    Heavy Cream is higher in fat content than those marked whipping cream. It is great to use wherever a recipes specifies.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Draw a template on parchment paper using a 1 ¾" round cookie cutter or whatevet size you want, spaced about 1" apart. Place a second piece of paper on top. Fit a piping bag with a 38" open star tip.

    Collage 1 shows the butter, powdered sugar, vanilla, those ingredients mixed, flour added, batter finished.

    Step 1. Place the butter, powdered sugar and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer. Step 2. Cream together until light. Step 3. Add all of the flour. Step 4. Beat on low until completely combined.

    The second collage shows the batter in a bowl, the batter warmed to make it easier to pipe, the piped cookies on a baking sheet and the baked cookies.

    Step 5. If the batter is too stiff to pipe, place only as much as can be piped at once in a microwave safe bowl. Step 6. Microwave 4 or 5 seconds to soften. Repeat, with 3 more seconds if necessary. Do not get it too soft or the cookies won't keep their shape. Step 7. Pipe the cookies into whatever shape you desire. Step 8. Double Pan and bake the cookies. Cool them on the pan.

    The third collages shows the tops of two cookies, one baked on a single baking sheet, the other on a double pan, the bottoms of the cookies one dark, one lighter, cream heated and chocolate added to the hot cream.

    Step 9. The left cookie was baked on a single pan, the right cookie on a double pan. Step 10. The bottom of the left cookie is noticeably darker than the right cookie which was double panned. Step 11. Heat the cream until it is steamy but not boiling. Step 12. Add the chocolate to the hot cream.

    The chocolate is submerged under the cream, the cream and chocolate are whisked until smooth, the chocolate is spread on a pan, then covered with plastic wrap.

    Step 13. Submerge the chocolate under the hot cream. Let it sit for 3 or 4 minutes. Step 14. Whisk gently until completely mixed. Don't be too enthusiastic or air bubbles will be incorporated. Step 15. To quick cool the ganache, spread it on a rimmed baking sheet. Step 16. Cover it with plastic wrap until it is pipable.

    Strawberry Buttercream

    Please see the how to photos on my Strawberry Buttercream Frosting post.

    Assembly

    The final collage shows the bottom of the cookies piped with strawberry buttercrem, with chocolate gaache and finished cookies.

    Step 17. Match the individual cookies for size. Turn them upside down. Pipe the strawberry buttercream in one of two ways, either as a ring around the outer edge or fully covering the cookie. Step 18. Fill the open center of the ring with the chocolate ganache. Step 19. Or, pipe the chocolate ganache directly on top of the cookie completely covered with the strawberry buttercream. Step 20. Place the top cookie on the filled cookies.

    Recipe FAQS

    What makes Viennese Whirls melt in your mouth?

    The powdered sugar. Cookies made with powdered sugar have this quality whereas cookies made with granulated sugar are more firm.

    What should I do if the batter is too stiff to pipe?

    Microwave only the amount that will be piped at once for 3 to 5 seconds in the microwave. Do not get too soft or they won't hold their shape. 

    What other fillings can be used?

    All chocolate, mincemeat is a great filling, just process it to smooth it out, any jam you wish, any flavor of buttercream you wish.

    Expert Tips

    • Use a small open star B tip about ⅜" for the best look when piping the strawberry buttercream or the chocolate ganache.
    • For a list of piping tips see my post on Lange de Chat.
    • If the pastry is too hard to pipe, microwave only the amount you will use immediately for 3 to 5 seconds to soften it. Repeat if necessary but be careful not to get it too soft or the cookie will not hold its shape.
    • The butter for these cookies should be softer than usual to aid with the piping.
    • Be sure to double pan to prevent the over browning of the bottoms and to make sure the tops are evenly browned.
    • Pair the cookies for size prior to filling for the best looking cookies.
    This photos shows the cookies on a white plate with holly berries and a red ball.
    • Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.
      Langue de Chat
    • Toasted coconut and macadamia nuts are the basis of these heart shaped shorbreads on a lattice plate over purple.
      Tropical Shortbread Cookies
    • Ready to eat Spritz bars piled up.
      Spritz Bars - Easier than The Cookies
    • Dulche de leche cookies with the five finishes - pecan, pecan and sugar, plain chocolate, plain cookie, with sanding sugar
      Dulce de Leche Cookies - Your Way

    If you love these Viennese Whirl Cookies or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. Thank you and I appreciate each of you being here!

    A plate of Viennese Whirls with strawberry and chocolate filling in front of gift boxes.

    Viennese Whirl Cookies

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These are a stunningly delicious, melt in your mouth cookie with only four ingredients for the basic cookie. While the traditional English version is filled with buttercream and raspberry jam, I've upped the ante with a Strawberry Chocolate filling that will wow you.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 40 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 55 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine English
    Servings 16
    Calories 319 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Viennese Whirl Cookies

    • 1 cup unsalted butter, softened* (225 grams)
    • ½ cup powdered sugar (65 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla
    • 1 ¾ cup cake flour (225 grams)

    Strawberry Filling

    • 1 cup freeze-dried strawberries (34 grams)
    • ⅞ cup powdered sugar (100 grams)
    • ¼ cup unsalted butter (58 grams)
    • ¼ teaspoon almond extract
    • 1 or 2 tablespoons milk
    • Red food coloring, optional

    Chocolate Ganache

    • ¾ cup heavy cream
    • 170 grams semisweet chocolate (not chocolate chips)

    Instructions
     

    Cookies

    • *The butter should be very soft. Softer and usual.
    • Preheat the oven to 375°F. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper.
    • Cream the butter and powdered sugar until light and creamy. if using citrus zest, add it with the butter and sugar.
    • Add the vanilla or alternate flavoring.
    • Add all of the flour, beating on low to combine.

    Shaping the Cookies

    • Draw a template on parchment paper using a 1 ¾" round cookie cutter or any size you wish. Space them about 1" apart. Place a second piece of parchment on top. Fit a piping bag with a ⅜" open star tip. Set aside.
    • If the batter is too stiff to pipe, place only as much as you can pipe at once in a microwave safe bowl and microwave for 3 to 5 seconds. If still too stiff, repeat using the least amount of time. Do not get it too soft or it will not hold its shape when baked.
    • Pipe the cookies to within about ⅛" of the inside of the circle.
    • Remove the template to use on another baking sheet under parchment.
    • Freeze the tray of cookies for 5 or 10 minutes until hard. Double pan and bake for about 13 to 15 minutes until a light medium brown. Cool completely.

    Chocolate Ganache Filling

    • Place the cream in a small saucepan or use the microwave to heat the cream until steaming hot but not boiling.
    • Submerge the chocolate under the cream and let it sit for several minutes. Whisk to smooth out. Cool it until it can be piped and hold its shape. To quick cool the ganache, spread it out on a sheet tray. Cover it with film.

    Strawberry Buttercream

    • Combine all of the ingredients in a mixing bowl. Beat on low to bring together, then raise the mixer to medium to medium high and beat to lighten and increase the volume.

    Sandwiching the Cookies

    • Pair the cookies for size. Lay them out with the bottoms turned up.
    • Pipe the strawberry buttercream either in a circle, leaving the middle exposed or completely cover the cookie.
    • Pipe the chocolate ganache in the middle of the circle or on top of the cookie completely covered with buttercream. Place the second cookie on top.

    Notes

    • A lemon version can be made by adding the zest of a large lemon plus ¾ teaspoon citric acid (optional) to the butter and sugar when creaming. The citric acid can be found online. It adds a tartness to the cookies to emulate the taste of whole lemons.
    • And the zest of a small orange for an orange version.
    • For a citric version, add a teaspoon of lemon zest, orange zest and lime zest for an unusual flavor.
    • There's a killer mincemeat filling that makes a delicious filling. 
    • Use a small open star B tip about ⅜" for the best look when piping the strawberry buttercream or the chocolate ganache.
    • For a list of piping tips see my post on Lange de Chat.
    • If the pastry is too hard to pipe, microwave only the amount you will use immediately for 3 to 5 seconds to soften it. Repeat if necessary but be careful not to get it too soft or the cookie will not hold its shape.
    • The butter for these cookies should be softer than usual to aid with the piping.
    • Be sure to double pan to prevent the over browning of the bottoms and to make sure the tops are evenly browned.
    • Pair the cookies for size prior to filling for the best looking cookies. 
    • Store these in an airtight container for up to 7 days.
    • You will have ganache left over.  Add a bit of extra cream, warm it and it makes an excellent sauce for desserts or hot fudge ice cream.
    • These cookies can be made smaller,  just adjust the baking time a bit. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 16cookiesCalories: 319kcalCarbohydrates: 36gProtein: 2gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 44mgSodium: 5mgPotassium: 250mgFiber: 2gSugar: 22gVitamin A: 522IUVitamin C: 181mgCalcium: 19mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    The Breville Bakery Chef Review

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Nov 16, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 52 Comments

    The Champage colored Breville Bakery Chef Mixer with a glass mixing bow.

    Earlier this year, several of my readers asked about the Breville Bakery Chef Mixer. I had been using my Breville model BEM800XL which was the model before this one and loving it. But I have to admit, I was curious and also wanted to answer their questions. So I contacted Breville and asked if they would supply a machine for me to test. And they did. Here is what I found.

    The Champage colored  Breville Bakery Chef Mixer with a glass mixing bow.

    As a pastry chef for a top restaurant, the best equipment is important to me. While I use larger equipment at the restaurant, this is the closest thing you can get to what I bake with at work.

    One of the most popular posts on this site is the Breville vs. Kitchenaid Mixer review for the former mixer which I loved. And this model has a couple of new items that makes it even more special. And I am here to tell you this one is even better.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Mixer

    The first thing you will notice is how beautiful the box is and well packed the mixer is. It was exciting to go down and down into the box and find yet another attachment, cover or bowl (yes it comes with two bowls, more later on that). While the color of the mixer above is Royal Champagne, It comes in a variety of colors which can be seen on their website including:

    • Sea Salt.
    • Black Truffle.
    • Damson Blue.
    • Oyster Shell.
    • Royal Champagne.

    The next thing that will amaze you is the beauty of this tilt head mixer. It just plain looks fantastic sitting on a counter. Breville is known for its sleek, modern designs with all of it's equipment and this mixer is a perfect example. It not only mixes perfectly, it looks gorgeous while doing it.

    The Perfect Gift

    The Breville Bakery Chef and an autographed copy of my latest book, Craving Cookies is the perfect gift for yourself or for your favorite baker.

    You can buy one or buy both. When buying both, they have to be ordered separately and will come to you separately.

    (As an affiliate of Breville I make a small commission when the mixer is sold. If you decide to buy the mixer, I would very much appreciate it you bought it from my site.)

    Buy Now
    Buy Now

    Let's Talk Bowls

    The Bakery Chef comes with two bowls. A 5-quart glass bowl and a 4-quart stainless steel bowl. One more than other mixers because they know you'll need each one!

    Brevile Bakery Chef Mixer with 2 bowls

    5 Quart Borosilicate Glass Bowl

    I'll be perfectly frank. I was not a fan of glass bowls for a couple of reasons. They are heavy - even empty - and this one has to be hand washed due to the rubber gasket on the bottom. But it won me over when I could see how the batters or mixtures were coming together and how completely they were or were not mixed. No more wondering if the bottom of the mix was being incorporated. Just take a look! It also has a pouring spout and is marked with cups, milliliters, and fluid ounces.

    Borosilicate Glass is extremely durable which is what you want in a mixing bowl. Taken care of, it will last a life time.

    Ok, I get it! You really want something lighter that can go in the dishwasher. Well that's covered too. There's a 5 quart stainless steel bowl that can be purchased separately. It's the same size as the glass bowl and is just as efficient.

    4 Quart Stainless Steel bowl - Why?

    Why would you need a second, smaller bowl? Well, sometimes small amounts of ingredients just don't do as well in larger bowls. Take the 2 egg whites in my recipe for Haselnussmakronen - German Hazelnut Macaroons. The smaller bowl did a much quicker job of whipping the whites than if they were in the larger bowl.

    It's also ideal when two mixtures are needed in a recipe such as egg yolks and sugar mixed in one bowl and the egg whites in another. There's no cleaning of a single bowl to continue if that's all you have.

    The Attachments

    The mixer with the glass bowl and  attachments including a whisk, dough hook, paddle beater and scraper and the glass bowl.

    The whisk is used to areate and increase the of volume of buttercreams or increase the volume of egg white – think meringues, angel food cakes, and chiffon cakes as well as anywhere air is the main leavening agent. This Perfectly Easy Angel Food Cake whipped up even higher with this mixer. My only concern with the beater is I think it is a strange design. The previous one whipped egg whites and cream really fast. This one seems to whip the center really well and then it takes a bit for it to pull in the edges. It does a good job, but takes a bit longer.

    Egg Whites whipping in glass bowl.
    An angel food cake in it's pan.

    The dough hook is indispensable for bread baking. It's the mini version of those used in professional bakeries. It incorporates all of the ingredients, cleaning the sides and the bottom of the bowl so well it almost looks clean. It mixes everything including at the very bottom of the bowl which is where so many other mixers fail.  There is no floury mix left unincorporated.  Consequently, less time is used stopping and scraping the bowl. In the photo below, you can see the sides of the bowl are clean and the rest of the dough is mixed in the bottom of the bowl.

    Yeast dough on clinging to the dough hook with the rest of the dough cleaning the bowl.

    The double sided scraper attachment is my very most favorite attachment. It scrapes the side of the bowl and cuts the mixing time down by 60%. It is best used when ingredients are to be creamed or with light ingredients. Just look at how well it cleans the side of the bowl in the picture. Even better, it picks up everything in the bottom of the bowl and incorporates that also. Having said that, I made peanut butter fudge using the scraper and it worked like a charm.

    There is literally no reason to ever scrape the bowl when mixing with this attachment. I don't know about you, but stopping and scraping down was my least favorite thing to do when mixing but really necessary for smooth batters and good results. However, this should not be used with heavy doughs. The next attachment is best for those.

    The scraper attachment in the mixing bowls,cleaning the sides of the bowl,

    The Paddle Attachment is used for heavier batters, doughs and cookies or when mixing but not necessarily blending everything completely as when making crumbs, crumbles or crisp toppings where you want them to form crumbs.

    The mixer also comes with a cover for the mixing bowl that allows you to mix bread and then cover it to rise in the same bowl at room temperature.

    Glass bowl with a black plastic cover on top.

    Here you can see the yeast dough has risen in the same bowl as it was mixed. Just cover it with plastic wrap and put the black top on. Set aside and let it rise.  However, if using the oven as a proofer (see the notes in the ingredient card for (Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways), I suggest removing the dough to a different container. 

    Yeast dough has risen in the same glass bowl it was made in.

    Last, but not least is the pouring shield with splash guard. At the restaurant, the pouring shield for my large mixer falls 3 inches away from the bowl so everything is poured on the floor. This all encompassing design won't do that. It prevents larger amounts of cream from splattering out of the bowl before it thickens as well as keeping hazelnuts from flying out of the bowl when skinning them as in Hazelnut Gianduja Cake. Ingredients can be added by pouring them down the extension.

    The pouring shield and splash guard.

    Innovations That I Love

    • THE LIGHT - as someone who photographs food, I go for brighter pictures to make sure you can see what is going on. Well, there is a light under the head of the mixer that turns on when you start mixing. I can't tell you how much you'll love this. No more peering into dark bowls to see what's happening. And it is a boon to the photos. This alone is worth the price.
    • On the side of the machine there is digital timer that, by default, counts up, but it can be changed to count down and the machine will automatically stop if that is preferred.
    • There is a dial on the side of the machine with 11 speeds within 4 groups including folding/kneading, light mixing, cream/beating and aerating/whipping.  There is also a pause button, that allows you to interrupt mixing without stopping the timer.  If you turn the machine off, the timer will start all over.
    • A handle at the front of the machine makes it much easier to lift and move the mixer.
    • A thermo-cutoff will automatically stop the machine if it begins to overheat.  The only time this happened for me was when making Italian or French Buttercream due to their extended time beating at a higher speed.  It was easily managed as the machine restarted within a minute.  

    What I Tested

    Everything! Here are a few of the recipes but there were many more. All of these can be found on my blog.

    • Cakes:  Angel food cake, Spirited Chocolate Cake, Double Chocolate Mousse Cake, and Strawberry Cake, as well as Coffee Cakes, big cakes, little cakes, butter cakes, sponge cakes, heavy cakes, light cakes.
    • Buttercreams:  Strawberry buttercream (American), Italian Buttercream, and French Buttercream
    • Breads:  Large batch of flatbreads (pizza dough), No Knead Bread, Chocolate Cherry Bread and Wine and Cheese Baguettes for just a few. 
    • Sweet Bread: European Nut Roll, Conchas, Gibassier and Fresh as a Daisy Doughnuts
    • Cookies:  Levain Style Chocolate Chip Cookies, Spice Bars, Langue de Chat, Baci di Dama, and Mocha Kahlua Brownies,
    • Miscellaneous: Hazelnut Meringues with Raspberry Mascarpone Mousse, Individual Wedding Cakes,

    What I Found Out

    THIS IS THE PERFECT MIXER FOR BAKING AND PASTRY!!

    I have seen reference to the head of the machine bobbling and the mixer moving around when mixing. So, let's address these.

    I can only remember a few times in all the months I have worked with this machine that there was slight bobbling of the head of the machine. It was insignificant and in no way affected the mixing, end product or the machine itself. This most often occurs with heavy mixtures that are being beaten at too high a speed. All mixers will do this in the same conditions.

    It creams butter and sugar better than I’ve ever seen.  The  double edged scraper attachment creams so thoroughly and quickly producing a lighter, fluffier mixture that enhances any recipe. Using this attachment, I didn’t need to scrape the bowl at any point from the start to the finish of mixing.  I just put in the pans and baked it.

    About Making Bread

    Most breads, especially yeast breads are heavy, sticky doughs by nature.

    For most bread recipes, the mixture should clean the sides and bottom of the bowl when mixed unless it is a batter or artisan breads that tend to be very wet.  This mixer, even on the low speed as suggested, accomplishes that.  

    I particularly like the design of the bowl as the dough hook pulls all the flour in, whether from the sides or bottom without having to stop and scrape it down or push the flour into the center.  The doughs cleaned the bowl without any help from me. The bread dough from the dough hook photo was removed from the bowl and this is what the bowl looked like. It wasn't cleaned at all.

    Bread dough removed from the glass bowl leaving it almost clean.

    This Breville incorporates ingredients more thoroughly and completely than any machine I have used.  And faster!  One of the things I like about using the glass bowl for bread is that it cleans the sides of the bowl with no scraping or help.  It just keeps picking up the flour and incorporating it.  

    I have heard comments about the head of the machine “bobbling”.  I have found that, especially with bread, this can occur if the speed is raised too high.  It is recommended to keep it on folding/kneading, which is the lowest speed.  Truthfully, I thought it was too low, but it isn’t.  Even the leading American mixer suggests that speed for bread.  

    As to the machine moving or bouncing when running, my testing did not find that it happened at any time with any recipe.

    Conclusion

    This heavy duty mixer will help make you the best baker or pastry chef around. It uses the same planetary mixing action in my professional mixers and has full 360° coverage like the ones I use at work to produce beautiful desserts.

    There is free delivery within 5 to 7 days of ordering with a 30 day return. The Warranty includes 1 Year Repair with 5 Year Motor Warranty.

    If you are wondering at this point if I am just blinded by my love for the Breville Bakery Chef, here are a few other reviews for your consideration.

    The 7 Best Stand Mixers of 2023, Tested and Reviewed by Real Simple

    The Best Stand Mixers of 2023 by USA Today

    The Best Stand Mixers for Cookies, Cakes, Bread, and Beyond by Epicurious

    The Techy Stuff - Equipment Specs

    Attachments: Scraper Beater, standard flat beater, dough hook, whisk, splash guard, pouring shield and bowl cover.

    Bowls:  5 quart Borosilicate Glass Bowl, 4 quart stainless steel bowl.

    Construction:  Die Cast Metal Mixer Body

    Wattage:  550 watts 

    Voltage:  110-120 volts

    Warranty:  1 year repair with 5-year motor warranty

    Dimensions - (WxDxH)11.4" x 14.8" x 14.3"

    Construction Materials - Die Cast Metal Mixer Body

    LED Display - Counts up when starting, or use the arrow buttons to set timer to count down.

    Load Sensing Technology - Detects when heavy dough and batters are being mixed and automatically adjust the power to maintain the selected speed

    Pause Button - Rotate dial to PAUSE to temporarily stop mixing

    HASELNUSSMAKRONEN -German Hazelnut Macaroons

    Modified: Nov 8, 2023 · Published: Nov 9, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 16 Comments

    A plate of 3 Haselnussmakronen -German Hazelnut Macroons on a plate with a cup and saucer and more macaroons in the background.

    Haselnussmakronen! What a mouthful. This German Hazelnut Macaroon is a very simple recipe with a really big reward that you don't want to miss. Six ingredients whipped up in a matter of minutes, baked in practically no time and filled with jam or chocolate will take a cookie tray to new heights.

    As an added plus, these cookies are naturally gluten free.

    A plate of 3 Haselnussmakronen -German  Hazelnut Macroons on a plate with a cup and saucer and more macaroons in the background.

    These are such an interesting cookie. They come out of the oven crisp like a meringue but become softer and chewy within a day. Eat one and you'll eat two for sure. They'll sit in a container for a week or more and even more accommodating, they can be frozen and thawed.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love These Cookies

    • First, they are one of the best tasting cookies with the least effort around.
    • They can be made completely, frozen and thawed. Cookies don't get more convenient.
    • Friends and family probably haven't tasted these.
    • They are super, super easy to make.
    • These are naturally gluten free.
    • Not another butter cookie although I love these too.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the Haselnussmakronen are sugar, hazelnuts, egg whites, cream of tarter, raspberry jam and vanilla.

    FRONT ROW: Cream of Tarter, seedless red raspberry jam, vanilla

    BACK ROW: Baker's sugar, toasted hazelnuts, egg whites

    Baker's sugar is ideal here. It is rather expensive in the stores but Three Easy Sugar Fixes shows you how to make it in a flash! Baker's sugar dissolves more easily in the egg whites than does granulated sugar.

    It is important to toast the hazelnuts for the maximum amount of flavor. The cookies will not be as amazing without this step. Make sure to cool them completely before processing so they don't turn into hazelnut paste.

    If the hazelnuts are not skinned, my post Hazelnut Gianduja Cake shows you a really quick way to skin them without the hassle of boiling with baking soda, or rubbing them (endlessly) between towels.

    Filling Variations

    • Any kind of jam can be used.
    • A chocolate filling can be made - see the recipe card
    • Nutella is another option but I haven't tried it so i'm not sure it will set up firmly.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions!

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage shows the disher and a wooden spoon, the hazelnuts in the processor, then ground, and the egg whites, cream of tarter and vanilla in a mixing bowl.

    Step 1. A #60 disher/scooper is the perfect size with which to drop the macaroons and the end of the wooden spoon handle is ideal for making holes in the cookies. Step 2. After the hazelnuts have been toasted and cooled, place them in a processor. Step 3. Process the nuts until they are very finely ground. Long pulses, followed by shorter ones are the key to not turning the nuts into a paste. Step 4. Place the egg whites, cream of tarter and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer.

    This collage shows the egg whites just prior to adding the sugar, then beaten to medium peaks, the nuts are added and folded into the whites.

    Step 5. Beat the egg white mixture until very foamy and increased in volume. Step 6. Add the sugar gradually, beating after each addition to make sure the sugar is dissolved. Beat to medium stiff peaks. Step 7. Add the toasted, ground hazelnuts. Step 8. Fold them in carefully so the whites aren't deflated.

    The last collage shows the baked cookies, a tray with the centers made, and the cookies filled.

    Step 9. Drop the cookies with a #60 disher/scraper or a tablespoon about 1 ½ inches apart. I accidentally deleted the photo of the dropped cookies. They will look rather small but will spread out. Bake as directed. Step 10. Remove from the oven and let them sit about 2 or 3 minutes and, using a wooden spoon, make and indentation in the center of the cookies. Don't be concerned if the surrounding area cracks a bit. It's fine. Step 11. Heat or microwave the jam until pourable. Carefully, spoon the jam into the indentations. Step12. Let dry on the baking sheet overnight or until the top of the jam is no longer tacky.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the difference between a meringue and a macaroon?

    Meringues are dried in the oven until they are very crisp and remain so. Macaroons are firm on the outside but soft on the inside.

    What is the difference between a macaron and a macaroon?

    Macarons are made on a meringue base but not beaten to stiff peaks. When dropped or piped they spread out into smooth rounds. After drying, they are baked and have little feet on the bottom. Macaroons are often, but not always, made on a meringue base also but have coconut, nuts, etc. folded in. When baked, they are initially crisp but soften and become chewy after sitting.

    Are macaroons always made with egg whites.

    No. One of the most recognizable macaroons is the coconut one. It is held together by condensed milk.

    Expert Tips

    • Removing the skins from the nuts can be done easily by using my method in Hazelnut Gianduja Cake. Don't be concerned if every speck of skin is not removed.
    • Toasting the nuts is the key to the flavor of these cookies. Without it, they will be flat.
    • Baker's sugar dissolves faster in the egg whites than regular granulated sugar.
    • It is difficult to beat the meringue to stiff peaks because it is a sugar-heavy meringue. You only want medium peaks.
    • A disher/scooper will give you much more uniform cookies and is faster to portion out.
    • Making the indentations in the cookies is easily done with the end of a wooden spoon. The surrounding area may crack somewhat but that is fine. The cookies have a cracked look anyway.
    Photo of 3 cookies on a plate with a cup and saucer and plate of cookies in the background.
    • Pink macarons filled with chocolate and raspery on a white plate.
      French Macarons with Chocolate Raspberry Filling
    • Sarah Bernhardt cookies feature a macaron base with a chocolate ganache filling,dipped in chocolate and finished with gold leaf
      Sarah Bernhardts - A Macaroon Like No Other
    • Finished photo
      Murbteig Pastry
    • Almond Macaroons
      Almond Macaroons

    If you love Haselnussmakronen or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. Thank you and I appreciate each of you being here!

    A plate of 3 Haselnussmakronen -German Hazelnut Macroons on a plate with a cup and saucer and more macaroons in the background.

    HASELNUSSMAKRONEN -German Hazelnut Macaroons

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Haselnussmakronen! What a mouthful. This German Hazelnut Macaroon is the simplest of recipes with a really big reward that you don't want to miss. Six ingredients whipped up in a matter of minutes, baked in practically no time and filled with jam or chocolate will take a cookie tray to new heights.
    As an added plus, these cookies are naturally gluten free.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine German
    Servings 30 cookies
    Calories 74 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 1 ½ cups hazelnuts (170 grams)
    • 2 large egg whites (64 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • ⅛ teaspoon cream of tarter
    • ¾ cup baker's or granulated sugar (150 grams)
    • ½ cup seedless red raspberry jam

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper. Set aside.
    • If the hazelnuts need to be skinned, there is an easy way to do it in my post Hazelnut Gianduja Cake. If a bit of the skins refuse to budge, it's fine. Cool completely before proceeding.
    • Place the nuts in the bowl of a processor and use long pulses in the beginning, then quicker ones to chop the nuts finely. Do not process past this point or they can turn into hazelnut paste.
    • Beat the egg whites, cream of tarter and vanilla on medium speed until very foamy and increased in volume. Slowly, add the sugar and beating to medium peaks.
    • Fold in the hazelnuts.
    • With a #60 disher/scooper or a tablespoon, drop rounds about 1 ½" apart on the prepare sheets. 4 across and 5 down on a half sheet pan works well.
    • Bake for 13 to 15 minutes until they feel crisp. The cookies are done when they can be lifted off the paper easily and cleanly.
    • Cool for a few minutes and make an indentation in the middle of each cookie with the end of a wooden spoon.
    • Microwave or heat the jam until it is liquid. Carefully spoon the jam into the indentations. Let the jam dry overnight or until no longer tacky.
    • Store in an airtight container for a week or more. These also freeze well. Thaw at room temperature.

    Alternative Fillings

    • Any jam can be used as long as it is smooth and without pieces of fruit in it.
      Chocolate Filling: Use 8 ounces of semisweet chocolate and 2 tablespoons shortening or coconut oil. Microwave at half power or heat over simmering water just to melt the chocolate and shortening. Stir together and fill the indentations. Refrigerate briefly to set up. They can then be stored at room temperature.
      Nutella is another option. Hazelnut on hazelnut - can't get much better!

    Notes

    Baker's sugar is ideal here. It is rather expensive in the stores but Three Easy Sugar Fixes shows you how to make it in a flash!  It dissolves faster in the egg whites than regular granulated sugar.
    It is important to toast the hazelnuts for the maximum amount of flavor. The cookies will not be as amazing without this step. Make sure to cool them completely before processing so they don't turn into hazelnut paste.
    If the hazelnuts are not skinned, my post Hazelnut Gianduja Cake shows you a really quick way to skin them without the hassle of boiling with baking soda, or rubbing them (endlessly) between towels. 
    A disher/scooper will give you much more uniform cookies and is faster to portion out. 
    Making the indentations in the cookies is easily done with the end of a wooden spoon. The surrounding area may crack somewhat but that is fine. The cookies have a cracked look anyway.
    The end of a wooden spoon makes the indentations in the cookie easily.
    Store in an airtight container for a week or more. These also freeze well. Thaw at room temperature.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cookieCalories: 74kcalCarbohydrates: 10gProtein: 1gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 0.3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.5gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gCholesterol: 0.001mgSodium: 6mgPotassium: 49mgFiber: 1gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 1IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 8mgIron: 0.3mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Cuccidati - Italy's Finest Cookie

    Modified: Nov 15, 2025 · Published: Nov 3, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 8 Comments

    A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.

    A favorite Italian Christmas cookie, Cuccidati (coo-cha-dah-tee) is actually easy to make and can be done over a number of days.   The pasta frolla, an Italian pastry, encloses a filling of black mission figs, dates and raisins highlighted with orange and lemon zest finished with rum.  The cookies are glazed and sprinkled with colored nonpareils.

    A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.

    I'm convinced this is the inspiration for our Fig Newtons. But the Cuccidati filling has so much depth to it.

    Check out the other Italian cookies on my blog : Chocolate Spiced Olive OIl Biscotti, the Apricot Pistachio Biscotti, Baci di Dama, Italian Neapolitan Cookies and Amaretti Cookies. A couple of others using a glaze include: Painted Cookies and Easy Decorated Shortbread Cookies. The Fig Stuffed Anise Sweet Bread is another recipe featuring figs. For even more cookies and bars, be sure to check out my Cookie Roundup of 45 Cookies and Bars.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why This Recipe Works

    • Both the dough and the filling can be made ahead. The dough can be made several days ahead and refrigerated or frozen for a couple of months. The filling can be made 10 days ahead and refrigerated.
    • The ratio of filling to dough is balanced for its incredible taste.
    • Two steps in the processor and the filling is done. No cooking or intricate prep. Soak the raisins and trim the stems from the figs - that's it.
    • The Cuccidati themselves last at least 10 days in an airtight container.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Pasta Frolla Dough

    The ingredients for th e dough are flour, eggs, sugar, butter, baking powder, salt and vanilla.

    Ingredients read left to right.

    FRONT ROW: Salt, vanilla, baking powder

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Flour, eggs, granulated sugar

    Filling Ingredients

    The ingredients for the filling of Cuccidati are mission figs, raisins, dates, almonds, walnuts, honey, drak rum, cinnamon, orange and lemon zest.

    Ingredients read left to right.

    FRONT ROW: Cinnamon, rum, lemon and orange zest

    MIDDLE ROW: Walnuts, honey, almonds

    BACK ROW: Dried Mission figs, dates and raisins

    The ingredients for the icing are powdered sugar, water and nonpareils.

    FRONT ROW: Nonpareils, water

    BACK ROW: Powdered Sugar

    I use Korintje Cinnamon but other cinnamons can be substituted.

    Dark rum, such as Meyer's Dark Rum imparts the most taste.

    Both the walnuts and almonds are toasted to bring out the most flavor.

    There are varying degrees of drying when it comes to the Mission Figs. Mission figs are generally smaller and a dark purple, almost black when fresh. The ones I use are moist. They will yield in the bag when squeezed. I have seen some that are really dry. Those should be reconstituted in boiling water for several minutes until they are plumped up.

    The raisins should be soaked in the hottest tap water while the rest of the ingredients are gathered. Alternatively, they can be added to the water for 5 to 8 minutes with the figs if they are being reconstituted. When they are ready to use the raisins, squeeze all of the water from them.

    While I like Medjool Dates, others can be substituted if these can't be found.

    The nonpareils can be found in most grocery stores.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first Cuccidati collage shows the butter cut, the dry ingredients in the processor, the butter on top of the dry ingredients and the liquid added to the processor.

    Step 1. Cut the butter into small pieces. The easiest way is to cut a stick vertically, then horizontally 8 down. Keep the dough refrigerated while prepping the rest of the recipe. Step 2. Place the dry ingredients into the processor bowl. Pulse several times to mix. Step 3. Place the butter over the dry ingredients and process to cut in until the butter is indistinguishable. Step 4. Add the eggs and vanilla.

    The second collage shows the dough completed in the processor, divided into 4 rectangles, the raisins soaking and then squeezed dry.

    Step 5. Process the ingredients until the mostly form a ball. Remove to a work area and knead a few times to bring together. Step 6. Divide into four pieces and shape into rectangles. Wrap in plastic wrap and refrigerate for several hours or overnight. Step 7. Soak the raisins in really hot water. Step 8. Squeeze the water from them when ready to use.

    The next collage shows a fig with the stem, and the stem cut off, the almonds and walnuts in the processor, and then processed to finely cut.

    Step 9. Figs come with the stems on generally. Step 10. Cut them off before proceeding. Step 11. Place the toasted almonds and walnuts in the processor bowl. There is no need to clean it from the dough made. Just wipe it out. Step 12. Process them until they are very finely cut. However, don't make a paste of them.

    The fourth collage, shows all the filling ingredients in the processor bowl, then processed, the blade with the filling on it and last, the blade cleaned off.

    Step 13. Place all of the ingredients (with the squeezed out raisins) in the bowl of the processor with the nuts. Step 14. Process the ingredients until them a paste. Add water, starting with a tablespoon, to the mixture to obtain a spreadable consistency. Continue adding water as necessary. Step 15. It is difficult to remove all of the contents of the processor since it is on and under the blade. Step 16. For a really easy way to do this, put the top back on the processor and pulse it or 5 times. The filling will be slung off the blade by centrifugal force to the sides of the bowl. Simply remove the blade and scrape out the remainder. You can find more tips on using the food processor on my post Food Processor Tips When Baking. Divide the filling into fourths. Roll each piece into a 12" rope. See the instructions on the Recipe card for more detail. Freeze for several hours or overnight.

    The dough rolled out, the filling in the middle, then flattened and the left side of the dough is covering half of the filling.

    Step 17. Roll the dough out into a 12"x5" rectangle. Step 18. Place a filling rope down the center of the dough. Step 19. Flatten the rope so it is equal on both sides. Step 20. Fold the left side over the filling. It should cover a little over half of the filing.

    The last collage completes on roll of the Cuccidati with the dough being moistened on the right side, folled over, the seam being pinched and finally the cookies being cut.

    Step 21. Lightly wet the length of the edge of the dough. Step 22. Fold it over on top of the left side of the dough. Step 23. Seal the edge of the dough by pinching it together and flattening it out. Step 24. Turn the roll over and slice the cookies ¾ to 1" thick.

    Recipe FAQs

    When are Cuccidati mostly eaten?

    They are considered a Christmas cookie and as such eaten during the holidays.

    What are traditional Cuccidati made of?

    Figs, dates and raisins along with almonds, walnuts and citrus zest are wrapped in a pastry dough. After baking, the tops of the cookies are dipped in a powdered sugar icing which are sprinkled with nonpariels.

    Where do they come from?

    Cuccidati, which means "little bracelet" comes from Sicily

    Expert Tips

    • While the filling should be moist, it should not be loose or too wet.
    • Toasting nuts brings out the most flavor and enhances any dish to which they are added.
    • Don't skip the icing and nonpareils - they are traditional and add a lot to the cookie as these are not very sweet on their own.
    • Both the dough and the filling can be made ahead.
    • When finishing the cookies, place them on rimmed baking sheets after dipping in icing and sprinkling with nonpareils. This will keep them from rolling all over the kitchen.
    A plate of Cuccidati on a wicker charger.
    • Three flavors in one cookie - Chocolate, Vanilla and Strawberry make up this Neapolitan Butter Cookie
      Neapolitan Butter Cookies
    • Honey Diamond cookies
      Honey Diamonds - A cookie? A small cake?
    • Almond Macaroons
      Almond Macaroons

    If you love the Cuccidati or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. Thank you and I appreciate each of you being here!

    A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.

    Cuccidati - Italy's Finest Cookie

    Helen S. Fletcher
    A favorite Italian cookie, Cuccidati (coo-cha-dah-tee) is actually easy to make and can be done over a number of days.   The pasta frolla, an Italian pastry, encloses a filling of black mission figs, dates and raisins highlighted with orange and lemon zest finished with rum.  The cookies are glazed and sprinkled with colored nonpareils.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Chilling time 6 hours hrs
    Total Time 7 hours hrs
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 40 cookies
    Calories 194 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Pasta Frolla Dough

    • 1 cup unsalted butter (225 grams)
    • 4 cups all-purpose flour (560 grams)
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar (150 grams)
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 4 large eggs
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract

    Filling

    • ½ cup slivered almonds (60 grams)
    • ½ cup walnuts (60 grams)
    • ½ cup raisins (75 grams)
    • 12 ounces Mission black figs (340 grams)
    • ½ cup dates (100 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons honey
    • 2 tablespoons dark rum
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • 1 orange zest
    • 1 lemon zest

    Finishing and Decorating

    • 3 cups powdered sugar (390 grams)
    • 5 tablespoons water
    • Multicolored Nonpariels as needed

    Instructions
     

    Pasta Frolla Dough

    • Cut the cold butter in small pieces as shown in the step-by-step photos. Keep it refrigerated as you prep the rest of the ingredients. It is important that it be kept refrigerated until needed.
    • Place the flour, sugar, baking powder and salt in the bowl of a processor. Pulse several times to mix.
    • Place the butter over the dry ingredients and process until the butter is indistinguishable.
    • Add the eggs and vanilla and process until the dough forms a ball.
    • Remove from the processor. Divide it into 4 pieces about 285 grams each. Shape each piece into a rectangle about 3 ½ x 4 ½ inches. Wrap each piece in plastic wrap and refrigerate several hours or, preferably overnight. The dough can be held in the refrigerator for several days or frozen, well wrapped for a couple of months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight to use.

    Filling

    • I used moist figs and raisins but if yours are really dry, place the figs in a small pan. Cover with hot water. Simmer for 5 to 10 minutes until plumped.
    • Toast the almonds and walnuts at 350°F for about 7 minutes until lightly browned and fragrant. Cool completely before using.
    • Cover the raisins with really hot tap water and let them plump while gathering the rest of the ingredients.
    • Without cleaning the processor bowl (just wipe it out with a paper towel) add the nuts. Process them until very fine but do not turn the into a paste.
    • Squeeze the water from the raisins and figs if they were plumped. Add the remaining ingredients and process until a spreadable paste forms. If it is too thick to spread, add about a tablespoon of water at a time until it is spreadable. It will be sticky.
    • Divide the filling into fourths (about 190 grams each). This measurement may vary depending up if and how much water was added.
    • Roll each piece into a 12" log. This is sticky business but here are a few tips to make it easier. Keep your hands slightly wet. Re-wet them as necessary. Form the piece into a sausage shape and then, pinching and pulling to 12 inches. Roll it onto a piece of plastic wrap and roll up. While in the wrap, roll it several times to smooth it out. Freeze for several hours or overnight. They will never get rock hard but they will be easier to manage. They can be kept in the freezer, wrapped in for for several months. Use from the freezer.

    Assembly - See the how to photos

    • Preheat the oven to 400°F. Line several baking sheets with parchment paper. Set aside.
    • Remove one piece of dough at a time from the refrigerator and roll between wax paper into a 12" x 5" wide rectangle. Square the sides, top and bottom. An easy way is to use a ruler and lightly tap the dough on each side to square it. Refrigerate it, keeping it on the wax paper while you roll out the other 3 pieces.
    • Place one piece of dough on the work area. Remove the top piece of paper, but keep it on the bottom one. Mark the dough 1 ½" from each side, leaving 2" in the middle.
    • Place one rope of filling in the center. Flatten and spread the rope to about 2" using yur fingers or a moist offset spatula.
    • Fold the left side of the dough over the filling using the paper as an assist. Pull it tightly against the dough.
    • Wet the edge of the right side of the dough slightly and, again using the paper, fold it over the edge of the left side.
    • Pinch the seam to seal. Flatten the seam. Turn it over. Refrigerate while assembling the remaining dough and filling. If the last roll is soft after assembly refrigerate. The rolls can also be assembled and frozen, well wrapped for several months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight before cutting and baking.
    • Cut the cookies ¾" to 1" thick. place them on the prepared sheets 5 across and 4 down. Bake for 13 to 15 minutes until lightly browned. Cool on the paper.

    Finishing and Decorating

    • Combine the powdered sugar and water. Stir to combine. If it is too thick, add water by droplets. If too thin, add powdered sugar a bit at a time. Theicing should be very thick and stick to th e top of the cookie without running down the sides too much.
    • Dip the top of the cookies into the icing and place it on parchment lined rimmed baking sheets. After dipping 5 ord 6 cookies, immediately sprinkle with the nonpareils. If you wait too long, the icing starts to dry and the nonpareils won't stick. The rimmed baking sheets keep the nonpareils from rolling all over the kitchen.
    • Allow to dry completely before storing in an airtight container with paper between the layers. These will keep well for at least 10 days and ship well.

    Notes

    • Both the dough and the filling can be made ahead. The dough can be made several days ahead and refrigerated or frozen for a couple of months. The filling can be made 10 days ahead and refrigerated.
    • The ratio of filling to dough is balanced for its incredible taste.
    • Two steps in the processor and the filling is done. No cooking or intricate prep. Soak the raisins and trim the stems from the figs - that's it.
    • The Cuccidati themselves last at least 10 days in an airtight container.
    • While the filling should be moist, it should not be loose or too wet.
    • Toasting nuts brings out the most flavor and enhances any dish to which they are added.
    • Don't skip the icing and nonpareils - they are traditional and add a lot to the cookie as these are not very sweet on their own.
    • Both the dough and the filling can be made ahead.
    • When finishing the cookies, place them on rimmed baking sheets after dipping in icing and sprinkling with nonpareils. This will keep them from rolling all over the kitchen.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 194kcalCarbohydrates: 31gProtein: 3gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 31mgSodium: 125mgPotassium: 113mgFiber: 2gSugar: 18gVitamin A: 171IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 39mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Sablé Breton

    Modified: Oct 25, 2023 · Published: Oct 26, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 16 Comments

    Round Sable Breton cookies that are cross hatched on a lace edged plate.

    Sablé Breton, (sob-lee breh-tone) is a classic, very buttery cookie coming from the Bretagne region (Britanny) in the North-West of France.  The region is famous for its indulgent use of butter, in particular salted butter.

    The word Sablé is French for sand and refers to the butter being incorporated into the flour. It actually feels sandy after mixing.  The cross hatch design on top is the traditional finish.

    Round Sable Breton cookies that are cross hatched on a lace edged plate.

    Don't mistake the simplicity of this cookie as just another butter cookie. The French make the best butter cookies, including Petit Beurre. Sablé Breton are another of their superb cookies that are in a class by themselves. There is another famous French dessert, Gateau Breton which uses a variation of this pastry.

    Four ingredients make up the cookie with salted butter being the most important one and Brittany has the best sea salt as well as butter. "The history of salt works on the peninsula stretches back 2,700 years; Brittany’s “white gold” was a sought-after luxury product as early as Roman times" according to the Taste of France magazine.

    These make a perfect holiday gift, especially since they can be made ahead and baked when needed.

    For more information on baking great cookies, see my post Cookie Tips for the Best Cookies.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why you want to make this cookie

    • They are really easy to make with just 4 ingredients. How can you go wrong?
    • These cookies can be made well in advance. Simply cut out the cookies, freeze, wrap and store in the freezer for up to 3 months.
    • Sablé Breton are like no other butter cookie you'll ever eat. They are absolutely addictive. I can say that from personal experience.
    • They're perfect with coffee or tea, as a snack or just because they are so good.
    • They make an exquisite gift for someone special.

    Variations

    • Add a lemon or orange rind to the dough.
    • A chocolate version can be made by removing ¼ cup of flour and substituting ¼ cup Dutch cocoa.
    • Add ½ cup of any nut and process it along with the flour. Increase the egg yolks to 3.
    • While these are usually served as single cookies, they can be sandwiched with jam, nutella, or buttercream.
    • Any size cutter can be used.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Sablé Breton Dough

    Sable Breton ingredients include, all-purpose flour, granulated sugar, butter and egg yolks.

    FRONT ROW: European Salted Butter, egg yolks

    BACK ROW: All-purpose flour, granulated sugar

    Egg Wash

    Round Sable Breton cookies that are cross hatched on a lace edged plate.

    Egg Yolk, Milk

    The butter I used is Kerrygold Salted Butter. It is a European butter that has a higher fat content (82%) which gives a richer taste and color to the cookie. However, it softens faster when rolling out but a quick trip to the refrigerator or freezer firms it up.

    Granulated sugar is used for the sandy texture that is indicative of this cookie. I have seen recipes with powdered sugar but that defeats the sandiness of the cookies.

    The egg yolks enrich the cookie and add color. They are essential to the texture.

    The egg yolk and milk glaze adds shine and a pleasant glow to the cookie as well as being traditional.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the exact ingredients & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Sable Breton collage 1 includes kerrygold box, butter cut in pieces, butter over dry ingredients, butter processed in.

    Step 1. Kerrygold is just one of many European butters either imported or made in America. The bold package holds salted butter while the silver package is for unsalted.Step 2. Cut the butter into small pieces. The easiest way is to cut is legthnwise and crosswise into about 8 cuts. The butter has to be very cold before continuing. Step 3. Add the dry ingredients to the processor and place the cold butter over them. Step 4. Process until the butter is indistinguishable.

    This collage shows the sugar being added to the process, after it is processed, the egg yolks added and the dough completed.

    Step 5. Add the sugar to the processor. Step 6. Process to incorporate. Step 7. Add the egg yolks. Step 8. Process until the dough comes together. It does not have to form a ball. Pour the dough onto your work surface.

    This collage shows the dough formed into a flat round, divided in half, rolled between waxed paper and the round cookies cut out.

    Step 9. Gather the dough together and form into a flat round. Step 10. Divide the dough in half to make it easier to roll out. Step 11. If the dough is really soft, chill until firmed up somewhat. Do not let it get hard. Roll one piece between wax paper. There is a great tutorial regarding rolling dough between wax paper and why I prefer this medium over others. You will find it in my post Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax PaperTechnique. Step 12. After chilling or freezing, cut the cookie out in the desired size. Leave them on the bottom sheet of wax paper and freeze them.

    The last collage shows how to mark the cookies for the traditional design.  Lines are drawn vertically with the back of a fork, the diagonally and finally the cookie completely marked.

    Step 13. Make vertical lines from the top to bottom of the cookie with the tines of a fork. Step 14. Draw diagonal lines across the vertical ones. Step 15. After the first set of lines is drawn, line the fork up leaving the appropriate amount of space and continue across the cookie. Step 16. The cookie should be chilled at this point. When ready to bake, combine the egg yolk and milk and brush each cookie.

    Alternative Directions with a Mixer

    The dough may be made in a mixer with a few changes. All the ingredients remain the same. However, the butter should be softened instead of refrigerated. Beat the sugar and butter until combined. Add the egg yolks, mixing in well. Add the flour, mixing on low. Shape into a flat round and chill if too soft to roll out. Continue as above, rolling between wax paper.

    Recipe FAQ's

    What is a Sablé Breton? 


    The word sablé means sandy in French. The word breton refers to Brittany, France's northwesternmost region. Breton shortbread literally means Sandy Cookies from Brittany.

    What makes this cookie different from other butter cookies?

    The butter used is salted unlike most butter cookies that call for unsalted butter. The salt is an important ingredient as well as the butter. For authenticity the butter should be of the European type which has an 82% butterfat content vs. American type butters which are mandated to be at least 80% butterfat. The higher butterfat content makes the cookies even more buttery.

    What is the texture of the Sablé Breton?

    The cookies have a crisp and crumbly texture with an over the top buttery taste and a melt in your mouth quality that will have you reaching for more than one.

    Expert Tips

    • The butter should be refrigerator cold when adding it to the dry ingredients.
    • To cut out the cookies, chill the dough until firm. Do not freeze. Roll between wax paper. Cut the cookies into the desired size.
    • Without removing the cookies from the surrounding dough, freeze the whole thing keeping it on the bottom paper.
    • Simply pop the cookies out. Bring the scraps together when thawed, re-roll and continue to make more cookies.
    • The cross hatch design and brushing the cookies with the egg wash gives them the traditional Sablé Breton finish.
    The Sablé Breton cookies on a white lacy plate.
    • Multi colored Painted Cookies on a lace plate
      Painted Cookies
    • very-lemon-butter-crisps.jpeg
      Very Lemon Butter Crisps
    • Finished photo
      Murbteig Pastry
    • A bunch of French Butter Cookies, Petit Beurre, on a plate. They are rectangular cookies with holes throughout them and have browned edges
      French Butter Cookies - Petit Beurre

    If you love these Sablé Breton or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. Thank you, I appreciate you being here.

    Round Sable Breton cookies that are cross hatched on a lace edged plate.

    Sablé Breton

    Helen S. Fletcher
    You don't want to miss this easy, classic, buttery cookie from the Bretagne region (Britanny) in North-West France. Best ever butter cookie!
    5 from 9 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Rolling, Cutting and Chilling 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine French
    Servings 30
    Calories 41 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Sablé Breton 

    • ¾ cup European style salted butter, cold (170 grams)
    • 2 cups all-purpose flour (280 grams)
    • ⅔ cup granulated sugar (130 grams)
    • 2 egg yolks

    Egg Glaze

    • 1 egg yolk
    • 1 teaspoon milk

    Instructions
     

    • If for any reason you cannot find or use European style butter, add ⅓ teaspoon salt to the flour and continue.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line several baking sheets with parchment paper. Set aside.
    • Cut the butter into small pieces as shown in the pictures above. Put it back in the refrigerator while prepping the remaining ingredients. It is important for it to be cold.
    • Place the flour in a food processor. Pulse several times.
    • Add the cold butter pieces and process until the butter is indistingushable.
    • Add the sugar and process briefly to mix.
    • Add the 2 egg yolks and process until the dough comes together. It may not form a ball and that's fine. Pour out onto a work surface and push it together. Form it into a flat round. The dough should be fine to continue but if it is too soft, refrigerate briefly to firm up. Do not let it get too hard or it will be difficut to roll.
    • Divide the dough in half (about 300 grams each piece). Place one piece between two pieces of wax paper and roll to about ¼". For the cleanest edges, refrigerate or freeze briefly. Cut out rounds of the desired size. The cookies shown are 2 ½ inches. Do not remove the dough around the cookies.
    • Place the cookies, still between the paper on a baking sheet and refrigerate or freeze until hard.
    • Remove the top piece of paper and pop the cookies out. Place on the prepared baking sheets. With the back tines of a fork, mark the cookies vertically. Placing the fork on a diagonal, mark the cookies again, making small diamonds. (See photos).
    • Combine the 1 egg yolk and milk. Brush the cookies. Bake for about 15 minutes until golden brown and set. Cool.
    • The cookies can be stored in an airtight container for a week or 10 days.
    • Alternatively, prepare the cookies, through marking them and freeze them unbaked. To bake, glaze them with the egg glaze and bake, allowing a few additional minutes in the oven.

    To Make in a Mixer

    • Soften the butter and place in the mixing bowl with the sugar. Beat until combined.
    • Mix in the eggs.
    • Add the flour and beat on low to bring everything together.
    • Proceed as above, chilling the dough slightly if it is too soft to roll.

    Notes

    Please see the step by step photos for visual instructions. 
    The butter should be refrigerator cold when adding it to the dry ingredients.
    To cut out the cookies, chill the dough until firm. Do not freeze. Roll between wax paper. Cut the cookies into the desired size.
    Without removing the cookies from the surrounding dough, freeze the whole thing keeping it on the bottom paper.
    Simply pop the cookies out. Bring the scraps together when thawed, re-roll and continue to make more cookies.
    The cross hatch design and brushing the cookies with the egg wash gives them the traditional Sablé Breton finish.
    Any size cutter can be used. They are really easy to make with just 4 ingredients.
    Store the cookies in an airtight container for up to 10 days.
    Alternatively, Cut the cookies out, mark them, freeze them, wrap well and freeze for up to 2 months.  Egg glaze them and bake as called for, adding a few additional minutes if needed. 
    These cookies can be made well in advance. Simply cut out the cookies, freeze, wrap and store in the freezer for up to 3 months. 
    Sablé Breton are like no other butter cookie you'll ever eat. They are absolutely addictive. I can say that from personal experience.
    They're perfect with coffee or tea, as a snack or just because they are so good.
    They make an exquisite gift for someone special.
    Variations:
    Add a lemon or orange rind to the dough.
    A chocolate version can be made by removing ¼ cup of flour and substituting ¼ cup Dutch cocoa. 
    Add ½ cup of any nut and process it along with the flour. Increase the egg yolks to 3.
    While these are usually served as single cookies, they can be sandwiched with jam, nutella, or buttercream.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 30cookiesCalories: 41kcalCarbohydrates: 0.003gProtein: 0.05gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.2gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 12mgSodium: 36mgPotassium: 1mgSugar: 0.003gVitamin A: 142IUCalcium: 1mgIron: 0.001mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Pryaniki - Russian Honey Spice Cookies

    Modified: Mar 15, 2024 · Published: Oct 19, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 18 Comments

    A wicker basket with a doilie holds black and white glazed Pryaniki cookies.

    Pryaniki (pre-ah-nee-kee) are honey and spice Russian cookies traditionally served at teas and holidays. These cookies are more cake-like than their German cousins, Pfeffernusse and are finished with a white or chocolate glaze.

    To make your life easier, these cookies can be made, shaped and frozen for up to a month or so before baking and glazing.

    A wicker basket with a doilie holds black and white glazed Pryaniki cookies.

    Redolent of honey and spices, these are an easily made cookie that only gets better with age. While the traditional finish is a white glaze, chocolate and spices have an affinity for each other that can't be beat. My Chocolate Spice Olive Oil Biscotti and Honey Diamonds are perfect examples of this.

    Russian Spice cookies, also called honey bread, have been made since the 9th century. When trade began with the Middle East and India in the 12th and 13th centuries spices, many spices were added. As time went on, it seems every family had their special recipe, some highly secreted.

    Typically, the cookies were graced with cloves, ginger, citrus fruits, pepper, nutmeg, mint, anise, ginger, and many other flavorings, giving them the name pryanosti or well-spiced. Many of those, along with the Russians love for honey, make up this cookie.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Want to Make Pryaniki

    • Although this doesn't have just 5 ingredients, it is so simple to make. Basically it only requires, melting a few ingredients, adding all the ingredients to the mixing bowl, mixing and chilling. Which makes this ideal for a make ahead cookie.
    • But there is more as the saying goes. These cookies need to be aged before finishing. So they can be made, stored and a week later glazed, after which they can be stored for weeks in an airtight container.
    • The texture of the cookies makes them easier to eat than say Pfeffernusse or Springerle.
    • These are so packed with flavor they taste incredible. Anyone who enjoys a spice cookie is going to ask for the recipe.

    Recipe Ingredients

    For the Cookies

    Ingredients Pryaniki include flour, sugar, honey, vinegar, butter, egg, cinnamon, baking soda, coffee, caking powder, anise extract, ginger, coves cardamom, nutmeg and pepper.

    Ingredients read left to right.

    FIRST ROW: Ginger, cloves, cardamom, nutmeg, black pepper

    SECOND ROW: Cinnamon, baking soda, coffee, baking powder, anise extract

    THIRD ROW: Water, white vinegar, butter, egg

    FOURTH ROW: All-purpose flour, sugar, honey

    Glaze

    Glaze ingredients include powdered sugar, cocoa, water and cornsyrup.

    Left to Right:

    FRONT ROW: Water, corn syrup

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar, cocoa

    Cardamom is an expensive ingredient. Penzy's has it in tiny amounts. Keep it in the freezer when not using. I keep all of my seeds and expensive spices in the freezer where they will last forever.

    Anise extract is a popular European flavoring. It is easily found in the spice department of most grocery stores.

    The baking soda dissolved in vinegar is key to this cookie so don't skip it. There will be no taste of it in the cookies. By dissolving the baking soda in the vinegar, it produces carbon dioxide gas (C02), which is evident because of the formation of bubbles in the foaming mixture.

    These allow for soft and airy baked goods such as cookies, pancakes, and cakes. Baking soda also increases pH levels while reducing gluten. This creates less chewy and more tender baked goods.

    Corn syrup is used in the glaze to add sheen and help prevent cracking of the glaze. Corn syrup sold to consumers is not the high glucose variety used in commercial products.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage shows the coffee dissolved in water, the butter, honey and sugar in a pan, then melted and the spices add to the mixture.

    Step 1. Dissolve the coffee in the water in a small saucepan. Step 2. Add the butter, honey and sugar. Step 3. Heat to melt the butter and dissolve the sugar. Step 4. Whisk in the anise extract and all of the spices. Cool slightly. Place in the bowl of a mixer.

    The second collage shows the baking soda bubbling in the vinegar, all of the liquid ingredients in the mixing bowl, the flour added and the batter completely mixed.

    Step 6. Add the baking soda to the vinegar, mixing completely. It will bubble up. Step 6. Add the egg, the baking soda mixture and baking powder. Step 7. Pour all of the flour on top of the liquid. Step 8. Mix on low to medium low, scraping as necessary. The mixture will be a batter more than a dough. Refrigerate the batter overnight.

    Collage 3 shows the cookies scooped, then rolled into smooth balls, double trayed, baked cookies, sifted powdered sugar.

    Step 9. The batter must be cold to scoop. Using a #70 disher/scooper or a tablespoon measure, scoop the cookies and line them up 4 across and 6 down on a parchment lined sheet pan. Roll them into smooth balls. Step 10. Double pan the Pryaniki before going into the oven. One pan is simply put on top of another pan. Step 11. Bake the cookies as called for. Step 12. Sift the powdered sugar for the glaze.

    The final collage shows the glaze ingredients in a bowl, the glazing set up, the cookies glazed in white and in chocolate.

    Step 13. Place all of the glaze ingredients in a bowl and stir until completely smooth. Do not use a whisk as it can make a lot of air bubbles that will show on the cookies. Step 14. Dip a cookie, top down, into the glaze. Dip up to the very edge. Place on a parchment lined tray to dry. Step 15. A tray of cookies with the glaze puddled. Step 16. A tray of chocolate glazed cookie. Let the glaze dry completely. This may take up to 48 hours. When completely dry, simply break off the puddled glaze.

    Recipe FAQs

    What are Pyraniki?

    Pryaniki is the name of the Russian gingerbread and derives from the word 'pryany' which means 'spicy'. The first pryanik (singular cookie) appeared in Russia around the IX century and was called "honey bread". It was based on rye flour mixed with honey and berry juice.

    When are Pyraniki served?

    They used to be served mostly at holidays such as Christmas and Easter, Weddings and Baptisms. Now they are commercially made and can be bought anytime.

    Are Pyraniki hard to make?

    Not at all. They are basically mixed in two steps and after chilling, shaped into balls and baked. The glazing takes a bit of time but is not at all difficult.

    If you enjoy these, try out these Hello Dolly Cookies!

    Expert Tips

    • Sift the powdered sugar or the powdered sugar and cocoa together. Otherwise tiny bumps may show on the finished glazed cookies.
    • Be sure to stir the glaze ingredients together. A whisk can incorporate air which can appear on the finished cookie.
    • Plan ahead so you allow enough time to let the glaze dry completely.
    • The cookies can be dipped in the glaze or they can be placed on a cooling rack and the glaze poured or spooned over them.
    • After the cookies are finished, they can be stored in an airtight container for 7 to 10 days.
    • These cookies mail well.
    The bottom picture of the chocolate and white glazed cookies on the wicker basket with doilie.
    • Hermit Bars
      Hermit Bars with Lemon Glaze
    • Finished photo
      Pfeffernusse Cookies
    • Honey Diamond cookies
      Honey Diamonds - A cookie? A small cake?
    • Three Chocolate Biscotti on a white tray with coffee in a cup.
      Chocolate Spice Olive Oil Biscotti

    If you love these Pyraniki or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. I appreciate each of you being here!

    A wicker basket with a doilie holds black and white glazed Pryaniki cookies.

    Pryaniki - Russian Honey Spice Cookies

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Pryaniki (pre-ah-nee-kee) is a honey and spice traditional Russian cookie served at teas and holidays. These cookies are more cake-like than their German cousins, Pfeffernusse and are finished with a white or chocolate glaze.
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Refrigeration Time 6 hours hrs
    Total Time 6 hours hrs 35 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine Russian
    Servings 60 cookies
    Calories 90 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Cookies

    • 2 teaspoons instant coffee
    • ¼ cup water
    • ½ cup unsalted butter
    • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
    • ¾ cup honey
    • 2 teaspoons anise extract
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
    • ½ teaspoon ginger
    • ½ teaspoon cardamom
    • ½ teaspoon coarse ground black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon cloves
    • 1 large egg egg
    • ¾ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon white or cider vinegar
    • ¾ teaspoon baking powder
    • 3 cups all-purpose flour

    White Glaze - This will coat about half of the cookies

    • 1 ¾ cups powdered sugar (245 grams)
    • 1 tablespoon light corn syrup
    • 2 - 3 tablespoons water

    Chocolate Glaze - This will coat about half of the cookies

    • 1 ½ cups powdered sugar (200 grams)
    • 6 tablespoons cocoa
    • 1 tablespoon light corn syrup
    • ¼ - ⅓ cup water

    Instructions
     

    • In a small saucepan, dissolve the instant coffee in the water. Add the butter, sugar and honey. Heat on medium until the butter is melted.
    • Remove from the heat and whisk in the anise and all of the spices. Cool slightly. Place in the bowl of a mixer.
    • Add the egg and baking powder.
    • Dissolve the baking soda in the vinegar. It will bubble up and fizz. Add it to the ingredients in the mixer.
    • Place the flour on top and beat on low to combine the ingredients, then on medium to mix them completely to make a batter.
    • Place in a container with a lid and refrigerate at lease 6 hours or overnight. The batter must be completely cold to shape.
    • When ready to shape, preheat the oven to 350°F. Line several baking sheets with parchment paper and set aside.
    • With a #70 disher/scooper or a 1 tablespoon measure, scoop the cookies 4 across and 6 down on a half sheet pan. Roll them between our hands into smooth balls. If using another baking pan, be sure to leave at least 3" beween the cookies. They will at least double in size.
    • Double Pan. Bake for 14 to 16 minutes. Do not overbake or they will become hard. Cool. At this point they can be glazed or held in an airtight container for a week or so before glazing.
    • Another option is to shape the cookies, roll them into balls and freeze them for up to a month before baking and glazing. Thaw them at room temperature and bake as directed.

    Glazing the Cookies

    • Sift together the powdered sugar and cocoa or just powdered sugar.
    • Add the corn syrup and the least amount of water. Stir with a spoon - do not whisk or air bubbles can form which will ruin the looks of the finished cookies.
    • Dip the cookies top down into the glaze. Wipe the excess glaze that drips off on the side of the bowl or with your finger. Place, bottom down on parchment paper.
    • Alternatively, place the cookies on a rack and spoon the glaze over the cookies to completely enrobe them. Move them with an offset spatula to parchment lined paper. The glaze will puddle around the bottom of the cookies. That is how it should be.
    • Let them dry until the puddles are hard. It may take up to 48 hours depending upon the temperature of the room. Remove the excess glaze by simply breaking it off.

    Notes

    These cookies can be made, shaped and frozen for up to a month before baking and finishing.  Just store in an airtight container.  
    Sift the powdered sugar or the powdered sugar and cocoa together.  Otherwise tiny bumps may show on the finished glazed cookies.
    Be sure to stir the glaze ingredients together.  A whisk can incorporate air which can appear on the finished cookie.
    Plan ahead so you allow enough time to let the glaze dry completely.
    The cookies can be dipped in the glaze or they can be placed on a cooling rack and the glaze poured or spooned over them.
    These cookies need to be aged for a week or so for the spices to meld.
    These cookies mail well.
    Cardamom is an expensive ingredient. Penzy's has it in tiny amounts. Keep it in the freezer when not using. I keep all of my seeds and expensive spices in the freezer where they will last forever.
    Anise extract is a popular European flavoring. It is easily found in the spice department of most grocery stores.
    The baking soda dissolved in vinegar is key to this cookie so don't skip it. There will be no taste of it in the cookies. By dissolving the baking soda in the vinegar, it produces carbon dioxide gas (C02), which is evident because of the formation of bubbles in the foaming mixture.
    These allow for soft and airy baked goods such as cookies, pancakes, and cakes. Baking soda also increases pH levels while reducing gluten. This creates less chewy and more tender baked goods.
    Corn syrup is used in the glaze to add sheen and help prevent cracking of the glaze. Corn syrup sold to consumers is not the high glucose variety used in commercial products.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 60cookiesCalories: 90kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 1gFat: 2gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.2gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 19mgSodium: 26mgPotassium: 25mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 12gVitamin A: 69IUVitamin C: 0.03mgCalcium: 8mgIron: 0.5mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Langue de Chat

    Modified: Jul 1, 2025 · Published: Oct 5, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 32 Comments

    Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.

    For the first cookie in my weekly European cookie post the Langue de Chat is a French cookie that translates to cat's tongue because of its shape. It is a crisp, sweet, long, wafer thin cookie and a snap to make with only five ingredients.

    Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.

    While this cookie is made in other countries and known as Kue Lidah Kucing in Indonesia, Lengua de Gato in the Philippines, and Lingue di Gatto in Italy they retain the traditional ingredients and look.

    I love them as a simple straightforward cookie, but they are even better by sandwiching with chocolate. Think Milano cookies here...especially if you remember them when they were made with butter instead of oils.

    While they are often seen barely browned on the edges, they taste, look and last better when baked to a golden brown. An easily made template keeps these cookies the same size.

    A couple of other European cookies you'll love are the French Butter Cookies - Petit Beurre, Chocolate Orange Macaron, French Macaron and the naturally gluten free cookie, Viennese Lemon Valentine's Cookies . A Cookie Roundup of 45 Cookies and Bars will yield even more offerings.

    For more information on baking the best cookies see Cookie Tips for the Best Cookies.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    European vs. American Cookies

    • Let's face it - all cookies are good but there are definite differences between European and American cookies. One of the major differences between them is European cookies are not as sweet as American Cookies. On the other hand, many American cookies and bars have a lot of add ins that make for a more complex cookie.
    • While American cookies can have an ingredient list that is daunting, European cookies generally have fewer ingredients  but they are manipulated a hundred different ways.  The cookies usually contain butter, flour, egg yolk as opposed to whole eggs and flavoring.  Leavening such as baking powder and baking soda are rarely used.   If leavening is needed it is often ammonium carbonate or baker's ammonia and is used when crispness is the desired outcome.
    • European cookies often feature a lot of ground nuts. Almonds, pistachios, walnuts and hazelnuts are used but peanuts and pecans will be found in American cookies.  Almond paste is a popular ingredient and is instantly recognizable.  
    • Greek, Middle Eastern, Italian, German and Scandanavian cookies often feature honey as a sweetener, in whole or in part and a lot of spices.  Think Lebkuchen and Pfeffernusse.  Candied citrus peel is also used as well as anise and lemon flavoring.
    • Salt, while a staple in American cookies, is not used in most European Cookies. 
    • Chocolate and peanut butter are huge components in the states but not so much in Europe.   
    • Americans like their cookies large whereas European cookies are usually small in comparison.  
    • There is no right or wrong cookie, no satisfactory or unsatisfactory, no better or worse cookie.  As with all things human, there are differences, and in the case of cookies, delicious differences. 

    What makes these cookies so easy

    • There are only 5 ingredients and I'm betting you have them in your fridge and pantry.
    • If you have left over egg whites this is a quick, delicious way to use them.
    • The cookie batter mixes up in a matter of minutes.
    • While these do require some piping, I have a whole section dedicated to making this easy for you.
    • What else can I say, simple, delicious and easy? So why wouldn't you make them?

    Langue de Chat Ingredients

    Cookies

    The five ingredients for the Langue de Chat are flour, powdered sugar, butter, vanilla and egg whites.

    FRONT ROW: Vanilla and egg whites

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Powdered sugar and flour

    Chocolate Filling

    A bowl of unmelted semisweet chocolate for the filling.

    Callebaut #811 semisweet chocolate callets for the filling

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage for the Lange de Chat features the template, the butter, vanilla and powdered sugar in the mixing bowl, the egg white added and the batter mixed.

    Step 1. On a piece of parchment paper the size of your pan, draw lines 3" wide with about ½" between them from the top to the bottom of the paper. Set aside. Step 2. Add the softened butter, powdered sugar and vanilla to the mixing bowl. Cream until light. Step 3. Add one egg white. Step 4. Beat on medium until it is completely incorporated.

    The second collage includes the second egg white added, the batter curdled, the flour added and the final smooth batter.

    Step 5. Add the second egg white. Step 6. Beat on medium to combine. It will probably curdle but that will be fixed in the next step. To learn more about curdled batters see my post How to Avoid Curdled Cake Batter. Step 7. Add all of the flour. Step 8. Beat on low to bring the batter together until smooth. Do not raise the speed as you don't want to incorporate additional air into the batter.

    This last collage shows the tip of the piped batter, the cookies unbaked, baked and one being covered with chocolate.

    Step 9. Place a second piece of parchment over the template. Fit a piping bag with a ½" plain tip and pipe in a straight line between the 3" lines. It will have a sharp upward tip at the end. Don't be concerned about this. It will come out flat when baked. Step 10. Be sure to leave about 3" between piping the cookies. These will spread a lot in the oven. Step 11. If sandwiching the cookies after baking and cooling, pair the cookies for shape and size. Step 12. Turn a pair of cookies bottom up. Spread a thick layer of melted semi-sweet chocolate on the bottom cookie about ¼" in from the edge. Place the top cookie on and gently press down to bring the chocolate to the edges.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you pronounce Lange de Chat

    Long duh shot.

    How long will these keep

    By baking them to a golden brown, they will keep in an airtight container for weeks, either plain or sandwiched with chocolate.

    Can the cookies be flavored other than vanilla.

    Sure. Use another extract such as almond or add lemon or orange zest or a bit of cinnamon can be used.

    Piping Tips

    • Piping can be scary but it's actually easy when piping these cookies. I do suggest you purchase a ½" piping tip. They are very inexpensive and do a much better job than a plastic bag with the tip cut off. The plastic bags can and do stretch out of shape as you apply pressure when piping.
    • The most important thing to remember when piping is to keep an even, steady pressure on the bag, letting up only at the end. Don't worry about the peak at the end, it will melt in the oven and won't show.
    • The harder you squeeze the piping bag the more comes out of the tip.
    • I'd suggest that you do a trial run on a few cookies to get a feel for how much pressure you need to apply. Scrape up the practice cookies and put them back in the bag.
    • When piping, look at where you want to go, not how you're doing along the way. Your hand will follow your eye and you will get straighter lines.
    • For these cookies, to keep the lines of batter straight, keep the bottom edge of the piping tip on the paper and, keeping even pressure on the bag, pipe straight down to the bottom line while looking at it.
    • When you get down to the last row of piping, turn the pan around to make piping the last row easier.

    Expert Tips

    • Creaming butter and sugar is an important step for these cookies. Using powdered sugar helps blend the two smoothly. If you forget to take the butter out early, there is information in Softened Butter and Better Butter for Baking. I refer to butter as softened rather than room temperature because all rooms aren't the same temperature. Some are too cold, some too hot. The ideal temperature for butter to cream well is 72°F to 75°F where the sugar and butter can best work together.
    • Whatever you do, do not use melted butter as it can't incorporate air.
    • Using plain chocolate to sandwich cookies instead of ganache keeps the cookies crisp for weeks in an airtight container. The ganache can soften them due to the cream in the chocolate.
    • And while I know some people suggest cutting the end off of a plastic bag to pipe these, I encourage you to purchase a half inch pastry tip as the plastic bags often stretch out of shape as they are used. These are one of the easiest cookies you can find to make so don't let the piping deter you.
    The picture shows a hand holding a chocolate sandwiched cookie so the filling shows.

    More Special Cookies for You

    • A bunch of French Butter Cookies, Petit Beurre, on a plate. They are rectangular cookies with holes throughout them and have browned edges
      French Butter Cookies - Petit Beurre
    • Pink macarons filled with chocolate and raspery on a white plate.
      French Macarons with Chocolate Raspberry Filling
    • Almond Macaroons
      Almond Macaroons

    If you love this recipe for Langue de Chat or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. I appreciate each of you being here!

    Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.

    Langue de Chat

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Langue de Chat is a French cookie that translates to cat's tongue because of its shape. It is a crisp, sweet, long, wafer thin cookie and a snap to make with only five ingredients. It's particularly good sandwiched with chocolate - think Milano's.
    5 from 10 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 25 minutes mins
    Cook Time 13 minutes mins
    Total Time 38 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine French
    Servings 30 servings
    Calories 72 kcal

    Equipment

    • ½" piping tip
    • Piping bag
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams)
    • 1 cup powdered sugar (130 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¾ cup all-purpose flour (105 grams)
    • 2 large egg whites
    • 3 ounces semisweet chocolate (85 grams)

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat the oven to 325°F.
    • Make a template on a piece of parchment paper that fits your pan,spacing wto lines 3" apart. Continue down the paper, leaving about ½" between the 3" lines. Set aside.
    • Combine the butter, powdered sugar, and vanilla in a mixing bowl. Beat until very light in color and texture. Scrape down.
    • Add 1 egg white and mix until completely combined.
    • Add the second egg white and mix on medium until blended. It will most like curdle but that will be fixed in the next step.
    • Add all the flour at once and beat on low until everything is incorporated and the batter is smooth.
    • Place a piece of parchment over the template. Place the pastry tip in a pastry bag. Fill with the batter.
    • Pipe a few practice cookies between the 3" lines. They can be scooped up and put back in the bag if you're not happy with them. Please see the piping tips above you need help. Keep the bottom edge of the piping tip on the paper and, keeping even pressure on the bag, pipe straight down to the bottom line while looking at it. It will make a small point at the bottom, but it will disappear when baked.
    • When the last line of cookies needs to be piped, turn the pan around to make it easier to pipe without damaging the cookies above it.
    • Remove the template, place it under another piece of parchment and proceed to pipe the remaining cookies.
    • Bake for 12 to 14 minutes until golden brown. Cool and store in an airtight container.
    • If they are to be sandwiched, match the cookies for size and shape. Melt the chocolate in a microwave at half power or over hot water, just until completely melted. Turn a set of cookies over and put a generous amount of chocolate on the lower cookie about ¼" from the edges. Cover with the top cookie, right side up, and gently press down to distribute the chocolate out to the edges of the cookie. Let them sit at room temperature until set. Store in an airtight container for a week or so.

    Notes

      • See Piping tips above for additional information.  
      • Piping can be scary but it's actually easy when piping these cookies. I do suggest you purchase a ½" piping tip. They are very inexpensive and do a much better job than a plastic bag with the tip cut off. The plastic bags can and do stretch out of shape as you apply pressure when piping.
      • The most important thing to remember when piping is to keep an even, steady pressure on the bag, letting up only at the end. Don't worry about the peak at the end, it will melt in the oven and won't show.
      • The harder you squeeze the piping bag the more comes out of the tip.
      • I'd suggest that you do a trial run on a few cookies to get a feel for how much pressure you need to apply. Scrape up the practice cookies and put them back in the bag.
      • When piping look at where you want to go, not how you're doing along the way. Your hand will follow your eye and you will get straighter lines.
      • For these cookies, to keep the lines of batter straight, keep the bottom edge of the piping tip on the paper and, keeping even pressure on the bag, pipe straight down to the bottom line while looking at it.
      • To make mini Langues de Chat,make the ones on the template 1 ½ to 2 inches.  Use a ¼ inch pastry tip and reduce the baking time.
      • Orange Langues de Chat can be made by adding the zest of an orange to the sugar and butter.  Sandwich with milk chocolate.
      • Lemon Cookies require the zest of 1 large or 2 medium lemons added to the butter and sugar. Sandwich with white chocolate.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cookieCalories: 72kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 1gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.2gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 8mgSodium: 5mgPotassium: 24mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 96IUCalcium: 3mgIron: 0.3mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Plum Crisp

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Aug 21, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 24 Comments

    Plum Crisp ready to eat with a spoon in a white bowl.

    This easy Plum Crisp recipe uses readily available fresh plums and is ideal for beginners.  It’s much like a pie but with with no crust. The crispy topping stays crunchy under sweet-tart softened plums while a heavy dose of vanilla, turns a ho-hum crisp into a delicious dessert.

    Plum Crisp ready to eat with a spoon in a white bowl.

    There are yellow plums, red plums, black plums and green plums.  They come in all sizes for all tastes.  Mirabelles are considered the sweetest, while Italian prune plums are exactly that – especially sweet when dried into prunes.  There are American, Japanese, and European plums. All About Gardening has an interesting article with photos about the variety of plums.

    My Best Plum Dumplings uses fresh Italian Blue Plums while the Gateau Breton uses them dried as prunes. Both are worth a look!

    I used black plums for this recipe.  They aren’t actually black but a deep purple which I suppose looked black to whomever named them.  They are of the larger variety and hold their shape well when baked.  Santa Rosa's work well also. While plums aren’t peeled, the stones can be a challenge to remove but I’m going to show you an easy way to do that.  

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • Simple and Quick to Make - There is nothing complicated about this recipe. It comes together literally in a matter of minutes and is a great finish for any meal. Just stir the topping together, the fruit together, into the pan it goes and bake. That's it!
    • Not too Much Sugar - At the bakery, we reduced the sugar in all of our pies so the flavor the the fruit is forward, not the sugar. I continue to make my fruit desserts this way and think you'll enjoy the enhanced flavor.
    • The crisp topping is plentiful and the crunchy texture blends perfectly with the soft fruit underneath.
    • A plum sauce is how I like to describe the looser than pie juiciness that bakes up.
    • This plum crisp is so delicious on it's own, I don't serve ice cream or anything else with it. Just enjoy the full flavor of the plums and the crisp for an old fashioned dessert that is just as popular today as ever it was.
    • The recipe uses Pantry Ingredients that are probably on hand with the exception of the plums.
    • This dessert is a great family dessert and especially good after barbecue.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Crisp Topping

    The ingredients for the crisp are brown sugar, flour ,rolled oats, salt, butter and baking powder.

    Ingredients read left to right.

    BACK ROW: Brown sugar, flour, old fashioned oats

    FRONT ROW: Baking powder, unsalted butter, baking soda

    Plum Ingredients

    The ingredients for the plums are plums,granulated sugar, salt, flour, and vanilla.

    BACK ROW: Plums, granulated sugar

    FRONT ROW: Salt, flour, vanilla

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list and instructions.

    Variations

    • Use half plums and half apricots for a change.
    • Substitute all fresh apricots for the plums in equal amounts.
    • Make individual crisps in 6 or 8 ounce ramekins. Place them on a tray and bake until the fruit is soft and the crisp is golden.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The plum is cut around it equator in order to separate it.

    Step 1. Cut the plum through its equator and twist in opposite directions to separate them.

    The pit of the plum is removed using a serrated spoon to make it easy.

    Step 2. Using a spoon with a serrated tip makes removing the pit of the plum much easier. Just go around the pit and lift it out.

    The plums are cut into ¼" slices.

    Step 3. Cut the plums in about ¼" slices. This is easiest done by turning the plum halves over and cutting from the skin side. Place in a large bowl.

    The dry ingredients (sugar, flour and salt) are added to the plums.

    Step 4. Mix the dry ingredients together and add to the plums. Stir to coat them evenly. Set aside.

    All the ingredients for the plum crisp are placed in the bowl of a mixer.

    Step 5. Place all of the ingredients for the crisp in a mixing bowl.

    The ingredients are mixed to form crumbs in the mixing bowl.

    Step 6. Mix on low to bring ingredients together, then on medium to form the crumbs. Do not mix past the crumbs or it will become a paste.

    The plum mixture is poured into a baking dish.

    Step 7. Pour the prepared plums into the baking dish.

    The plums are covered with the crisp before bakingl

    Step 8. Cover the plums evenly with the crisp. Bake as directed.

    Do plums have to be peeled?

    The good news is they don't. Their skins are thin and they add texture to the baked dish.

    How ripe should plums be for baking

    Slightly under ripe or just ripe plums are best so they don't become mushy when baked as fully ripened fruit would do.

    What months to plums come into season

    Late June or early July to September. Asian plums usually ripen earliest in the season, followed by complex cross varieties, and then European plums - some of which will continue ripening into the beginning of fall. The Italian prune plum has a very short season in late August or early September close to the end of the plum season.

    An overhead photo of the finished plum crisp with plums on the right side of the dish and crisp on the left.

    More Fruit Desserts

    • Slice of Blueberry Lemon Pizza
      Blueberry Lemon Pizza in a Brioche Crust
    • Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries
      Sunny Side Up Apricot Pastries
    • Strawberry Granita sists in a white bowl on a blue and white background with a yellow napkin and spoon .
      Strawberry Balsamic Granita Recipe
    • Honey Thyme Apple Tart
      Honey Thyme Apple Tart

    If you love this Plum Crisp or any other recipe on my website, please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. I appreciate each of you being here!

    Plum Crisp ready to eat with a spoon in a white bowl.

    Plum Crisp

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This easy Plum Crisp recipe uses readily available fresh plums and is ideal for beginners.  It’s much like a pie but with no crust.  A heavy dose of vanilla, turns a ho-hum crisp into a delicious dessert.
    4.87 from 15 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 35 minutes mins
    Cook Time 35 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 349 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Plums

    • 2 pounds black or santa rosa plums
    • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams)
    • 3 to 4 tablespoons all-purpose flour (40 grams)
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Crisp Topping

    • ¾ cup old fashioned oats (not quick oats) (75 grams)
    • ½ cup brown sugar (100 grams)
    • ¾ cup all-purpose flour (105 grams)
    • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
    • ¼ teaspoon baking powder
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, softened (85 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Plums

    • Preheat the oven to 375°F. Spray a 9x9 in square pan or the equivalent size with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • The amount of flour to use depends upon how loose you like the plums. Use more if you like a tighter filling.
    • Cut the plums in half along their equator. Twist them in opposite directions to separate. Remove the pit. It is easy to do by going around the pit with a serrated spoon and scooping it out. Prepare all of the plums.
    • Turn the plums, skin side up and slice them about ¼ inch thick. Put them in a large bowl. Add the vanilla.
    • Combine the dry ingredients and stir the into the plums. Let the sit while you prepare the crisp, stirring once in a while.

    Crisp Topping

    • Place all of the ingredients in a mixing bowl. Mix on low speed to bring together. Raise the speed to medium to medium high and mix until crumbs form.

    Assembly

    • Stir the plums well and pour them into the prepared dish. Top with the crisp, spreading it evenly over the plums.
    • Place the dish on a parchment line rimmed sheet pan and place in the oven for 35 to 45 minutes until the plums are soft, the crisp is a medium golden brown and the juices are bubbling out.
    • Serve warm.

    Notes

    I have included step by step instructions with photos to guide  you.
    This recipe calls for regular oatmeal or rolled  oats.  Do not use quick oats.
    If you don't have brown sugar, substitute granulated sugar.  Also, either light or dark brown sugar can be used.
    For safety, place the pan with the plum crisp on a parchment line rimmed sheet pan. This makes it much easier and safer to move it in and out of the oven, especially when it is hot.
    If black plums are not available, substitute Santa Rosas or another similar plum.   
    This is good served warm or room temperature.  
    Store the crisp at room temperature for a day or two if it lasts that long.  

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8servingsCalories: 349kcalCarbohydrates: 66gProtein: 3gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 23mgSodium: 128mgPotassium: 241mgFiber: 2gSugar: 50gVitamin A: 654IUVitamin C: 11mgCalcium: 38mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Dutch Peach Pie

    Modified: Jul 29, 2023 · Published: Jul 31, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 13 Comments

    A slice of Dutch Peach Pie on a white lace plate with a fork beside it.

    Fresh summer peaches just beg to be made into this amazing looking Dutch Peach Pie, which is one of the most sensational tasting pies around. While this is not a recipe that you'll make in twenty minutes, it's worth every second it takes.

    The combination of a flaky crust, ripe peaches lightly sweetened and an easy crumb topping are balanced for the perfect bite every time. It's truly summer in your mouth.

    A slice of Dutch Peach Pie on a white lace plate with a fork beside it.

    Sometimes less is more and I have taken that approach to the sugar in my pies by reducing the amount to allow the full flavor of the peaches to shine through.

    If you're looking to impress or just making a pie for the family, this recipe is sure to please.

    For more information about peaches, types, easiest way to peel and pit and how to hold them, see my post All About Peaches - Summers Sweet Spot.

    A couple of other summer pies you might enjoy are: (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie, Coconut Cream Pie with a Difference and Chocolate Strawberry Pie (another almost no bake pie).

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    A Note About Peaches

    I like to buy under ripened peaches and allow them to ripen at room temperature in my kitchen. For pies you want them ripe but not overly so. They should definitely smell like peaches but not be too soft as they will exude more juice and can become mushy when baked.

    How to Peel Peaches

    There are a couple of ways to do this and one is definitely easier than the other. Peeling them with a vegetable peeler is not only more time consuming, it also takes more of the peach with the peel.

    Blanching them briefly in boiling water, then running the under cold water to stop the cooking, makes it easy to slip the skins off with no peach coming with it. This only works with ripe peaches. The skin on unripe peaches sticks like glue to the peach so those have to be peeled. But I'm not sure why one would use unripe peaches to start with.

    Why This Recipe Works

    • The pie crust is easily made in the processor faster and easier. See my American Pie Crust Tutorial for a full reading of the how's and why's.
    • The combination of instant tapioca and flour is the ideal combination for thickening most pies. It is the one we used in the majority of our deep dish pies at the bakery. It soft sets the filling while keeping it firm and upright and gives the fruit a bright, jewel like appearance when baked.
    • The reduced sugar intensifies the peach flavor by not masking it with sweetness. It really does make a difference.
    • A combination of butter is used for flavor and the shortening is used for flakiness in the pie crust.
    • The crumb finish is so much easier than making a lattice or enclosing the pie in a top crust.
    • The balsamic vinegar gives a boost to the flavor profile of the pie.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Crumb Topping

    Ingredients for the crumb topping include granulated sugar, flour, brown sugar, butter, salt and cinnamon.

    BACK ROW: Granulated sugar, flour, brown sugar

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Salt, cinnamon

    Pie Crust

    Ingredients for the pie crust include all-purpose flour, cake flour, egg, salt, butter, shortening and water.

    BACK ROW: Cake flour, ice water

    MIDDLE ROW: Egg, all-purpose flour

    FRONT ROW: Butter, shortening, salt, lemon juice

    Filling

    Ingredients for the filling are peaches, sugar, flour, minute tapioca, balsamic vinegar, vanilla.

    BACK ROW: Peaches, granulated sugar

    FRONT ROW: White Balsamic Vinegar, flour, vanilla extract, minute tapioca

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for full ingredients list and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Crumb Topping

    See my post for the easiest to make Crumb Topping with step by step instructions and photos.

    American Pie Crust

    Use the ingredients given in the recipe. For step by step pictures and information on this pie crust, see my post on the American Pie Crust Tutorial.

    Peach Filling

    The flour and instant tapioca are mixed in a bowl.

    Step 1. Mix the flour and tapioca in a bowl to combine.

    The peaches, flour and tapioca are combined in a bowl.

    Step 2. Pour it over the peeled and sliced peaches. Let them sit 20 minutes. Do not let them sit longer or the peaches can juice too much.

    The filing is poured into the pie shell.

    Step 3. Pour the filling into the pie crust.

    The crumbs are covering the peaches.

    Step 4. Cover the peaches evenly with the crumbs.

    The edges of the pie are covered with foil to prevent overbrowning.

    Step 5. The edges of the pie are covered with foil.

    The pie is baked until the filling bubbles up through the crumbs.

    Step 6. The pie is baked until the filling bubbles up through the crumb crust.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the best thickener for a peach pie?

    It depends upon whether the pie will be frozen. Cornstarch is often used for its shiny clarity and works well but cornstarch breaks down if frozen and thawed. Flour alone will work for freezing but it makes the pie a bit cloudy. For a thickener that will bake up to a jewel-like look, use half flour and half minute tapioca.

    What are the best peaches for baking?

    If you can get them, Red Haven. They are known as the dessert peach because they have exceptional flavor that takes well to cobblers, pies, jams and anything baked. Unfortunately, they are not often marked in stores as are apples.

    Why is my pie so runny?

    One of two things could be the cause. There isn't enough thickening or it wasn't baked long enough for the thickener to activate. That is why with fruit pies, you look for the thickener to bubble up through the crust or crumbs.

    Expert Tips

    • Make sure everything is very cold or frozen hard as called for when making the pie crust. This will prevent the butter and from shortening being incorporated into the dough.
    • The butter and shortening should be visible in the dough. That is what makes a flaky crust. When they melt, steam is produced making layers of dough. Think laminated doughs.
    • When rolling out, make sure the dough is cold and lightly flour the work surface. You don't want to incorporate raw flour into the dough at this point.
    • Be aware that thickeners require time and temperature to activate. Fruit pies are done when the filling bubbles thickly out of the crust.
    • I prefer glass pie plates to metal because I can see if the bottom crust is browned. There is nothing that will ruin a pie like an unbaked crust.
    • Pie shells can be made and frozen, well wrapped, for several months. Thaw in the refrigerator to use.
    • Covering the edges of a pie that requires long baking prior to putting into the oven is easier and safer than halfway through baking. This is the method we used at the bakery. Tear pieces of foil 3" to 4" inches wide. Cover just the edge and under the lip of the pie plate. About 3 pieces are used for a 9" pie pan. Halfway through baking, use tongs to remove the foil.

    More Peach Recipes You'll Love

    • Peach Pecan Quick Bread
      Peach Pecan Quick Bread
    • White Wine Amaretto Peach Sauce
      White Wine Amaretto Peach Sauce
    • Caramelized Peach Tart
      Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble
    • Peach Soup
      Chilled Peach Soup

    If you love this Dutch Peach Pie or any other recipe on my website, please please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. I appreciate each of you being here!

    A slice of Dutch Peach Pie on a white lace plate with a fork beside it.

    Dutch Peach Pie

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Fresh summer peaches just beg to be made into this amazing looking Dutch Peach Pie, which is one of the most sensational tasting pies around. While this is not a recipe that you'll make in twenty minutes, it's worth every second it takes. 
    5 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 hours hrs 15 minutes mins
    Course Dessert, Pie, Pies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 461 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Single Pie Crust

    • 1 ¾ cups sifted cake flour (180 grams)
    • ⅓ cup sifted all-purpose flour (40 grams)
    • ¾ teaspoon salt
    • 6 tablespoons butter, cut into pieces and frozen until hard
    • 3 tablespoons shortening, like Crisco frozen and cut into pieces
    • 2 tablespoons beaten egg
    • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
    • 5 tablespoons water, chilled and divided

    Crumb Topping

    • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams, or 1 stick)
    • ⅓ cup granulated sugar (65 grams)
    • ⅓ cup packed dark-brown sugar (65 grams)
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 1 ½ cups cake flour (190 grams)

    Peach Pie Filling

    • 3 pounds fresh peaches (1380 grams)
    • 1 cup sugar (200 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons all-purpose flour (40 grams)
    • 3 tablespoons minute tapioca (28 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons white Balsamic Vinegar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla or almond extract

    Instructions
     

    Single Crust

    • I have a post that does a deep dive into the American Pie Crust with the functions of ingredients and step by step pictures.
    • Cut the butter into 6 pats and cut those half. Measure the shortening in tablespoons. Freeze both of these hard.
    • Place both flours and the salt in the processor bowl. Pulse several times to mix. Place the frozen butter evenly over the flour and pulse until the butter is in large pieces. Add the frozen shortening and to pulse several times.
    • Combine the egg, lemon juice, and water. Pour in a circle over the processor contents. Pulse until it forms clumps. Pour out onto a lightly floured work surface. Push the clumps together into a ball. Knead 4 or 5 times for form a dough. Pat into a circle about 1 inch thick. Wrap in film and refrigerate a minimum of 2 hours or overnight.
    • On a lightly floured surface, roll out to a circle approximately 13 inches. Place in the pie pan and fit into corners. Cut the overhang an even 1 inch all the way around. Tuck the crust under and flute the edges.
    • Chill well. This can be made the day before and refrigerated or frozen. Thaw in the refrigerator if frozen.

    Crumb Topping

    • Combine the butter and both sugars in a mixer. Cream until very light. Combine the salt and flour; add all at once and beat on medium just until large crumbs form. Scrape down the sides and the bottom for unincorporated flour. Mix briefly.
    • Do not over mix or you will end up with a really thick cohesive mixture. Store the crumbs in the refrigerator while you make the filling. This can be made a day ahead if desired. Refrigerate until needed.

    Peach Pie Filling

    • Preheat the oven to 400°F. Line a half sheet pan with parchment.
    • About 20 minutes before filling the pie, combine the sugar, flour, and tapioca.
    • Add the balsamic vinegar and extract to the fruit. Pour the dry ingredients over the fruit and mix well.
    • Place the pastry shell on the lined sheet pan and pour in the filling. Cover the fruit with the crumbs. Foil the edges of the crust to prevent burning.
    • Bake for 45 minutes then remove the foil. This is easiest done with tongs. Continue baking for about 45 minutes more until the crust is browned and the peaches are beginning to bubble around the edges. Lightly tent with top with foil if the crumbs are browning too much.
    • Cool the Dutch Peach Pie before serving, although I love it slightly warm. If you make it the day ahead, just microwave the slices briefly.

    Notes

    1. The combination of instant tapioca and flour is the ideal combination for thickening most pies. It is the one we used in the majority of our deep dish pies at the bakery. It soft sets the filling while keeping it firm and upright and gives the fruit a bright, jewel like appearance when baked.
    2. The reduced sugar intensifies the peach flavor by not masking it with sweetness. It really does make a difference.
    3. A combination of butter is used for flavor and the shortening is used for flakiness in the pie crust.
    4. Make sure everything if very cold or frozen hard as called for when making the pie crust. This will prevent the butter and shortening from being incorporated into the dough when processed. 
    5. Pieces of the butter and shortening should be visible in the dough. That is what makes a flaky crust. When they melt, steam is produced making layers of dough. Think laminated doughs.
    6. When rolling out, make sure the dough is cold and lightly flour the work surface. You don't want to incorporate raw flour into the dough at this point. 
    7. Be aware that thickeners require time and temperature to activate. Fruit pies are done when the filling bubbles out of the crust thickly. 
    8. I prefer standard size glass pie plates to metal because I can see if the bottom crust is browned. There is nothing that will ruin a pie like an unbaked crust. 
    9. Pie shells can be made and frozen, well wrapped, for several months. Thaw in the refrigerator to use.
    10. Covering the edges of a pie that requires long baking prior to putting into the oven is easier and safer than halfway through baking. This is the method we used at the bakery. Tear pieces of foil 3" to 4" inches wide. Cover just the edge and under the lip of the pie plate. About 3 pieces are used for a 9" pie pan. Halfway through baking, use tongs to remove the foil. 
    11. Storage:  The pie can be served warm or at room temperature.  It can be held at room temperature.  The baked pie can also be frozen, well wrapped for several months.  Thaw in the refrigerator overnight.  Freshen by placing the pie back in the pie pan if frozen without it.  Place it in a 350°F oven.  Tent the top with foil and heat for 20 to 25 minutes. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 461kcalCarbohydrates: 71gProtein: 6gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 45mgSodium: 262mgPotassium: 198mgFiber: 3gSugar: 38gVitamin A: 795IUVitamin C: 5mgCalcium: 22mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Spritz Bars - Easier than The Cookies

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Jul 30, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

    Ready to eat Spritz bars piled up.
    Spritz bars are easier than the cookies and every bit as good.

    Spritz Bars are a faster way to make Spritz cookies all dressed up with Swedish Pearl Sugar and drizzled in chocolate.  With October being cookie month, I wanted to bring you a cookie that’s not in my new book, Craving Cookies. 

    Because I wanted the Spritz Bars to hold their shape, they require a bit more flour.   Other than that, they are the same.

    Swedish Pearl Sugar

    I love using Swedish Pearl sugar for its pure white pebbles that don’t melt under heat.  They add a wonderful crunch to cookies.  They can be found online.  I use Lars, but there are other brands available.  Don’t confuse the Swedish Pearl Sugar with the Belgium Pearl Sugar as those sugar crystals are much larger.

    These Spritz Bars will make a great addition to your Christmas Cookies.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients for the Spritz Bars include egg yolks, flour, sugar, European butter, almond extract,Swedish pearl sugar.

    BACK ROW: Cake Flour, Swedish pearl sugar

    MIDDLE ROW: Egg Yolks, almond extract, granulated sugar

    FRONT ROW: European Butter

    Recipe Ingredients

    1 cup unsalted European butter, softened (225 grams, 8 ounces or 2 sticks)
    ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams or 3 ½ ounces)
    1 tablespoon almond extract
    2 egg yolks
    3 cups cake flour (375 grams or 13 ⅛ ounces)
    Swedish Pearl sugar (about 225 grams or 8 ounces)
    2 to 3 ounces semisweet chocolate (85 grams)

    Instructions

    Step 1. Preheat the oven to 350°F / 175°C.  Line several baking pans with parchment paper and set aside.

    Step 2. Place the butter, sugar, and almond extract in a mixing bowl. Cream until combined.

    Step 3. Add the egg yolks and beat until light. 

    Step 4. Add the flour gradually and beat until everything is well blended. The dough will be a bit sticky. That is how it should be.

    Dough rolled out and placed in a half sheet pan.  Swedish pearl sugar covers about ⅓ of it.

    Step 5. Cut off two pieces of wax paper or foil large enough to overhang the pan by a couple of inches on both sides.  Roll the dough between wax paper to 18”x13”.  It will be about ⅛” thick.  Place it in a half sheet pan.

    Alternatively, divide the dough in half and roll each piece into a 9x13” rectangle.  

    Whichever you decide, cover the dough with the pearl sugar and press in firmly.

    The rolled out dough is covered with Swedish pearl sugar completely.

    Step 6. Cover the dough completely with pearl sugar, pressing it into the dough slightly. Place in the freezer until partially, but not completely frozen. It should be firm.

    Cutting the bars with a multi-prong pastry cutter.

    Step 7. Cut the dough into 2 ½ x 1 ¼ inch rectangles.  I used the cookie dough cutter that I talked about in the Oreo Taco post.  I love it for it’s ease of cutting identical size bars. Cut lengthwise into 1 ¼” strips. Adjust the size to 2 ½” and cut crosswise.  Done! 

    The bars can also be cut with a ruler and knife.   In either case, the dough must be cold and firm.  

    A spatula is run under the frozen bars to easily release them.

    Step 8. When ready to bake, run a spatula under the cookies to free them from the paper.

    Step 9. Most likely, they will come off about 2 to 4 at a time.  Break them along the cutting lines and place them 4 wide x 4 down on half sheet pans.

    Freeze the Spritz Bars until hard. When ready to bake, run a spatula under the cookies to free them from the paper.Most likely, they will come off about 2 to 4 at a time.  Break them along the cutting lines and place them 4 wide x 4 down on half sheet pans.


    Bake for 12 to 14 minutes until just browning on the edges.  Do not overbake.

    Baked Spritz bars on a half sheet pan.

    Step 10. Cool the baked bars in the pans.

    To Finish

    Step 1. Melt the semisweet chocolate at half power in the microwave or over simmering water.  Drizzle it over the cookies.  Allow the chocolate to set up before storing them.

    Yield: Approximately 48 Spritz Bars

    Storage:  Let the chocolate set up completely.  Stack with paper between them in a closed tin where they will last for weeks.

    Note:  These Spritz Bars are actually better if they are stored for a few days in the tin. The size of the bars can be made larger or smaller as you choose.  When you break them apart, some of the Swedish Pearl sugar will fall off.  Save this as it can be used later.

    The bars can also be cross cut again to make square cookies.  Adjust the size as desired.

    Spritz bars are easier than the cookies and every bit as good.

    Spritz Bars

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These Spritz Bars are easier and faster than piping the cookies and every bit as delicious. The pearl sugar gives them a bit of a crunch and makes these special anytime of the year.
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 14 minutes mins
    Total Time 44 minutes mins
    Course Bars, Cookies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 48 bars
    Calories 80 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup unsalted European butter, softened (225 grams, 2 sticks)
    • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 gramss)
    • 1 tablespoon almond extract
    • 2 egg yolks
    • 3 cups cake flour (375 grams)
    • Swedish Pearl sugar (about 225 grams
    • 2 to 3 ounces semisweet chocolate (85 grams)

    Instructions
     

    INSTRUCTIONS

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F / 175°C. Line several baking pans with parchment paper and set aside.
    • Place the butter, sugar, and almond extract in a mixing bowl. Cream until combined.
    • Add the egg yolks and beat until light.
    • Add the flour gradually and beat until everything is well blended. The dough will be a bit sticky. That is how it should be.
    • Cut off two pieces of wax paper or foil large enough to overhang the pan by a couple of inches on both sides. Roll the dough between wax paper to 18”x13”. It will be about ⅛” thick. Place it in a half sheet pan.
    • Alternatively, divide the dough in half and roll each piece into a 9x13” rectangle.
    • Whichever you decide, cover the dough with the pearl sugar and press in firmly.
    • Cover the dough completely with pearl sugar, pressing it into the dough slightly. Place in the freezer until partially, but not completely frozen. It should be firm.
    • Cut the dough into 2 ½ x 1 ¼ inch rectangles. I used the cookie dough cutter that I talked about in the Oreo Tacos post. I love it for it’s ease of cutting identical size bars. Cut lengthwise into 1 ¼” strips. Adjust the size to 2 ½” and cut crosswise. Done!
    • The bars can also be cut with a ruler and knife. In either case, the dough must be cold and firm.
    • Freeze the Spritz Bars until hard. When ready to bake, run a spatula under the cookies to free them from the paper.Most likely, they will come off about 2 to 4 at a time. Break them along the cutting lines and place them 4 wide x 4 down on half sheet pans.
    • Bake for 12 to 14 minutes until just browning on the edges. Do not overbake.

    TO FINISH

    • Melt the semisweet chocolate at half power in the microwave or over simmering water. Drizzle it over the cookies. Allow the chocolate to set up before storing them.
    • Yield: Approximately 48 Spritz Bars

    Notes

    Storage: Let the chocolate set up completely. Stack with paper between them in a closed tin where they will last for weeks.
    Note: These Spritz Bars are actually better if they are stored for a few days in the tin. The size of the bars can be made larger or smaller as you choose. When you break them apart, some of the Swedish Pearl sugar will fall off. Save this as it can be used later.
    The bars can also be cross cut again to make square cookies. Adjust the size as desired.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 48servingsCalories: 80kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 1gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.2gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 18mgSodium: 31mgPotassium: 17mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 130IUCalcium: 4mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Crumb Topping

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Jul 24, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 14 Comments

    Crumb topping on a multi-colored plate.

    There's nothing like a Crumb Topping for muffins, pies, coffee cakes, cakes, bar cookies, and quick breads. And with this recipe there is no more pinching dough together to make crumbs. Just follow the directions for either the processor or mixer version and you will have a pile of crumbs in less than 30 minutes to use as you wish.

    Crumb topping on a multi-colored plate.

    Just five ingredients to make the crumbs that can be frozen for future use. This can't be easier for perfect results every time.

    Sometimes there are left over crumbs. See below for Baked Crumb Topping.

    If you are wondering what the difference is between crumb topping and streusel, not much is the answer. Both are crumb toppings containing the same ingredients but streusel often has more sugar, cinnamon, nuts and or oats included.

    I have used these crumbs on the New York Syle Crumb Cake, Strawberry Muffins, Cuccidati Coffeecake and Crumb Cake Doughnuts as well as other recipes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • The crumbs use 5 ingredients that are probably in your pantry now.
    • They can be made in either the mixer or a processor. I think the crumbs are lighter in the processor but either mixing methods works.
    • These can be frozen so they are always on hand whenever needed.
    • I can't imagine an easier recipe to make.
    • The crumbs take 30 minutes or less to make.

    Crumb Topping Ingredients

    Cake flour, brown sugar, salt, granulated sugar and butter make up the crumb topping.

    COUNTERCLOCKWISE: Unsalted butter, cake flour, brown sugar, salt, granulated sugar.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Food Processor Method

    Cold butter is cut into pieces.

    Step 1. The cold butter is cut into pieces. Keep the butter cold.

    The dry ingredients are placed in the bowl of a processor.

    Step 2. Place all of the dry ingredients in the bowl of a food processor.

    The dry ingredients in the processor are processed to combine them.

    Step 3. Process the dry ingredients to combine them.

    Crumbs are formed in the processor.

    Step 4. Place the butter over the dry ingredients and pulse the processor until the crumbs form. Do not over process or a paste will form.

    The crumbs are on a tray to be frozen.

    Step 5. If freezing, place the crumbs on a tray and freeze hard. Place in a freezer bag where they will last several months.

    Mixer Method

    The butter, granulated sugar and brown sugar are placed in a mixing bowl.

    Step 1. For this version the butter should be softened. Place the butter and both sugars in the mixing bowl.

    The butter and sugars are creamed in the mixing bowl.

    Step 2. Cream the mixture until light, scraping down as necessary. Do not use the scraper blade for this recipe. Use the normal paddle.

    The flour is added to the mixing bowl.

    Step 3. The flour and salt are mixed and added to the flour to the mixing bowl. Mix on low to combine, raise to medium to make the crumbs.

    The crumbs are in a bowl.

    Step 4. The crumbs are transferred to a bowl. They may be frozen as above.

    Baked Crumb Topping

    These are fantastic to use sprinkled on ice cream, pastry cream or just eat them as a snack!!

    Unbaked crumb topping is placed in a pan lined with parchment paper.

    Step 1. Line a pan with parchment paper and place the unbaked crumbs in a single layer.

    The crumbs are baked until golden brown.

    Step 2. Bake at 350°F for 12 to 15 minutes until golden brown. Cool completely. Use as desired.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can all purpose flour be used instead of cake flour?

    It can. However, the crumbs are a bit sturdier and not as soft as with cake flour. If using all-purpose flour, use the same weight. If measuring by volume, remove 2 tablespoons of flour.

    Can all one sugar be used?

    Yes but if only granulated sugar is used the crumbs might be a bit bland. In that case, add 2 teaspoons molasses to kick up the flavor. If using only brown sugar, you don't need to do anything.

    Can the crumb topping mixture be overmixed?

    Yes, it will turn into a paste so watch it and stop when the crumbs form

    Expert Tips

    • Be sure the butter is the correct temperature for whichever way the crumbs are being made. Softened for the mixer method, cold for the processor.
    • If substituting all-purpose flour and measuring by volume instead of weight, remove 2 tablespoons of flour.
    • Add ¾ teaspoon cinnamon to dry ingredients if desired.
    • I prefer the term softened butter which is about 75°F instead of room temperature. Room temperatures vary wildly - think Alaska and Arizona.
    New York Crumbcake

    Recipes To Love with Crumb Topping

    • Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins
      Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins
    • Cuccidati Coffeecake
      Cuccidati Coffeecake
    • Mincemeat Tartlets
      Mincemeat Tarts
    • Strawberry Muffins
      Best of All Strawberry Muffins

    If you love this Crumb Topping or any other recipe on my website, please please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. I appreciate each of you being here!

    Crumb topping on a multi-colored plate.

    Crumb Topping

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This quick and easy Crumb Topping recipe can be used wherever a crumb topping is used be it cake, muffins, pies, cupcakes, coffeecakes, doughnuts, or quick breads and is made in a matter of minutes..
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Cake, Coffee Cake, Muffins, Quick Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 2.5 cups
    Calories 812 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup unsalted butter (114 grams or 1 stick)
    • ⅓ cup granulated sugar (65 grams)
    • ⅓ cup brown sugar (65 grams)
    • 1 ½ cups cake flour (190 grams)
    • ¾ teaspoon cinnamon, optional
    • ¼ teaspoon salt

    Instructions
     

    Processor Method

    • Cut the cold butter into pieces. Keep cold.
    • Place all the dry ingredients in the processor bowl and pulse several times to mix.
    • Circle the cold butter over the dry ingredients and pulse the processor until crumbs form. Do not over process or a paste will form
    • Use at once, store in the refrigerator for up to a week or freeze for longer storage.

    Mixer Method

    • The butter should be softened to about 75°F for this method. I don't use the term room temperature because Alaska and Arizona can have wildly different temperatues.
    • Place the butter and both sugars in the mixing bowl. Cream until light.
    • Combine the flour and salt. Add to the mixer and mix on low to blend, then on medium to form crumbs. Do not over mix or a paste will form.

    Notes

    1. Be sure the butter is the correct temperature for whichever way the crumbs are being made. Softened for the mixer method, cold for the processor.
    2. If substituting all-purpose flour and measuring by volume instead of weight, remove 2 tablespoons of flour.
    3. I think the crumbs are lighter in the processor but either mixing methods works.
    4. This crumb topping can be refrigerated for a week or frozen so they are always on hand whenever needed.  To freeze them, spread them out on a tray, freeze and then bag.  You can then use what you need and the rest can be kept frozen for several months.  

    Nutrition

    Calories: 812kcalCarbohydrates: 110gProtein: 9gFat: 38gSaturated Fat: 24gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 98mgSodium: 248mgPotassium: 128mgFiber: 2gSugar: 55gVitamin A: 1138IUVitamin C: 0.02mgCalcium: 53mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Peach Amaretto Jam

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Jul 17, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

    Peach Jam sits on a biscuit with a bowl of peaches and a container of jam behind it.

    This Peach Amaretto Jam is the perfect recipe if you've never made jam before. I've reduced the sugar to allow the peach flavor to come through and added a bit of amaretto to enhance it. This is a refrigerator or freezer jam that doesn't require canning with the large pot of boiling water and all that comes with it.

    This is so versatile you won't want to miss the No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream that uses this jam or the Cream Biscuits which is the easiest biscuit recipe you can find and it has no butter.

    Peach Jam sits on a biscuit with a bowl of peaches and a container of jam behind it.

    While peeling peaches can be a pain, it doesn't have to be. All About Peaches shows you my favorite, easiest way to quickly get it done. The post also talks about the different types of peaches and explains the difference between Freestone and Clingstone peaches as well.

    Although this recipe features a liqueur, the alcohol is totally gone by the time the jam is finished, leaving only the flavor behind.

    If you absolutely have to substitute you can use ⅓ cup water and 1 teaspoon almond extract.  I have not done it, but it should get you close to the flavor of the amaretto.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • First of all Peach Amaretto Jam is really easy to make. You won't spend hours heating up the kitchen to make this jam since there is no canning involved.
    • The flavor is astounding. Commercial peach jam doesn't come close to the intense flavor in this jam.
    • It's so versatile. From topping toast, a biscuit or scone, it can be used as an ice cream or cake topping.
    • There's only 3 ingredients in the recipe.
    • Now is the season for peaches and they are at their peak.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Three ingredients that make this peach jam are peaches, sugar and amaretto.

    LEFT TO RIGHT: Peaches, amaretto and granulated sugar.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Step 1. Peel and coarsely cut the peaches.

    The cut peaches are placed in a food processor.

    Step 2. Place the cut peaches in the bowl of a processor.

    Coarsely chopped peaches are in a pyrex measuring up.

    Step 3. Pulse the peaches in the processor until the pieces are little. Do not puree them.

    All of ingredients are placed in a heavy dutch oven.

    Step 4. Stir all the ingredients together in a heavy dutch oven or pot. Bring to a boil over medium heat, stirring from time to time.

    A foam rises to the top of the boiling peaches.

    Step 5. Skim off the foam that rises to the top from the boiling peaches so the jam will be clear.

    The peach jam is finished in the dutch oven.

    Step 6. Reduce the heat to a low boil and cook the jam until it has thickened.

    The jam is finished when a spoonful is placed on a frozen plate and it stays separated when your finger is drawn through it.

    Step 7. The jam is finished when a small amount is placed on a frozen plate and it stays separated when you draw your finger through it with very little liquid surrounds it.

    The jam is immediately poured into jars and the lids are put on.

    Step 8. Immediately pour the hot jam into jars and place the lids on. Cool completely at room temperature then store in the refrigerator or freezer.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do the peaches have to be peeled?

    Contrary to what others might suggest, I say yes they do. See my post on All About Peaches, for the quickest way to do this.

    Are jam and preserves the same thing?

    The main difference is that the pieces of fruit are smaller in jam than preserves. You can generally see large pieces of fruit in preserves but not jams.

    How long does refrigerator jam last?

    It should be eaten within 3 to 4 months. It can also be frozen and thawed in the refrigerator for later use.

    Can jam be overcooked?

    It sure can if cooked too long. Test it using the cold plate method as it thickens.

    How should this jam be stored?

    After the jam has been bottled and come to room temperature, store it in the refrigerator up to months. It can also be frozen in freezer proof containers for up to a year. Thaw and store in the refrigerator.

    Expert Tips

    • Peaches do not have a lot of pectin. For gelling purposes they have none. I have not added pectin to this recipe because I want it to be a soft set. Just make sure to use the frozen plate test to determine when it is done.
    • Use ripe, but not overly ripe fruit. It will yield the best taste and texture.
    • To skim the foam from the top of the preserves while cooking, use a slotted spoon to let the juice drip through and remove only the foam.
    • If freestone or cling-free peaches are available, buy those. The stone will come out much easier. Clingstone peaches refer to peaches where the flesh is attached to the pit. They are harder to separate. Unfortunately, they are rarely marked as such.
    A scone on a plate is sliced open and the jam is on one side with a plate of scones behind it and a container of jam beside the plate.

    More inviting Peach Recipes

    • Caramelized Peach Tart
      Caramelized Peach Tart with Brown Sugar Crumble
    • Peach Pecan Quick Bread
      Peach Pecan Quick Bread
    • Peach Soup
      Chilled Peach Soup
    • No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream
      No Churn Peach Swirl Ice Cream

    If you love this Peach Amaretto Jam or any other recipe on my website, please please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. I appreciate each of you being here!

    Peach Jam sits on a biscuit with a bowl of peaches and a container of jam behind it.

    Peach Amaretto Jam

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Peach Jam is the perfect recipe if you've never made jam before. This is a refrigerator or freezer jam that doesn't require canning with the large pot of boiling water and all that comes with it. 
    4.50 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Jam
    Cuisine American
    Servings 5 8 ounce jars
    Calories 533 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 3 pounds ripe peaches
    • 2 ¼ cup granulated sugar (450 grams)
    • ½ cup amaretto

    Instructions
     

    • If you absolutely have to substitute the amaretto, you can use ⅓ cup water and 1 teaspoon almond extract.  I have not done it, but it should get you close to the flavor of the amaretto.
    • Place several small, flat plates in the freezer.
    • Peel the peaches, pit them and and cut them into large pieces. Place them in the food processor and pulse until they are cut into little pieces. Do not puree them. For the easiest way to do this, please see my post, All About Peaches.
    • Place all the ingredients into a heavy dutch oven or heavy pot and bring to a boil, stirring frequently. This took about 10 minutes.
    • Skim the foam off the top. This is easiest to do with a slotted spoon, letting the juice run back into the pot.
    • Reduce the heat to medium and cook another 20 to 30 minutes until it is thick enough that a small amount placed on a frozen plate has very little liquid surrounding it and it stays separated when you draw your finger through it.
    • Fill the jars to about ½ inch from the top and put the lids on. Let cool to room temperature, then place in the refrigerator
      If freezing the jam. place them in freezer proof container.

    Notes

    1. Peach Swirl Ice Cream Peaches do not have a lot of pectin. For gelling purposes they have none. I have not added pectin to this recipe because I want it to be a soft set. Just make sure to use the frozen plate test to determine when it is done.
    2. Use ripe, but not overly ripe fruit. It will yield the best taste and texture.
    3. To skim the foam from the top of the preserves while cooking, use a slotted spoon to let the juice drip through and remove only the foam. 
    4. If freestone or cling-free peaches are available, buy those. The stone will come out much easier. Clingstone peaches refer to peaches where the flesh is attached to the pit. They are harder to separate. Unfortunately, they are rarely marked as such.
    5. After the jam has been bottled and come to room temperature, store it in the refrigerator up to months.
    6. It can also be frozen in freezer proof containers for up to a year. Thaw and store in the refrigerator.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 5jarsCalories: 533kcalCarbohydrates: 125gProtein: 3gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 0.1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.2gSodium: 38mgPotassium: 341mgFiber: 4gSugar: 120gVitamin A: 887IUVitamin C: 11mgCalcium: 12mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Best Two Step Banana Nut Bread

    Modified: Nov 13, 2025 · Published: Jul 11, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 20 Comments

    Slices of Banana Bread in a circle with strawberries in the middle on a blue and white plate.

    The hardest thing about the Best Two Step Banana Bread recipe is waiting for the bananas to fully ripen with brown specks on their yellow jackets. A processor or blender combines the wet ingredients and they are whisked together with the dry ingredients. Into the pan they go then into the oven. That's it for the best quick bread ever!

    This is the perfect baking project with kids or grandchildren!

    Slices of Banana Bread in a circle with strawberries in the middle on a blue and white plate.

    This Two Step Banana Bread is great as a quick gift to someone on your list or to yourself.  it is sure to be well received and appreciated.  It's also great to have tucked away in the freezer for those times you need to have a bit of something for drop in guests or you just want a treat.

    Quick breads are so easy and popular to make, here are a few more: Date Nut Bread, Traditional Irish Soda Bread, Strawberry Bread, and Peach Pecan Quick Bread. Another really easy quick bread type recipe is the Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins and the Cinnamon Filled Buttermilk Scones.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • It's basically two steps after measuring the ingredients. When it comes to baking it doesn't get much easier.
    • This is almost cake-like in texture and taste. It doesn't fall apart when cut and is packed with flavor.
    • It uses really basic ingredients and not many of those.
    • It can be eaten for breakfast, snacks, great with salads and as a treat anytime.
    • This only uses a few measuring ingredients, a bowl and a whisk to make.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the banana bread include buttermilk, cake flour, oil, walnuts, sugar, eggs, baking powder, baking soda, vanilla, and salt.

    BACK ROW: Buttermilk, cake flour, vegetable oil

    MIDDLE ROW: Walnuts, granulated sugar, eggs, bananas

    FRONT ROW: Salt, baking powder, vanilla extract, baking soda

    Buttermilk helps keep whatever it is used for moist longer.

    Cake Flour is used for tenderness and impart a cake like quality to the bread

    Vegetable oil is much better than butter, melted or creamed. It not only contributes to keeping the bread moist, it allow the full flavor of the bananas to shine through.

    Bananas should be speckled or even darker for the most flavor. Perfectly yellow bananas will not impart as much.

    Ripe bananas for Two Step Banana Bread

    Variations

    • Any nut can be substituted for the walnuts.
    • ½ cup chocolate chips can be added to the batter along with the nuts.
    • The rind of a small orange can be added.
    • ½ cup dried cherries, raisins or cranberries are a good addition.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions

    Step by Step Instructions

    The loaf pan is prepared by lining it with parchment paper and spray the paper and the pan

    Step 1. Prepare a 9x5" loaf pan by lining it with parchment paper and spraying the paper and the pan with a non-stick baking spray. Set aside.

    Pureed bananas in the processor.

    Step 2. Puree the bananas in the food processor or blender.

    The eggs, buttermilk, oil and vanilla are added to the processor bowl.

    Step 3. Add the eggs, buttermilk, oil and vanilla to the processor or blender.

    The wet ingredients are processed with the banana puree.

    Step 4. Process the ingredients with the banana puree.

    The four, baking soda, baking powder and salt are in a large bowl.

    Step 5. Whisk the flour, baking soda, baking powder and salt together in a large bowl.

    The wet ingredients are poured over the dry ingredients in the bowl.

    Step 6. Pour the wet ingredients over the dry ingredients and whisk together until smooth.

    The walnuts are added to the bowl with the batter.

    Step 7. Stir the walnuts into the batter.

    The batter is poured into a prepared pan.

    Step 8. Pour the batter into the prepared pan and bake as directed.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can the bananas be mashed with a fork?

    For this recipe, it is preferable to puree them for the best result. However, if neither is available, mash them with a fork until as pureed as possible.

    How do you get bananas ripe?

    Bananas are shipped very green. Produce sellers have special rooms kept at 70°F in which the bananas are kept until mostly yellow at which point they are edible.

    What happens if I use under ripe bananas?

    The bread won't have as much flavor as if really ripe bananas are used.

    Storage

    The bread will keep covered for 5 or so days at room temperature. For longer storage, freeze, wrap well and freeze for several months. Thaw unwrapped at room temperature.

    Expert Tips

    • Cake flour is preferred for this recipe as it adds tenderness and a cake like quality. However, all purpose flour can be used by removing ¼ cup and replacing it with cornstarch.
    • While buttermilk is best, use milk (either whole or 2%), remove 2 teaspoons and add 2 teaspoons vinegar or lemon juice. Let it sit while the rest of the ingredients are prepared so it can separate into curd and whey becoming thicker and emulating buttermilk.
    The loaf of baked banana bread sits on a cooling rack.

    More Ways to Enjoy Banana Recipes

    • The Banana Bread Bread Pudding sits in a white bowl covered with the bourbon pecan sauce on a yellow and white background.
      Banana Bread Bread Pudding
    • A slice of My Best Banana Cake Recipe sits on a white plate which is on a yellow gingham plate on a blue background.
      My Best Banana Cake Recipe
    • A lone Banana Split Cupcake with its vibrant pink strawberry buttercream and drizzled with chocolate sits on a pink rimmed plate.
      Banana Split Cupcakes
    • Banana Tart with Rum Pastry Cream
      Banana Caramel Tart with Rum Pastry Cream and Praline

    If you love this Two Step Easy Banana Bread or any other recipe on my website, please please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. I appreciate each of you being here!

    Slices of Banana Bread in a circle with strawberries in the middle on a blue and white plate.

    Best Two Step Banana Nut Bread

    Helen S. Fletcher
    The hardest thing about the Two Step Easy Banana Bread is waiting for the bananas to fully ripen with brown specks on on their yellow jackets. A processor or blender combines the wet ingredients and they are whisked together with the dry ingredients. Into the pan they go then into the oven. That's it!
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Quick Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 311 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup banana puree
    • ½ cup buttermilk
    • 2 large eggs
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • ⅔ cup canola or vegetable oil
    • 2 cups cake flour (250 grams)
    • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • ¾ teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup coarsely chopped walnuts

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line the bottom of a 9x5" loaf pan with parchment paper. Spray the paper and sides well with a non-stick baking release. Set aside.
    • Puree the bananas in a food processor or blender. Measure 1cup and return it to the processor or blender. Add the buttermilk, eggs, vanilla and oil. Process or blend until liquid.
    • In a medium size bowl, place the remaining ingrediets except the walnuts. Add the liqud ingredients and whisk to combine. Stir in the walnuts.
    • Pour into the prepared pan. Bake for 60 to 75 minutes until a tester come out clean.
    • Cool for about 15 minutes and turn the bread out onto a cooling rack.

    Notes

    Cake flour is preferred for this recipe as it adds tenderness and a cake like quality. However, all purpose flour can be used by removing ¼ cup and replacing it with cornstarch.
    While buttermilk is best, use milk (either whole or 2%), remove 2 teaspoons and add 2 teaspoons vinegar or lemon juice. Let it sit while the rest of the ingredients are prepared so it can separate into curd and whey becoming thicker and emulating buttermilk.
    Vegetable oil is much better than butter, melted or creamed. It not only contributes to keeping the bread moist, it allow the full flavor of the bananas to shine through.
    Bananas should be speckled or even darker for the most flavor. Perfectly yellow bananas will not impart as much.
    Any nut can be substituted for the walnuts.
    ½ cup chocolate chips can be added to the batter along with the nuts.
    The rind of a small orange can be added.
    ½ cup dried cherries, raisins or cranberries are a good addition.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 311kcalCarbohydrates: 36gProtein: 5gFat: 17gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 6gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 28mgSodium: 236mgPotassium: 112mgFiber: 1gSugar: 19gVitamin A: 65IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 39mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    SaveSave

    SaveSave

    Smoked Turkey Salad

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Jun 26, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 2 Comments

    The Smoked Turkey Salad is served in a lettuce cup on a green plate with a fork.

    As much as I love cooking, the summer months of high 90's have me looking for easy options to feed us. This Smoked Turkey Salad, which came from my take out shop, fills that need. A few easy to get ingredients with the star being the smoked turkey are easily assembled into this winner of an entree salad.

    Serve it with cold fresh cantaloupe or watermelon and a piece of good bread and dinner is ready!

    The Smoked Turkey Salad is served in a lettuce cup on a green plate with a fork.

    Lacking a home smoker, I visit my local barbecue/smokehouse and buy the smoked turkey from them. It's so much better than deli turkey which is usually pumped with water.

    A couple of other things to enhance the salad are toasting the pecans and soaking the dried cherries to plump them. I used to make this with the Hot Peppered Pecans we sold at the shop but simplified it by skipping that step and adding cayenne.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What makes this salad so special

    • The first thing is the smoked turkey. It adds a distinct flavor that roasted turkey doesn't, although I wouldn't turn down roasted turkey if that's all I could get.
    • Bleu cheese brings a distinct taste to counter the sweetness of the turkey and cherries.
    • Celery brings its crunch to the party.
    • Either apples or dried cherries can be used for the sweetness they impart. If using apples, add them at the last minute as they have a tendency to turn brown. I have found that Gala or Pink Ladies don't brown as quickly. If using the dried bing cherries, soak them first to bring out all of their flavor.
    • Cayenne gives this salad a kick that rounds everything out and makes this so special.

    Recipe Ingredients

    The ingredients are blue cheese, smoked turkey, pecans, dried cherries, celery, mayonnaise, worcestershire sauce. cayenne and salt.

    BACK ROW: Bleu Cheese, smoked turkey, pecans

    MIDDLE ROW: Dried cherries, mayonnaise, celery

    FRONT ROW: Worcestershire sauce, cayenne pepper, salt

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Special Note about the Turkey

    However, you buy your smoked turkey, have it sliced about ½" thick so it can be cubed into about ½ " squares.

    Pecans to be toasted on a tray.

    Step 1. Place the pecans on a tray and toast for 7 to 9 minutes until fragrant and slightly browner. If using smaller pieces, reduce the time. Cool and chop. Set aside.

    The dried bing cherries are cut with scissors.

    Step 2. Cut the dried cherries in half. It is easiest to do this with scissors.

    Cut cherries soaking in hot water.

    Step 3. Cover the cherries with really hot water and let them soak until they soften. Squeeze the water out of them before adding to the other ingredients.

    The celery, bleu cheese, toasted pecans, cherries and smoked turkey in a bowl.

    Step 4. Place the celery, bleu cheese, toasted pecans, cherries and turkey in a large bowl.

    The dressing ingredients, mayonnaise, worchestershire sauce and cayenne in a small bowl.

    Step 5. Place the mayonnaise, worcestershire sauce and cayenne in a bowl.

    The dressing ingredients are whisked together.

    Step 6. Whisk the dressing ingredients together.

    The dressing has been mixed with the rest of the ingredients in the bowl.

    Step 7. Add the dressing to the bowl and mix everything together. Chill, preferably overnight.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long do mayonnaise based salad dressings last?

    According to FoodSafety.gov, if it has been properly stored, it is safe to eat the salad within four days. 1 This rule also applies to similar mayonnaise-based salads like chicken, tuna, ham, and macaroni salads.Feb 17, 2023


    Can turkey salad be frozen?

    This one cannot. It needs to be eaten within 4 days

    Can another cheese be used?

    Yes, but it will alter the taste. Any cheese can be used.

    Expert tips

    • Dried cherries are difficult to cut with a knife. Scissors work well here.
    • For the easiest way to chop the nuts after roasting and cooling see my post Chopping Nuts - An Easier Way
    • If you're a bread baker, save the water in which the cherries soaked. It is great to use as the liquid or part of the liquid in a rye or whole wheat bread. If it won't be used in a couple of days, freeze it. Thaw to use.
    • If you're not storing your celery this way, you should be.
    Down shot of turkey salad on a plate with a fork.

    More Simply Delicious Salads

    • Greek Tomato Salad with tomatoes, feta, basil, red onion, calamata olives
      Greek Tomato Salad
    • This Mayfair Salad Dressing features, lettuce, swiss cheese and ham strips, croutons and Mayfair dressing.
      Mayfair Salad Dressing - Better than Caesar
    • Strawberry salad with basil vinaigrette.
      Strawberry Salad with Basil Vinaigrette
    • Black bean salad with black beans, corn, red peppers, green chiles in a vinagrette.
      Simple Black Bean Salad

    If you love this Smoked Turkey Salad or any other recipe on my website, please please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the 📝 comments below. I love hearing from you!

    The Smoked Turkey Salad is served in a lettuce cup on a green plate with a fork.

    Smoked Turkey Salad

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This quickly made Smoked Turkey Salad, came from my take out shop. A few easy to get ingredients with the star being the smoked turkey are easily assembled into this winner of an entree salad.
    Serve it with cold fresh cantaloupe or watermelon and a piece of good bread and dinner is ready!
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 518 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Smoked Turkey Salay

    • 4 ounces pecans (114 grams)
    • ⅔ cup dried cherries
    • ⅔ cup celery, cut
    • 1 pound smoked turkey (454 grams)
    • 4 ounces bleu cheese, (114 grams)

    Salad Dressing

    • ¾ cup mayonnaise
    • 1 teaspoon worcestershire sauce
    • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper or to taste
    • ½ teaspoon salt

    Instructions
     

    Smoked Turkey Salad

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Place the pecans on a baking sheet in a single layer and toast for 7 to 9 minutes until fragrant and slightly darker. Cool completely. Chop coarsely. See my post, Chopping Nuts, A Quicker Way. Set aside.
    • Cut the dried cherries in half. Pour really hot water over them and let the soak until softened. Squeeze the water out of them.
    • Cube the turkey in about ½" square pieces.
    • Combine the turkey, cherries, celery, bleu cheese, and pecans together. Mix well.

    Salad Dressing

    • Whisk together the mayonnaise, worcestershire sauce and cayenne pepper in a small bowl. Add it to salad ingredients and mix well.
    • Taste for salt and cayenne. I have found mayonnaise and smoked turkey to be very salty so often don't add any additional. If a zippier version is preferred, add cayenne to taste.
    • This is best made the day before so all of the flavors can meld.

    Notes

    Apples can be substituted for the cherries.  Refrigerate the salad without the apples overnight.  Add the apples just before serving so they don't turn brown.  I have found Gala or Pink Ladies don't brown as quickly.
    Dried fruit is difficult to cut with a knife.  Using scissors makes it easy.
    If you're a bread baker, be sure to save the water the cherries were soaked in to use as the liquid or part of the liquid for rye, whole wheat or multi grain bread.  Freeze if not using in a few days.  Thaw in the refrigerator to use. 
    It's easier to toast pecan halves and chop them.  If chopped nuts are used, reduce the toasting time.  
    This salad should be consumed in 4 days or less.
    Be sure to check out the Storing Celery post to make sure you're getting the most out of your celery.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 6servingsCalories: 518kcalCarbohydrates: 14gProtein: 24gFat: 41gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 17gMonounsaturated Fat: 14gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 77mgSodium: 702mgPotassium: 348mgFiber: 3gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 760IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 142mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Storing Celery

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Jun 25, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    4 pieces of celery with celery leaves on a plate.

    I'm not sure where heard or found this technique but I can tell you it really works. In the past, I found my celery would often go bad because I didn't use it fast enough.

    With this method, it will stay crisp and fresh for a month in the refrigerator. Even better it takes only two steps.

    4 pieces of celery with celery leaves on a plate.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Celery, with its top and bottom cut off lays on a large piece of foil.

    Step 1. Cut the top and bottom off the celery. Do not wash it until you use it. Place it on a large piece of foil.

    The celery has been wrapped tightly in foil.

    Step 2. Wrap the celery tightly in foil and store in the vegetable crisper of refrigerator.

    That's it. Enjoy your celery!

    Other Techniques You Might Find Helpful

    • Large nut pieces for Chopping Nuts
      Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way
    • Rows of lemon curd tartlet petit fours.
      How to Make Lemon Curd
    • Vanilla beans resting on the bottle from which they came.
      The Making of Vanilla
    • Swirls of Pastry Cream on an Orange Tart.
      Pastry Cream Filling (Crème Pâtissière)

    Love this recipe or any other on my site? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card & consider leaving a review in the comments further down.   Star ratings help people discover my recipes online. Thanks for reading.

    Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Jun 16, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 18 Comments

    Lemonade Cake with blueberry sauce on a green plate wiht a yellow napkin.

    You won't want to miss this Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce, cool as a cucumber and just perfect for summer. When I taught this, everyone loved the clean cut of this cake with the deep purple sauce running down the pale yellow sides.

    A tart lemon curd is tempered with whipped cream and a meringue and poured over a vanilla wafer crust. And that blueberry sauce is one you will make over and over to serve with pancakes and waffles as well as over ice cream. As I said, just made for summer!!

    Lemonade Cake with blueberry sauce on a green plate wiht a yellow napkin.

    While it does have several component parts they can be made ahead and the cake just assembled. Or, the entire cake can be made ahead and frozen.

    Be sure to check out some of the other desserts with lemon and/or blueberries: Blueberry Poke Cake, Blueberry Pizza in a Brioche Crust (the 60 Second Brioche) or the Lemon Meringue Cake which is not to be missed.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • It tastes incredible. The sweet-tart mousse served with the whole blueberry sauce is a classic combination for anytime and anything.
    • Uses basic ingredients available in any grocery store
    • It can be made ahead and frozen. Perfect when time is not your friend.
    • Elegantly simple yet boldly flavored.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Vanilla wafers in a bowl and melted butter for the crust of the Lemonade Cake.

    Vanilla Wafers and melted butter

    Lemon Curd

    Ingredients for the Lemon Curd are egg yolks, whole eggs,lemon juice, sugar,butter, gelatin and water.

    BACK ROW: Egg yolks, whole eggs, lemon juice

    MIDDLE ROW: Unsalted butter

    FRONT ROW: Granulated sugar, gelatin, water

    Lemon Mousse

    The lemon mousse ingredients include lemon curd, egg whites, granulated sugar and cream.

    Clockwise: Egg whites, lemon curd, heavy cream, granulated sugar

    Blueberry Sauce

    For the blueberry sauce there is blueberries, sugar, cornstarch, water, lemon juice.

    Clockwise: Blueberries, granulated sugar, cornstarch, water, lemon juice

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Lemon Curd

    Using the ingredients listed below, prepare the lemon curd as pictured in the How to Make Lemon Curd.

    It is important to make the curd and let it cool until just barely cool at room temperature. If it gets too set, just put it in the microwave for 10 to 15 seconds at a time until it is still thick and cool but will blend well with the meringue and whipped cream.

    Crumb Crust

    The vanilla wafers are in the bowl of a food processor,

    Step 1. Place the vanilla wafers in the bowl of a processor.

    The cookies have been processed into crumbs and placed in a bowl.

    Step 2. Process the crumbs until fine and place in a medium size bowl.

    The melted butter is added to the crumbs.

    Step 3. Add the butter to the crumbs, mixing so the crumbs are evenly buttered. Pour into the prepared pan.

    The crumb crust has been evenly and firmly patted into the bottom of the pan.

    Step 4. Pat the crumbs evenly and firmly into the bottom of the pan. Set aside.

    Lemon Mousse Filling

    Cream whipped to medium peaks in a mixing bowl.

    Step 1. Whip the cream to medium peaks. Remove it from the bowl and set it aside.

    The egg whites are whipped to just before adding the sugar.

    Step 2. In a clean mixing bowl, whip the whites until they leave tracks from the beater.

    The sugar is being added slowly to the beating egg whites in the mixing bowl.

    Step 3. Slowly add the sugar to the beating egg whites. Wait about 10 seconds before adding the next addition.

    The meringue is added to the lemon curd.

    Step 4. Add the meringue into the lemon curd and fold in. It doesn't have to be folded in completely.

    The reserved whipped cream is folded in after the meringue.

    Step 5. The reserved whipped cream is added to the lemon curd mixture and everything is folded together completely.

    The filling is poured over the crust.

    Step 6. Pour the filling over the crust in the pan.

    The filling is being smoothed out using a small offset spatula.

    Step 7. Smooth the filling our with an offset spatula.

    The filling is smoothed out before putting it in the refrigerator to set up.

    Step 8. Place the cake in the refrigerator to firm up.

    Releasing the Cake

    A blow dryer is held close to the pan to heat the mousse so it can be released smoothly from the pan.

    Step 1. Place a hair blower on high about ½ inch from the side of the pan. Go around the side briefly. You just want to loosen the mousse.

    The pan with the cake is place on a wide can.

    Step 2. Place the cake on a wide can.

    The side of the can slides down to reveal the cake.

    Step 3. Slide the rim of the cheesecake pan down.

    The cake is placed on a cake board.

    Step 4. Place the cake on a cake board or serving plate by placing a metal spatula between the bottom of the crust and the bottom of the pan. Go around the bottom and move with two spatulas.

    Blueberry Sauce

    The sugar and cornstarch are in a saucepan.

    Step 1. Place the sugar and cornstarch in a medium size pan.

    Whisk the sugar and cornstarch together.

    Step 2. Whisk the two together.

    The water has been whisked in to start dissolving the sugar and cornstarch.

    Step 3. Whisk in the water and lemon juice to start dissolving the sugar and cornsyrup.

    Add the blueberries to the pan.

    Step 4. Add the blueberries to the pan.

    The sauce has been cooked over medium heat until thickened.

    Step 5. Cook the sauce over medium heat, stirring constantly, until it comes to a boil. Cook for 2 minutes more. Remove from the heat and cool. Transfer to a bowl to cool.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the difference between cultivated and wild blueberries?

    Cultivated blueberries are fairly uniform in their size, color and taste. Wild blueberries are generally much smaller in size than cultivated. They also vary in color from different shades of blue to almost black. Taste varies from very sweet to not-so-sweet.

    What does "bloom the gelatin"mean?

    Gelatin, whether it is in granulated or sheet form must be soaked in cold water to soften it. If using granulated gelatin, it must be liquified after blooming by heating it over a water bath or in the microwave before being introduced into other ingredients.

    What is the difference between a cheesecake and springform pan.

    The cheesecake pan is a solid rim with a loose bottom. The springform pan has a loose bottom and a rim that opens and closes with a latch or buckle. For more information on the two, see my post on Bailey's Cheesecake.

    Storage

    This cake should be kept in the refrigerator and keeps well for several days. It can also be made and frozen, then well wrapped and stored for several months. The blueberry sauce can be made up to 5 days ahead.

    Expert Tips

    • If you are queasy about using raw egg whites, put the whites and sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Place the mixer bowl over (not in) a saucepan of simmering (not boiling) water. Beat or whisk continuously with a hand held mixer or whisk. Heat to 160°F or 70°C which should take between 3 ½ minutes. Place on the mixer and continue to beat until a meringue forms as described in the recipe.
    • Either fresh or frozen blueberries can be used. If using frozen berries, do not thaw them first.
    • When using cornstarch, it is important to either dissolve it in a small amount of water or mix it with the sugar in the recipe before adding the water. If it is not dissolved first, it will become lumpy and not thicken.
    • Heavy cream with a 36 % butterfat content whips up thicker than whipping cream with less butterfat and is recommended for the best results.
    • Straining the eggs and yolk mixture in the beginning removes the chalazae which is the hard, stringy egg white that suspends the yolk in the middle of the white.   If it is not strained out, it cooks up hard and ruins the smoothness of the Lemon Curd.  It is also much easier to do it in the beginning and not at the end when it has thickened.
    A slice of Lemonade Cake on a white plate
with green behind it.

    Other Delicious Desserts for your Enjoyment

    • Finished Photo
      Tri-Chocolate Pate
    • Chocolate Strawberry Mousse Cake for Exceptional Mother's Day Cakes
      Exceptional Mother's Day Cakes
    • A Quick and Easy Summer Tea Cake
    • Double Chocolate Mousse Cake
      Double Chocolate Mousse Cake

    If you love this Lemonade Cake or any other recipe on my website, please please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. I love hearing from you!

    Lemonade Cake with blueberry sauce on a green plate wiht a yellow napkin.

    Lemonade Cake with Blueberry Sauce

    Helen S. Fletcher
    A tart lemon curd is tempered with whipped cream and a meringue and poured over a vanilla wafer crust. And that blueberry sauce is one you will make over and over to serve with pancakes and waffles as well as over ice cream.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Chilling time 6 hours hrs
    Total Time 7 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 14 servings
    Calories 234 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9x3 cheesecake or springform pan
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Lemon Curd

    • 1 tablespoon water
    • 1 ½ teaspoons gelatin
    • 2 large eggs
    • 3 large egg yolks
    • ½ cup granulated sugar (100 grams or 3 ½ ounces)
    • ½ cup lemon juice, freshly squeezed
    • ½ cup unsalted butter cold, cut into 6 pieces (114grams or 1 stick)

    Vanilla Wafer Crust

    • 1 ¼ cups vanilla wafer crumbs (about 40, 140 grams or 5 ounces)
    • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter, (58 grams or 2 ounces)

    Lemon Mousse

    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • 2 egg whites (leftover from above)
    • ¼ cup sugar (50 grams or 1 ¾ ounces)
    • Lemon Curd

    Blueberry Sauce

    • ⅓ cup granulated sugar (65 grams or 2 ¼ ounces)
    • 1 teaspoon cornstarch
    • 3 tablespoons water
    • 1 teaspoon lemon juice or balsamic vinegar
    • 2 ½ cups fresh or frozen blueberries (12 ounce bag)

    Instructions
     

    Lemon Curd

    • Soften the gelatin in the water. Set aside.
    • Place the eggs and yolks in bowl. Whisk to combine.
    • Whisk in the sugar and the lemon juice. Strain the mixture into the top of a boiler. Add the butter and place over gently boiling water.
    • Stirring constantly, bring the curd to 172°F on a thermometer.
    • The gelatin will have formed a wiggly blob at this point. Tear it into small pieces and add it directly to the hot curd. Whisk to dissolve it into the curd.
    • Cover the surface directly with plastic wrap. Cool to use.
    • If made ahead, microwave briefly to bring it to room temperature when ready to use.

    Vanilla Wafer Crust

    • Process the wafers into crumbs either using a food processor or putting them in a plastic bag and crushing them with a rolling pin.
    • Add the butter and mix with a fork.
    • Press them evenly into the bottom of 9x3" cheesecake pan or springform mold. Set aside.

    Lemon Mousse

    • Beat the cream to medium peaks. Remove from the bowl and set aside.
    • In a clean mixing bowl, whip the whites until the whisk leaves marks in them.
    • Slowly add the sugar and beat to medium peaks. Fold into the lemon curd.
    • Fold in the reserved cream. Pour it into the crust and chill 6 hours or overnight to firm up.

    Blueberry Sauce

    • Whisk the sugar and cornstarch together in a medium saucepan.
    • Whisk in the water.
    • Add the blueberries and cook over medium heat, stirring constantly until the mixture comes to a boil. It will have thickened. Continue cooking and stirring for 2 minutes.
    • Transfer to a bowl and cover directly with plastic wrap. Cool to room temperature. Store in the refrigerator if not using immediately.

    Notes

    If you are queasy about using raw egg whites, put the whites and sugar in the bowl of a mixer. Place the mixer bowl over (not in) a saucepan of simmering (not boiling) water. Beat or whisk continuously with a hand held mixer or whisk. Heat to 160°F or 70°C which should take between 3 ½ minutes. Place on the mixer and continue to beat until a meringue forms as described in the recipe. 
    Either fresh or frozen blueberries can be used. If using frozen berries, do not thaw them first.
    When using cornstarch, it is important to either dissolve it in a small amount of water or mix it with the sugar in the recipe before adding the water. If it is not dissolved first, it will become lumpy and not thicken.
    Heavy cream with a 36 % butterfat content whips up thicker than whipping cream with less butterfat and is recommended for the best results. 
    Straining the eggs and yolk mixture in the beginning removes the chalazae which is the hard, stringy egg white that suspends the yolk in the middle of the white.   If it is not strained out, it cooks up hard and ruins the smoothness of the Lemon Curd.  It is also much easier to do it in the beginning and not at the end when it has thickened. 
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 14servingsCalories: 234kcalCarbohydrates: 28gProtein: 3gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 93mgSodium: 64mgPotassium: 75mgFiber: 1gSugar: 22gVitamin A: 454IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 24mgIron: 0.3mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    SaveSave

    Simple Black Bean Salad

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Jun 4, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 8 Comments

    Black bean salad with black beans, corn, red peppers, green chiles in a vinagrette.

    This Simple Black Bean Salad was one of the favorites at our take out shop. It can be put together in less than 30 minutes and is high in protein and low in fat.  This salad is good cold or room temperature making it perfect for a picnic or anywhere refrigeration isn’t to be had and is great with anything barbecued.

    Black bean salad with black beans, corn, red peppers, green chiles in a vinagrette.

    All this takes is a can opener, a large bowl and a few measuring utensils. Make this a few hours ahead and you're ready to go.

    Black beans are a favorite of mine, be it in chili or salads such as the Southwestern Vegetable Couscous Salad or the Black Bean Chili.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • It's super fast to make and literally foolproof.
    • This salad uses basic ingredients easily available in any market.
    • It's packed with flavor that belies its ease of making.
    • A bowl, a whisk and a few measuring ingredients are all that's needed to make this. Quick, easy, simple and delicious - it doesn't get much better than that!
    • It's perfect to take along for any meal and you're sure to be asked for the recipe.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for the Black Bean Salad include black beans, red peppers, green onions, green chiles, and corn in an oil and vinegar dressing.

    Ingredients read left to right.

    BACK ROW: Black Beans, pimentos, vegetable oil

    MIDDLE ROW: Green onions, green chiles, corn

    FRONT ROW: Salt, red pepper flakes, red wine vinegar, sugar

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredient list and instructions.

    Substitutions

    If desired, diced red peppers and fresh corn can be substituted for the jarred or canned variety.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The vinegar, oil and red pepper flakes in a measuring cup.

    Step 1. To make the dressing, place the oil, vinegar and red pepper flakes in a small container. I just use the cup I measured them in.

    The dressing ingredients are whisked together.

    Step 2. Whisk the dressing ingredients together. Set aside.

    All the ingredients are combined in a bowl and the dressing poured over.

    Step 3. Drain the beans and rinse them until the water runs clear. Drain the corn, and pimentos very well. Place them in a bowl along with the beans, chopped green onions and green chiles. Pour the dressing over them; mix well. Refrigerate for several hours or up to a week.

    Recipe FAQs

    Are canned black beans cooked?

    Yes they are. Simply drain them and rinse until the water runs clear.

    Are canned ingredients as good as fresh?

    It depends upon the ingredient, how it is to be used and how quickly you want to make the recipe. While many canned goods are overcooked or otherwise undesirable, many are not including beans, red peppers or pimetos, green chiles and corn.

    Can I use fresh ingredients?

    Of course. It will just take longer.

    Expert Tips

    • Make sure to rinse the beans well.
    • Drain the corn and pimentos or jarred red peppers really well.
    • Let the items to be drained sit in a strainer for a bit, shaking them gently from time to time to make sure they are dry. Otherwise, the water will weaken the dressing.
    • When mixing the ingredients, toss gently so the beans don't break up.
    The finished black bean salad in a white bowl.

    More Salads Sure to Please

    • Greek Tomato Salad with tomatoes, feta, basil, red onion, calamata olives
      A Trio of Super Simple Side Salads
    • This Mayfair Salad Dressing features, lettuce, swiss cheese and ham strips, croutons and Mayfair dressing.
      Mayfair Salad Dressing - Better than Caesar
    • Strawberry salad with basil vinaigrette.
      Strawberry Salad with Basil Vinaigrette
    • Southwestern Vegetable Couscous Salad on an orange plate.
      Southwestern Vegetable Couscous Salad

    If you tried this Simple Black Bean Salad recipe or any other recipe on my website, please please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went in the 📝 comments below. I love hearing from you!

    Black bean salad with black beans, corn, red peppers, green chiles in a vinagrette.

    Simple Black Bean Salad

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Black Bean Salad can be put together in less than 30 minutes and is high in protein and low in fat.  It’s perfect for a picnic or anywhere refrigeration isn’t to be had and is great with anything barbecued.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 169 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 2 - 15 oz. cans black beans
    • 1 - 10 oz. can corn or 6 ounces fresh or frozen corn
    • 1 - 4 ounce can chopped green chiles
    • 1 - 7 oz. jar pimentos, fresh or roasted red peppers
    • ½ cup green onion tops only
    • 1 tablespoon chopped cilantro, optional
    • 1 teaspoon sugar
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup vegetable or canola oil
    • ¼ cup red wine vinegar
    • 1 teaspoon red pepper flakes or to taste

    Instructions
     

    • Drain the black beans and rinse under cold water until the water runs clear.
    • Drain the canned corn and pimentos.
    • Chop the green tops of the green onions.
    • Place the beans, corn, pimentos, green onions and green chiles in a large bowl. Sprinkle the with the salt and sugar.
    • Combine the oil, vinegar, and red pepper flakes. Whisk to combine completely. Pour over the salad ingredients and gently toss. Refrigerate for a few hours or up to a week.

    Notes

      • It's super fast to make and literally foolproof.
      • This salad uses basic ingredients easily available in any market.
      • It's packed with flavor that belies its ease of making.A bowl, a whisk and a few measuring ingredients are all that's needed to make this. Quick, easy, simple and delicious - it doesn't get much better than that!
      • It's perfect to take along for any meal and you're sure to be asked for the recipe.
      • Make sure to rinse the beans well.
      • Drain the corn and pimentos or jarred red peppers really well.
      • Let the items to be drained sit in a strainer for a bit, shaking them gently from time to time to make sure they are dry. Otherwise, the water will weaken the dressing. When mixing the ingredients, toss gently so the beans don't break up.
    •  
    •  
    •  

    Nutrition

    Serving: 6servingsCalories: 169kcalCarbohydrates: 2gProtein: 0.2gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 10gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.1gSodium: 398mgPotassium: 36mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 188IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 8mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Southwestern Vegetable Couscous Salad

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: May 26, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

    Southwestern Vegetable Couscous Salad on an orange plate.
    Southwestern Vegetable Couscous Salad on an orange plate.

    Southwestern Roasted Vegetable Couscous summer side is super easy, super tasty and the vibrant colors want to make you dive right in.  Serve it with a grilled or roasted chicken breast or salmon fillet for a complete meal.  Toasting the couscous first insures it will not clump together when it’s finished.  It’s easily done while you cut up the veggies.

    While often thought of as a grain, couscous is actually made of semolina or barley and water and is considered a pasta.

    Types of Couscous

    There are three types of couscous.

    • Moroccan couscous is the smallest—about the size of semolina—and cooks in minutes.
    • Israeli couscous, also called pearl couscous, is larger and resembles tiny pieces of pasta. It takes about 10 minutes to cook.
    • Lebanese couscous, also called Moghrabieh couscous, is larger than Israeli couscous and takes the longest to cook.

    This salad can be made ahead and lasts for days in the refrigerator.

    1 cup uncooked couscous
    ¼ cup water
    1 cup chicken stock
    1 cup diced red pepper
    1 cup sliced mushrooms
    ½ cup diced carrots
    1  - 11 ounce can whole kernel corn drained well ( I use Niblets brand)
    1 teaspoon minced garlic
    1 teaspoon chili powder
    ½ teaspoon salt
    ½ teaspoon black pepper
    ¼ teaspoon cumin
    1 tablespoon vegetable oil
    1 – 15 ounce can black beans, rinsed and drained
    ⅓ cup chopped green onions, green part only

    Preheat the oven to 425 degrees.

    Unbaked couscous for Two Fantastic Easy Summer Sides
    Toasted couscous

    Place the couscous in a rimmed baking pan and shake it to even it out to one layer. Bake for 4 to 5 minutes until lightly browned.  The edges will most likely be browner than the middle.  Stir the couscous, shake it again and let it brown for several minutes until it is more uniformly colored.

    Cooked Couscous

    Bring the water and broth to a boil in a small saucepan.  Gradually stir in the couscous.  Remove from the heat, cover and let sit for 5 minutes.  Remove the lid and fluff with a fork; set aside.

    Vegetables for Two Fantasic Easy Summer Sides

    In the meantime, cut the veggies and place the red pepper, mushrooms, carrots, corn, and garlic in a bowl.  In a small bowl, combine the chili powder, salt, black pepper, and cumin.  Sprinkle over the veggies and stir well.  Add the vegetable oil and stir to coat the vegetables.  Line a rimmed baking sheet with foil and spray.  Pour the vegetables into the pan and shake to distribute evenly in a single layer. Bake for 10 to 12 minutes until nicely roasted.

    Combine the couscous with the roasted vegetables and beans.  Serve with the onions sprinkled on top.

    This summer side can be served hot or warm or room temperature.

    Yields:  4 servings.

    Other recipes to brighten your summer:

    Summer Vegetable Tart
    Mayfair Salad Dressing - Better than Caeser

    Strawberry Bread

    Modified: May 16, 2023 · Published: May 16, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 20 Comments

    Slices of Strawberry Bread on a lattice plate.

    You don't want to miss this really fast Strawberry Bread which is permeated with fresh, ripe strawberries in every bite. This quick bread needs only a bowl, a whisk, and a few measuring utensils, this goes together in literally minutes.

    Slices of Strawberry Bread on a lattice plate.

    This, along with Snickers Brownies are perfect baking projects with children. Don't forget to look at the variations below for more quick breads that are equally easy.

    Here are a few to get you started: Traditional Irish Soda Bread, Date Nut Bread, Cheddar Pecan Date Bread, Best Two Step Banana Bread, Best of All Strawberry Muffins as well as the marvelous (Almost) No Bake Strawberry Pie and Blueberry Crumb Muffins.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Recipe Ingredients

    ingredients for the Strawberry Bread are flour, strawberries, oil, food coloring, eggs, sugar, baking powder, baking soda and salt.

    BACK ROW: Flour, strawberries, oil

    MIDDLE ROW: Red food coloring, egg + egg yolk, granulated sugar

    FRONT ROW: Baking soda, baking powder, salt

    Variations

    • For Banana Bread - Add 1 cup pureed bananas (about 2 large or 3 medium) and ½ cup coarsely chopped walnuts.  The riper the bananas, the better.
    • For Pumpkin Bread - To the flour mixture, add ½ teaspoon each of cinnamon, nutmeg and cloves. Add 1 cup canned pumpkin.
    • For Double Apple - To the flour mixture, add 1 teaspoon cinnamon and ½ teaspoon nutmeg.  Add 1 cup unsweetened apple sauce and ¾ cup shredded apple (from 1 medium granny smith apple)

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The fresh strawberries are placed in the processor.

    Step 1. Place the strawberries in the food processor or blender.

    The strawberries are pureed in the food processor.

    Step 2. Puree the strawberries until smooth.

    The oil and sugar are combined in a medium size bowl.

    Step 3. Combine the oil and the sugar in a medium size bowl.

    The oil and sugar are whisked together.

    Step 4. Whisk together.

    The egg and yolk are added to the oil mixture

    Step 5. Whisk in the egg and the yolk.

    The strawberry puree has been added to the bowl.

    Step 6. Add the strawberry puree to the bowl and whisk in.

    Combine the flour, baking soda, baking powder, and salt.

    Step 7. Combine the flour, baking soda, baking powder, and salt. Whisk to mix.

    The flour mixture is added to the wet ingredients in the bowl.

    Step 8. Add the flour to the wet ingredients.

    The flour has been whisked in.

    Step 9. Whisk the flour in until completely combined. The batter at this point will seem a little insipid looking.

    Red food coloring is added to the batter to pick up the color.

    Step 10. To correct this, red food coloring can be added to perk it up.

    The strawberry bread batter has been poured into a loaf pan.

    Step 11. Pour the batter into the prepared pan and bake as instructed.

    Recipe FAQ's

    Why is called quick bread?

    Quick breads are faster and easier to make that yeast raised breads because they depend upon baking powder and baking soda to rise. They are often mixed in one bowl and baked immediately.

    What are some other types of quick breads?

    Muffins, biscuits, scones, cornbread, tortillas, and popovers.

    Can quick bread recipes wait to be baked?

    No. You want to get them into the oven as soon as they are smoothed in the pan. Baking powders being sold are double acting which means that they half of the leavening starts acting as soon as it is mixed with liquid, the remainder is activated by heat. For the best texture and height, have the oven preheated and pop them in as soon as they are in the pans.

    Expert Tips

    • Don't over beat the batter if using a mixer. This can toughen the gluten making a less tender bread.
    • Using a whisk eliminates this problem.
    • Make sure the oven is preheated so the bread can go in without waiting.
    • If the baking powder or baking soda is old you can test it.
    • Baking soda: Add ¼ teaspoon white or cider vinegar to ½ cup hot water. It should fizz or bubble if it's good. If not, replace it.
    • Baking powder: Pour ¼ cup really hot tap water over ½ teaspoon of baking powder If is fizzes a lot or bubbles, it is good. Otherwise, it's time to replace it.
    • Quick breads often take a bit to bake. If the top starts browning too much, tent it lightly with foil.
    The baked loaf of Strawberry Bread.

    Other Quick Breads to Love

    • Slices of Date Nut Bread on a plate with walnut halves and dates around it.
      Date Nut Bread
    • Slices of Banana Bread in a circle with strawberries in the middle on a blue and white plate.
      Best Two Step Banana Nut Bread
    • Scone with Cranberry Strawberry Jam on a plate
      Scones with Cranberry Strawberry Jam

    Love this recipe or any other on my site? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card & consider leaving a review in the comments further down, thanks!  Star ratings help people discover my recipes online. Your support means a great deal to me

    Slices of Strawberry Bread on a lattice plate.

    Strawberry Bread

    Helen S. Fletcher
    You don't want to miss this really fast Strawberry Bread which is permeated with fresh, ripe strawberries in every bite. This is a quick bread that needs only a bowl, a whisk, and a few measuring utensils, this goes together in literally minutes.
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 54 minutes mins
    Cooling Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 24 minutes mins
    Course Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 264 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup strawberry puree, from about 8 ounces fresh or frozen strawberries
    • 1 cup granulated sugar (200 grams or 7 ounces)
    • ½ cup canola or vegetable oil
    • 1 egg
    • 1 egg yolk
    • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour (210 grams or 7 ⅓ ounces)
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ¼ teaspoon baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • Red food coloring as needed, optional

    Instructions
     

    • Preheat the oven to 325°F. Line the bottom of a 9x5" loaf pan with parchment and spray the entire pan with a non-stick baking spray. Set aside.
    • Puree the strawberries in a food processor or blender. If using frozen strawberries, do not defrost them. They will be rather slushy and that is how they should be.
    • Whisk the oil and sugar in a medium size bowl until combined. Add the egg and yolk, whisking well. Whisk in the strawberry puree.
    • Combine the flour, baking soda, baking powder and salt. Add to the liquid and whisk to mix compeltely.
    • If using, add food color remembering to make it a bit darker than desired as it will lighten when baked.
    • Pour the batter into the prepared pan, smooth it out and bake for 40 to 50 minutes until a tester comes out clean. If the top browns too quickly, lightly tent it with foil.
    • Cool 10 to 15 minutes before turning it out onto a rack to cool completely.

    Notes

    • For Banana Bread - Add 1 cup pureed bananas (about 2 large or 3 medium) and ½ cup coarsely chopped walnuts.  The riper the bananas, the better.
    • For Pumpkin Bread - To the flour mixture, add ½ teaspoon each of cinnamon, nutmeg and cloves. Add 1 cup canned pumpkin.
    • For Double Apple - To the flour mixture, add 1 teaspoon cinnamon and ½ teaspoon nutmeg.  Add 1 cup unsweetened apple sauce and ¾ cup shredded apple (from 1 medium granny smith apple)
    • Don't over beat the batter if using a mixer. This can toughen the gluten making a less tender bread.
    • Using a whisk eliminates this problem.
    • Make sure the oven is preheated so the bread can go in without waiting.
    • If the baking powder or baking soda is old you can test it.
    • Baking soda: Add ¼ teaspoon white or cider vinegar to ½ cup hot water. It should fizz or bubble if it's good. If not, replace it.
    • Baking powder: Pour ¼ cup really hot tap water over ½ teaspoon of baking powder If is fizzes a lot or bubbles, it is good. Otherwise, it's time to replace it.
    • Quick breads often take a bit to bake. If the top starts browning too much, tent it lightly with foil.
    • The bread can be stored at room temperature for several days.  It can also be frozen, well wrapped, for several months.  Thaw at room temperature.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 264kcalCarbohydrates: 36gProtein: 3gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.05gCholesterol: 36mgSodium: 131mgPotassium: 64mgFiber: 1gSugar: 21gVitamin A: 53IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 17mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Strawberry Balsamic Jam

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Apr 11, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 16 Comments

    Strawberry Balsamic Jam in a yellow container

    I originally used this easy to make Strawberry Balsamic Jam as a part of a marinated grilled chicken breast over greens with fresh strawberries at the take out shop. The jam in a snap to make and there is no need to worry about canning it. Just pop it in the refrigerator where it will stay for months.

    Strawberry Balsamic Jam in a yellow container

    The black pepper and balsamic vinegar boost the flavor of this jam and take it out of the usual into a sphere of its own. The amount of black pepper can be adjusted to your own taste even after it is finished.

    The jam is particularly good on the Cream Biscuits.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love this Recipe

    • It's strawberries - who doesn't like strawberries.
    • 30 to 40 minutes of your time for the best strawberry jam you'll ever taste.
    • Surprise your friends with bottles of this gem and you are guaranteed to be friends forever.
    • It's easy even if you haven't ever made jam.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Strawberry Balsamic Jam ingredients are strawberries, sugar, black pepper, balsamic vinegar and water.

    All ingredients read left to right.

    BACK ROW: Fresh strawberries, granulated sugar

    FRONT ROW: Black pepper, balsamic vinegar, water

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Step by Step Instructions

    The strawberries, sugar, balsamic vinegar,  water, black pepper and water are placed in a sauce pan.

    Step 1. Stir all of the ingredients in a saucepan or small stockpot at least 3 times the amount of the ingredients. This will rise up quite high in the pan.

    The ingredients are brought to a hard boil with foam on top.

    Step 2. Bring the ingredients to a hard boil. Once the mixture boils, do not stir it. There will be a foam on top.

    The foam has been skimmed off leaving a clear mixture.

    Step 3. Skim the foam from the top with a spoon. Try to pick up only the foam and not the liquid underneath.

    A thermometer has been place in the pan.

    Step 4. Place a thermometer in the pan to monitor the temperature. The jam will gel 220°F. If you don't have one, place several small plates in the freezer before you start.

    To determine if the jam has gelled on the spoon, the spoon should be turned sidewise and drops of the liquid should run together.

    Step 5. There are several other ways to determine if the jam has gelled. Pick up some of the liquid, turn the spoon sideways and let it run off the spoon. Two drops will hang off the spoon, then come together to drop off, it's done.

    The finished jam has thick bubbles in the pan

    Step 6. The finished jam can also be tested by putting a spoon of it one the frozen plates. Rotate the plate and if the jam isn't runny and stays pretty much in place it should be done. The finished jam will no longer rise in the pan and will have thickened, slow bubbles. Remove from the heat and allow to cool if not canning.

    What happens if I cook my jam too much?

    Mostly, it will loose it's fresh fruit flavor. It will continue to thicken as it cooks so it may end up too thick.

    Can frozen strawberries be used?

    Yes and they are definitely better if pale strawberries are you're only choice. Frozen strawberries are picked at the peak of ripeness and then frozen so all of the flavor is locked in. Put them directly into the cooking pot frozen. The faster they thaw the less juice they produce making a more flavorful jam.

    Can I omit the black pepper?

    Of course, this is your jam. But it won't have the same flavor or kick.

    Why do you skim off the foam

    Foam appears when the jam comes to a boil. The thinking in the past was that it was from impurities in the sugar. However, today the thinking is that it is air bubbles escaping from the fruit as it boils. There doesn't seem to be any agreement but everyone agrees you need to skim it off.

    Expert Tips

    • Use the freshest, scarlet colored strawberries you can find. Otherwise use frozen strawberries.
    • A candy thermometer is the best test but the plate test or drip test can also be used as described above.
    • The amount of pepper can be adjusted to your taste.
    • Do use the balsamic vinegar but not white or cider vinegar. White balsamic vinegar may be used if desired. The vinegar gives a sharpness to the jam a bit of a sweet and sharp taste. Otherwise, it's just strawberry jam.
    • Skim the foam off when it covers the top of the pan as it boils and again at the end if necessary.
    Cream biscuits on a plate with Strawberry Blasamic Jam and butter,
    • Scone with Cranberry Strawberry Jam on a plate
      Scones with Cranberry Strawberry Jam
    • Finished Photo
      Heavenly French Toast with Blueberry Compote
    • A Belgium waffle on a plate with a fruit compote and stacks of waffles in the background.
      Belgian Waffles with Berry Compote

    Love this recipe or any other on my site? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card & consider leaving a review in the comments further down, thanks!  Star ratings help people discover my recipes online. Your support means a great deal to me.

    Strawberry Balsamic Jam in a yellow container

    Strawberry Balsamic Jam

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Strawberry Balsamic Jam is an easy, quick to make, sweet and sharp, refrigerator jam that elevates strawberries with balsamic vinegar and black pepper. Sorry, but plain strawberry jam will never be the same.
    5 from 5 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Preserves
    Cuisine American
    Servings 24 servings
    Calories 131 kcal

    Equipment

    • 3 8 ounce canning jars
    • Large saucepan
    • Clip on candy thermometer
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • ⅓ cup balsamic vinegar, dark or white
    • ⅓ cup water
    • 3 ¾ cup granulated sugar (750 grams or 1 ⅔ pounds)
    • 1 ¼ pounds fresh strawberries (570 grams) frozen may be substituted if necessary
    • 2 teaspoons coarse black pepper adjust as desired

    Instructions
     

    • If using the cold plate method of determining when the jam is set, place them in the freezer.
    • Place the vinegar and water in a saucepan at least 3 times the depth of the ingredients as the ingredients will rise considerably while cooking.
    • Add the remaining ingredients, stirring well.
    • Bring to a rolling boil where the bubbles cover the entire top. Remove any foam with a spoon. Stir occasionally as it gets thicker. Boil for 10 minutes.
    • Check to see if it is done by one of these methods: The thermometer will read 220°F, a small amount of the jam on a cold plate will not run and will stay separated when you run your finger through it or plunge a metal spoon into the jam and let the liquid run off. If it forms two thick drops that sheet together before running off the spoon, it is done.
    • If not, boil a few minutes longer. Don't over cook it.
    • Cool completely, fill 8 ounce jars, place the lids on and store for months in the refrigerator
    • Yield: 3 - 8 ounce jars.

    Notes

      • Use the freshest, scarlet colored strawberries you can find. Otherwise use frozen strawberries straight from the freezer.
      • A candy thermometer is the best test but the plate test or drip test can also be used as described above.
      • The amount of pepper can be adjusted to your taste. If you are unsure, use a little during cooking and then add more to taste after it cools.
      • Do use the balsamic vinegar but not white or cider vinegar. White balsamic vinegar may be used if desired. The balsamic vinegar gives  the jam a bit of a sweet and sharp taste. Otherwise, it's just strawberry jam.
      • Skim the foam off when it covers the top of the pan as it boils and again at the end if necessary.
      • Don't over cooke the jam or it will lose its fresh strawberry flavor. 
      • Store in the refrigerator.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 12servingsCalories: 131kcalCarbohydrates: 34gProtein: 0.2gFat: 0.2gSaturated Fat: 0.01gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.04gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.01gSodium: 2mgPotassium: 43mgFiber: 1gSugar: 33gVitamin A: 4IUVitamin C: 14mgCalcium: 6mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Baci di Dama

    Modified: Dec 2, 2025 · Published: Mar 22, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 4 Comments

    Baci di Dama, an Italian cookie meanng Ladies Kiss consists of a chocolate sandwiched between two nutted cookies

    These fantastic looking Baci di Dama cookies consist of two hemispheres of buttery hazelnut cookies sandwiched with a rich gianduja filling - think Rochers and Nutella.  The recipe for this Italian cookie is as easy to remember as your name.  It is equal parts, by weight, of four ingredients for the cookie.  Forming the cookies is just as easy.

    Baci di Dama, an Italian cookie meanng Ladies Kiss consists of a chocolate sandwiched between two nutted cookies

    Baci di Dama translates to "a Laidies Kiss" because they are thought to resemble a ladies lips. Whatever you call these, they are wonderful.

    Be sure to check out my blog Helpful Cookie Baking Tips for the Holiday to make your holiday baking a bit easier.

    A few other tempting Italian cookies include the Apricot Pistachio Biscotti, Chocolate Spiced Olive Oil Biscotti, Italian Neapolitan Cookies, and the ever popular Cuccidati.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Nut Flours

    These Baci di Dama call for Hazelnut or Almond flour.  Hazelnut flour is available on the internet and I prefer that to homemade.  Make sure it states fine so you know it will be powdery fine.  The processor cannot powder the nuts as finely as the bought flour but if you want to make your own it's easy. 

    I used Bob's Red Mill Hazelnut Flour, finely ground. Almond flour may be substituted.

    How to Make Nut Flours

    The processor cannot powder the nuts as finely as the bought flour but if you want to make your own it's easy.  Try to buy skinned hazelnuts but if that isn't possible, here is an easy way to skin them.

    Skinning the Nuts

    Preheat the oven to 350°F and spread the hazelnuts in a single layer on a rimmed baking sheet.  Roast for 10 to 12 minutes until they are fragrant and the nuts are golden brown.  Place them in the bowl of a mixer fitted with a paddle attachment immediately, and turn the mixer on low to medium low. Let me go around until the majority of the skins are off. No matter what method you use some will stubbornly cling to the nut. That's fine. Cool the nuts before proceeding.

    Making the Nut Flour

    To make the hazelnut flour, place the nuts along with the flour in the bowl of the processor and process to grind them.  Stir and process again to get them as fine as possible.  The flour is used to prevent the nuts from becoming a paste.  Continue as in the directions below.

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • It only uses a few ingredients
    • The cookie are easy to shape
    • They are easier to eat
    • The balls can be shaped and frozen to be baked and filled later
    • Make these a few days before serving for the flavors to meld.
    • They hold well in an airtight tin.
    • The cookies hold up well when shipped.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Baci di Dama Cookies

    Ingredients for the Baci di Dama cookies include hazelnut flour, cake flour, powdered sugar and unsalted butter.

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter

    BACK ROW: Hazelnut flour, powdered sugar, cake flour

    Gianduja Filling

    The Gianduja filling for the cookies includes semisweet chocolate, milk chocolate, powdered sugar, hazelnut flour and milk.

    FRONT ROW: Hazelnut Flour, milk

    BACK ROW: Semisweet chocolate, powdered sugar and milk chocolate

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    Baci di Dama Cookies

    The first collage for the Baci di Dama cookies shows the hazelnut flour and powdered sugar and cake flour in the processor, the butter added, the mixture forming clumps in the processor and the mixture turned out onto a work surface.

    Step 1. Place the hazelnut flour and cake flour in the bowl of the food processor. Pulse to mix. Step 2. Add the powdered sugar and softened butter. Step 3. Process until the mixture clumps together. Step 4.Pour the mixture onto a work surface.

    This collages shows the  dough cut into 4 pieces, 3 covered in plastic wrap, an 18" rope of dough rolled out and cut into 1" squares.

    Step 5. Knead the dough together into a smooth log. Divide into 4 pieces, each about 114 grams. Step 6. Keep one piece out and cover the rest with plastic wrap. Step 7. Roll the piece of dough into an 18"rope. Step 8. Cut the dough into 18 1"pieces.

    This collages shows a rope of dough with a tear in it, the balls rolled out, on a tray and an unbaked ball of dough and a baked cookie.

    Step9. The rope of dough will probably crack when rolling it out. Simply push it back together and continue with a light hand. This happens and is annoying but it is easy to fix. Step 10. Take a 1" piece of dough and squeeze it together with your fingers. Roll it between the palms of your hands to make balls. Step 11. Cover the pan with parchment and place the balls 5 across and 7 down, evenly spaced on the pan. Step 12. The unbaked ball is on the left and the baked Baci di Dama cookie is on the right.

    Gianduja Filling

    The Gianduja filling includes the semisweet and milk chocolates in a bowl with the milk, they are partially melted, the powdered sugar and hazelnut flour added and the mixture stirred until smooth.

    Step 13. Combine the semisweet and milk chocolates with the milk in a microwave bowl. Step 14. Heat on half power until the chocolates are partially melted. Stir to melt completely. Heat again if necessary to get the chocolate completely melted. Add the powdered sugar and hazelnut flour. Step 16. Stir together to make a pipeable mixture that does not run. If it is too thin, add more hazelnut flour, if too thick add a bit more milk a little at a time.

    Assembly

    The last collage shows the cookies turned upside down and right side up in matched pairs, the filling on the bottom bookie, and the tops on.

    Step 17. Pair the cookies, turning the bottoms up. Step 18. Pipe about ½ teaspoon of filling on the middle of the bottoms of the cookies. Step 19. Place the tops on and gently press down to distribute the filling to the edges of the cookies. Step 20. Place on a tray until the filling is set. Store in an airtight container.

    Recipe FAQ'S

    What is Gianduja?

    Gianduja refers to an Italian combination of hazelnuts and chocolate, usually milk chocolate. It is used as a filling or it can be a component in a cake.

    What is the difference between American and European Cookies?

    There are several. Europeans rarely use a leavening agent such as baking powder or baking soda. When they do it is often Ammonium Carbonate or Baker's Ammonia which adds a crispness to the cookies. Egg yolks are often used instead of the whole eggs and European cookies use fewer ingredients in the main than do American cookies and they rarely use salt. Both are delicious.

    What is the most used ingredient in European cookies?

    Butter. They also often use powdered or confectioner's sugar rather than granulated or brown sugar.

    Expert Tips

    • It is best to use purchased fine Hazelnut Flour for these cookies.
    • Unsalted butter is a must here. European butter is a plus, American unsalted butter is also fine.
    • Make sure the butter is room temperature or it will be difficult to combine the ingredients in the processor.
    • The cookies should not brown except on the edges.
    • They should be firm when finished baking.
    • Leftover filling can be loosed with a bit more milk and makes an excellent topping for pound cake or ice cream.
    Seven cookies sit on an antique pate rimmed in gold.

    Other European Cookies to Enjoy

    • White, star shaped cinnamon Zimtsterne cookies are flowing fro a container surounded by holiday ornaments.
      Zimtsterne - German Cinnamon Stars
    • Almond Macaroons
      Almond Macaroons
    • Finished trio of cookies
      Holiday Cookies
    • Finished photo
      Murbteig Pastry

    A lot of work goes into each of my recipes and my only ask is that if you like the recipe or even the looks of it, please leave me a star rating to help me rank better.  It’s important and I appreciate it and I appreciate you.  

    Baci di Dama, an Italian cookie meanng Ladies Kiss consists of a chocolate sandwiched between two nutted cookies

    Baci di Dama

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Baci di Dama translates to "a Ladies Kiss" because they are thought to resemble a ladies lips.  Whatever you call these they are wonderful. This Italian cookie consist of two buttery Hazelnut or Almond Cookies sandwiched with a Gianduja filling of milk chocolate and nuts (think Rochers).
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 19 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 36 cookies
    Calories 78 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Baci di Dama Cookies

    • 1 cup +3 tablespoons hazelnut* or almond flour (114 grams)
    • 1 cup less 1 ½ taglespoons cake flour (114 grams)
    • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened (114 grams)
    • ⅞ cup powdered sugar (114 grams or 1 cup less 2 tablespoons)
    • *I used Bob's Red Mill Hazelnut Flour, finely ground. Almond flour may also be used.

    Gianduja Filling

    • 1 ½ ounces semisweet chocolate (45 grams)
    • 1 ½ ounces milk chocolate (45 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons milk
    • ¼ cup powdered sugar (35 grams)
    • ¼ cup hazelnut flour (18 grams)

    Instructions
     

    Baci Di Dama Cookies

    • Preheat the oven to 300°F. Line several baking sheets with parchment paper and set aside.
    • Place the hazelnut and cake flours in the food processor bowl. Process several seconds to mix well. Add the butter in pieces and powdered sugar. Process until it clumps up or forms a dough.
    • Remove it from the processor and knead it several times times.
    • Divide it into 4 pieces, each one about 114 grams. Keep the other pieces covered with plastic wrap. Roll one piece into a a 12" rope. It will be 18" long. Cut it into 1" pieces and roll each into a ball. The balls will be about the size of a malted milk ball. Place the balls 1" apart on the prepared baking sheets. Repeat with the other 3 pieces of dough.
    • Bake for 19 to 22 minutes until firm and barely colored. Cool on racks.

    Gianduja Filling

    • Combine the chocolates and milk in a microwave safe bowl. Microwave at ½ power until the chocolate is just melted. Add the powdered sugar and hazelnut or almond flour, stirring to make a spreadable filling. If too thick, loosen with a little milk. If too thin, add a bit more powdered sugar.

    Assembly

    • Pair the cookies by size.
    • The easiest way to fill the cookies is with a piping bag fitted with a ¼" plain tip. Pipe about ½ teaspoon filling on the bottom cookies. Place the top on and press down lightly to distribute the filling evenly to the edge of the cookies.
    • Yield: 36 Baci di Dama. These cookies are great keepers. They will last for weeks in a closed tin.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 36sandwiched cookiesCalories: 78kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 1gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.1gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 7mgSodium: 1mgPotassium: 16mgFiber: 0.5gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 81IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 7mgIron: 0.3mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Tropical Shortbread Cookies

    Modified: Jan 29, 2023 · Published: Jan 29, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 47 Comments

    Toasted coconut and macadamia nuts are the basis of these heart shaped shorbreads on a lattice plate over purple.

    These heart shaped Tropical Shortbread Cookies are the perfect way to say "I Love You" on Valentines day. While cut out cookies can be a challenge, my post on Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax Paper Technique makes is so much easier.  

    No flour all over, no trying to scrape the cookie off the counter, just perfect cut out cookies every time without the drama. The cookies don't spread and they cut out cleanly with sharp edges.

    Tropical Shortbreads half dipped in chocolate on a lattice platter in front of a purple background

    These easy to make delightfully, thin, cookies are flavored with toasted macadamia nuts and coconut and half dipped in a milk chocolate glaze. Not into cut out cookies? That's fine, these can be easily shaped into logs, refrigerated and cut into rounds to speed things along.

    Easy Decorated Shortbread Cookies and Painted Cookies are a couple of other great shortbread cookies. Whichever way you make them, they're a great addition to your cookie collection.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why This Recipe Works

    • The nuts and flour are ground together so the flour absorbs any oil that is released from the nuts. If the nuts are ground alone, they can easily turn to nut butter.
    • Toasting the nuts and the coconut brings much more flavor to the cookies. Watch each of them carefully and stir once or twice while toasting. Each of them go from golden to burned easily.
    • Make sure the nuts are cooled completely before processing them with the flour.
    • Having the butter softened but not melty ensures it, will cream smoothly.
    • This is a European recipe and they often beat their butter and flavorings together adding the sugar later.
    • Rolling the cookies between wax paper avoids the use of additional flour in the cookies. Please see my post Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax Paper Technique for the how and whys of using this paper and technique which allows you to pick up the paper, place it on a baking sheet and freeze it for easy removal when baking.
    • Combining the chocolate with the vegetable shortening is a way to quick temper the chocolate so it doesn't streak which happens when the cocoa butter in the chocolate comes to the top. It doesn't effect the taste, just the looks.

    Recipe Ingredients

    The ingredients for the Tropical Shortbread Cookies are are macadamia nuts, flour, coconut, powdered sugar, butter,salt and vanilla

    BACK ROW: All Purpose flour, toasted coconut, unsalted butter.

    MIDDLE ROW: Toasted macadamia nuts, vanilla powdered sugar, butter.

    FRONT ROW: Salt

    Ingredients for the chocolate glaze include a bowl of milk chocolate and a bowl of shortening

    Milk Chocolate, Vegetable Shortening

    • Macadamia Nuts can be hard to find sometimes. They can usually be found in the snack aisle of grocery stores.
    • Sweetened Coconut is used in this recipe.
    • Unsalted Butter, especially the European Butter with its higher butter fat content is the butter of choice.
    • Powdered Sugar is used to impart a melt-in-your-mouth texture to the cookies. Granulated sugar makes a crisper cookie.
    • Milk chocolate chips or bar chocolate can be used. Chop the bar chocolate before melting.
    • Shortening such as Crisco is used to quick temper the chocolate so it doesn't streak when set.

    Substitutions

    • Any nut of your choice can be substituted for the macadamias. Toast them as called for in the instructions.
    • Coconut oil can be substituted for the vegetable shortening. Food grade cocoa butter is another option.

    Be sure to see the recipe card for the full ingredient list and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    To Make the Cookies - please see Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax Paper Technique

    The long strands of coconut are crushed between your hands.

    Step 1. If the toasted strands of coconut are long, crush them between your hands when cool.

    Two piles of coconut, one crushed and one with longer strand, uncrushed

    Step 2. It is important to crush the coconut so the edges of the cut out cookies will be clean.

    Step 3. Place the toasted macadamia nuts and the flour in the bowl of a food processor.

    Nuts and flour ground to a powder together in the processor bowl

    Step 4. Process until the nuts are finely ground and one with the flour.

    The butter and vanilla are in a mixing bowl.

    Step 5. Place the softened butter and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer.

    The butter and vanilla in the mixing bowl has been creamed until light.

    Step 6. Cream until very light in color.

    The remaining ingredients, flour/nut mixture,powdered sugar, macadamia nuts, and salt are added to the mixing bowl.

    Step 7. Add the flour/nut mixture, coconut, powdered sugar, and salt.

    The completed dough in the bowl of the mixer

    Step 8. The dough completely mixed. It should not be a cohesive ball.

    The dough is on the marble and flattened into a round.

    Step 9. Remove the dough from the bowl and knead it a few times to bring it together.

    The dough is divided in half.

    Step 10. Divide the dough in half.

    A roll of cookies sliced before baking.

    Step 11. If making the round cookies, roll each half into a log, wrap in plastic wrap and chill until hard. Slice thinly and place on parchment lined paper about an inch apart.

    Half of the dough rolled between two pieces of wax paper.

    Step 12. If making the hearts, roll each half of the dough between wax paper to about ⅛" thick. Please see my post Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax Paper Technique for the whys and hows of this technique. Do not attempt to roll this directly on a work area.

    Picking up the wax paper with the dough between the paper.

    Step 13. From time to time pick up the wax paper and flip it over to smooth out the wrinkles underneath. Not only will they crease the bottom of the cookies, the dough may stall and not roll out any further.

    The wax paper on the bottom is wrinkled.

    Step 14. Carefully pull back the paper, replace it over the dough and smooth out the wrinkles on the paper. Roll over the dough to remove the wrinkles on the dough.

    Heart shaped cookies cut out of the dough closely together.

    Step 15. Remove the top piece of paper, keeping the dough on the bottom piece. Cut the cookies out as close together as possible. Place the paper, with the cookies on a baking sheet and refrigerate or freeze until hard.

    Tray of cut out hearts ready to go into the oven.

    Step 16. Using a pancake turner or off- set spatula, lift the cookies off the waxed paper and place them on a parchment lined baking sheet. This will be very easy because they are hard. Re-roll the scraps and roll out as before. Bake the cookies from the refrigerated or frozen state.

    Dipping the Cookies

    The milk chocolate and shortening in a bowl to be microwaved for the glaze.

    Step 1. Place the milk chocolate and shortening, coconut oil or cocoa butter in a bowl. Microwave at half power for about 2 minutes. Stir to blend completely. Alternatively, place the bowl over simmering water and stir to melt. Do not get the chocolate overly hot.

    The melted chocolate  has been poured into a narrow glass to facilitate dipping.

    Step 2. Pour the melted chocolate into a short, narrow glass to facilitate dipping the cookies. If the glass or bowl is too shallow the cookies won't be able to be half dipped. Test a cookie to make sure the glaze is not too runny or thick. It should cover the cookie completely.

    The heart shaped cookie is half dipped into the chocolate glaze.

    Step 3. A Cookie is half dipped into the chocolate.

    The excess glaze is dripping off the cookie back into the glass.

    Step 4. Allow the excess chocolate to drip back into the glass for a few seconds.

    The back of the cookie is being lightly wiped on the rim of the glass to remove chocolate that would puddle around the bottom of the cookie.

    Step 5. To keep any remaining excess chocolate from puddling around the bottom of the cookie while it is setting up, lightly wipe it against the side of the glass.

    Dipped cookies setting up on a tray.

    Step 6. Place the cookie on a parchment lined baking sheet and allow to set up.

    Recipe FAQS

    Should I chill shortbread dough before baking?

    After shaping the cookies, chill the dough in the refrigerator or freeze it until it is hard. This firms up the butter and helps keep them from spreading too much.

    Can the dough for Shortbreads be over-mixed

    Yes it can. Over-mixing can cause the dough to become tough. Mix the ingredients on low just to combine them. The dough should not ball up. Pour it onto a work surface and knead it a few times to bring it together.

    What is the main difference between shortbread and sugar cookies

    There are several differences. Butter cookies generally have a higher ratio of sugar to butter and often have eggs in them. They are also baked at a higher temperature.

    Shortbread cookies have a higher fat content and often use powdered sugar for a melt-in-your-mouth texture.

    Storage and Freezing

    • The cookies can be cut out and frozen prior to baking for several months if put in an airtight container. Just place them on parchment lined trays and bake as directed. Dip them after baking.
    • They can be stored, after the chocolate glaze has set, in an airtight container with wax paper or parchment rounds for up to 5 days.

    Expert Tips

    • Always work the dough cold. A few minutes in the refrigerator or freezer will make a world of difference when transferring the cookies from the paper to a baking sheet that is lined with parchment.
    • Make sure the butter is softened so the other ingredients can blend quickly into it.
    • The dough should be mixed on low and only until it is in large crumbs to keep it tender.
    • Use wax paper to roll the dough, especially because it is thin when rolled out. Never try to roll it out on a counter top with flour. That is a sure way to ruin the cookie.
    Extreme closeup of several Tropical Shortbread Cookies

    Other Scrumptious Cookies

    • Sarah Bernhardt cookies feature a macaron base with a chocolate ganache filling,dipped in chocolate and finished with gold leaf
      Sarah Bernhardts - A Macaroon Like No Other
    • Multi colored Painted Cookies on a lace plate
      Painted Cookies
    • Pink macarons filled with chocolate and raspery on a white plate.
      French Macarons with Chocolate Raspberry Filling
    • Three Chocolate Biscotti on a white tray with coffee in a cup.
      Chocolate Spice Olive Oil Biscotti

    Love this recipe or any other on my site? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card & consider leaving a review in the comments further down, thanks!

    Tropical Shortbreads half dipped in chocolate on a lattice platter in front of a purple background.

    Tropical Shortbread Cookies

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These Tropical Shortbread Cookies are the perfect way to say "I love you" to that someone special. While cut out cookies can be a challenge, my post on Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax Paper Technique makes is so much easier.  No flour all over, no trying to scrape the cookie off the counter, just perfect cookies cut out cookies every time without the drama. The cookies don't spread and cut out cleanly with sharp edges. 
    4.89 from 9 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 48 cookies
    Calories 55 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Tropical Shortbread Cookies

    • 1 cup coconut (60 grams or 2 ounces)
    • ½ cup macadamia nuts (60 grams or 2 ounces)
    • 1 ½ cups all purpose flour (210 grams or 6 ounces)
    • ⅓ cup powdered sugar + 1 tablespoon, (45 grams or 1 ½ ounces)
    • ⅓ teaspoon salt
    • 1 ¼ sticks butter (140 grams, 5 ounces or 10 tablespoons)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla

    Milk Chocolate Glaze

    • 6 ounces milk chocolate chips (170 grams)
    • 1 ½ tablespoons shortening

    Instructions
     

    Tropical Shortbread Cookies

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.  
    • Place the coconut on a baking sheet and toast for about 4 to 5 minutes until deep golden brown.  When cool, crush the coconut between your hands to make it smaller.  
    • If the macadamia nuts are not toasted, place them on a baking sheet and toast for 8 to 10 minutes if they are whole.  They should be medium brown and fragrant.  If the nuts are in pieces, toast them for less time.   Cool completely before continuing.      
    • Place the nuts and the flour in the bowl of a food processor.  Process to grind nuts until they are indistinguishable.  
    • Add the powdered sugar and salt, pulse several times to mix. 
    • Beat the butter and vanilla in a mixing bowl until creamy.  Add the remaining ingredients, including the coconut, and beat just until combined.  It should not make a cohesive ball.  
    • Turn the dough out and knead together several times and flatten into a round.

    To Make round Cookies

    • The dough should be firm enough to shape into logs.  If it is too soft, refrigerate it briefly to firm it up.  Do not let it get hard, or it will be difficult to shape.  
    • If making rolls, divide the dough into 3 or 4 pieces and roll each piece into a log about 1 ¼" to 1 ½" in diameter.
    • When ready to bake, slice ¼" thick and place on baking sheets about 1" apart.  Chill or freeze until hard before baking.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F and bake for 10 to 12 minutes or until the cookies start to brown around the edge.
    • Cool before dipping.

    To Make Cut Out Cookies

    • To roll the cookies out, please see Cutout Cookies using Wax Paper Technique for in depth instructions.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.  Line several baking sheets with parchment paper.
    • Divide the dough into 2 or 3 portions.  Place one piece in the middle of a large piece of waxed paper.  Place another piece of wax paper on top and flatten with the palm of your hand.    
    • Roll out to about ⅜".   You want these to be thin.  
    • When the bottom piece of paper starts wrinkling, remove the top piece of the paper, replace it on the dough and flip it over so the underside of the dough is now on top.  Remove that paper carefully, replace it, smooth out any wrinkles, then continue rolling.  If the wrinkles are not smoothed out, deep creases will mar the underside of the cookies.  In addition, the dough may stall and refuse to roll out any further.
    • Cut out shapes as desired, keeping them as close together as possible.   Place the cookies on the waxed paper on a baking sheet and freeze until hard.  
    • Remove the cookies with a pancake turner or offset spatula. 
    • Gather the scraps and re-roll to make more cookies.  
    • Bake for about 10 to 12 minutes until coloring around the edges.
    • Cool completely before dipping.

    Dipping the Cookies

    • Combine the chocolate and shortening.  Place over hot water to melt, or microwave at half power until melted.  Stir well.  Do not whisk as it is too easy to incorporate air bubbles, which you definitely do not want.  
    • Place the glaze in a narrow container as it will be easier to dip the cookies.  Half dip each cookie and set on parchment or waxed paper.  Allow to set for several  hours.
    • After the glaze is set, the cookies can be stored at room temperature.  
    • If you are in a hurry, refrigerate them briefly.  This may dull the glaze somewhat.  
    • They can be stored at room temperature for several days. Place them in an airtight tin with wax paper or parchment circles between them.

    Notes

    • It is important to mix the dough on low  speed and only until it is mostly together to keep the cookies as tender as possible.  
    • The dough should always be cold when rolling it out.  Not hard, but cold.  
    • After cutting out, make sure the cookies are refrigerated or frozen rock hard before transferring them to parchment lined baking sheets.  Bake them frozen if possible.
    • Rolling the cookies between wax paper avoids the use of additional flour in the cookies. Please see my post Cut Out Cookies Using the Wax Paper Technique for the how and why's of using this paper in particular and a technique which allows you to pick up the paper, place it on a baking sheet and freeze it for easy removal when baking.
    • Never roll the dough on a flour-dusted work surface.  The cookies are thin, making them very difficult to keep cold enough to transfer to baking sheets without getting them out of shape.  
    • I used a 2" heart shaped cookie, but any size will do, as will any shape.  
    • Make sure the nuts are completely cold when they are ground with the flour, so the flour absorbs any oil released from the nuts.  If the nuts are ground alone, they can easily turn to nut butter.
    • Toasting the nuts and coconut brings much more flavor to the cookies.  Watch each of them carefully and stir once or twice while toasting.  Each of them go from golden to burned easily.
    • Combining the chocolate with the vegetable shortening is a way to quick temper the chocolate, so it doesn't streak, which happens when the cocoa butter in the chocolate comes to the top. It doesn't affect the taste, just the looks.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 55kcalCarbohydrates: 7gProtein: 1gFat: 3gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.2gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.1gSodium: 17mgPotassium: 26mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 3gVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 5mgIron: 0.3mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    SaveSave

    SaveSaveSaveSave

    SaveSave

    SaveSave

    Brownie+Cookie=Easy Brookie Recipe

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Jan 9, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 8 Comments

    A fudgy brownie on the bottom with a chocolate and butterscotch chip cookie on top.

    The title says it all. This is a classic combination of two favorites - a fudgy brownie is teamed with a chocolate and butterscotch chip cookie all in one pan. This is a great recipe for a beginner baker because they learn to make two different recipe at once.

    A fudgy brownie on the bottom with a chocolate and butterscotch chip cookie on top.

    Ingredients

    Brownie Layer

    Ingredients for the brownie layer include eggs, sugar, oil, cocoa, and flour.

    Photos read left to right.

    Back row: eggs, granulated sugar, canola oil. Front row: cocoa, flour

    Chocolate and Butterscotch Chip

    Ingredients for the chocolate butterscotch chip topping include back row: egg, flour, brown sugar,middle row: butter, chocolate and butterscotch chips, front row, vanilla, baking soda, molasses, salt

    Photos read left to right.

    Back row: egg, flour, light brown sugar. Middle Row: unsalted butter, chocolate and butterscotch chips. Front Row: vanilla, baking soda, molasses, salt.

    • Size large eggs are used
    • Canola oil is used because it is a neutral flavored oil
    • The Cocoa can be natural or Dutch. The Dutch cocoa gives a deeper color
    • Unsalted butter is listed but salted butter can be used by reducing the salt to ¼ teaspoon.
    • Dark brown sugar gives the chewiest textured cookie top. If all you have is light brown sugar, as I did whisk 1 tablespoon molasses to the melted butter to make dark brown sugar. More information can be found in Three Easy Sugar Fixes and Sugar The Sweetest Part of Baking.

    Instructions

    Brownie Layer

    Cocoa and flour in a strainer to be sifted.

    Step 1. Because cocoa is often lumpy ad for the best mix, sift together the cocoa and the flour on a piece of wax paper or parchment paper.

    Cocoa and Flour sifted together.

    Step 2. The flour and cocoa sifted.

    Step 3. Whisk the flour and cocoa together.

    Step 4. Place all of the ingredients for the brownie layer in the bowl at once.

    Step 5. Initially beat on low to bring ingredients together, then raise to medium until completely mixed.

    Step 6. Pour into the prepared pan and smooth out. Set aside.

    Cookie Layer

    Step 1. Melt the butter. Cool to lukewarm.

    The molasses is whisked into the melted butter.

    Step 2. If using the molasses, whisk it into the butter.

    Step 3. Combine the flour, baking soda and salt. Set aside.

    Egg, butter, brown sugar and vanilla in mixing bowl

    Step 4. Add the egg, melted butter with molasses, brown sugar, and vanilla to the mixing bowl.

    Step 5. Mix on medium until combined.

    The flour is added to the liquid ingredients.

    Step 6. Add the flour mixture to the mixing bowl.

    Step 7. Mix on low to combine then raise to medium to mix more completely. Some flour will, most likely, stick to the sides of the bowl. Scrap down.

    The batter for the top layer is mixed.

    Step 8. Mix completely.

    Step 8. Add the chips.

    Step 9. Mix in on low.

    Step 10. To keep the top layer from sinking into the bottom layer, using a spoon, scoop the cookie batter on top of the brownie layer.

    Step 11. Cover the brownie layer completely with the scooped batter.

    Step 12. Smooth out the cookie layer. The easiest way is to use a small offset spatula.

    The baked brookie in the pan.

    Step 13. The Baked Brookie on a cooling rack.

    Variations

    • Use any chips you like. Use all chocolate or all butterscotch. 
    • Nuts of any kind, preferably toasted, are a great add in. If using all nuts use 1 cup chopped up. If using chips and nuts use ½ cup each.
    • Dried fruit such as cranberries, raisins, chopped apricots, etc. can be added. 
    • Any add ins you prefer can be used. If using all one, use 1 cup. If using two, use ½ cup each.

    Equipment

    An offset spatula is perfect for smoothing out batter.

    An offset spatula is perfect for smoothing out batter as the handle is above the blade. They come in large and small. This is the smaller version.

    Storage

    These store well, covered for 4 or 5 days at room temperature.

    A fudgy brownie on the bottom with a chocolate and butterscotch chip cookie on top.

    Brownie+Cookie=Easy Brookie Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This is a classic combination of two favorites - a fudgy brownie is teamed with a chocolate and butterscotch chip cookie all in one pan. This is a great recipe for a beginner baker because they learn to make two different recipe at once. 
    4.34 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 25 minutes mins
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 16
    Calories 309 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Brownie Layer

    • 1 cup granulated sugar 200 grams or 7 ounces
    • ½ cup canola or vegetable oil
    • 2 large eggs
    • ½ cup all-purpose flour 70 grams or 2 ½ ounces
    • ⅓ cup cocoa - natural or dutch 30 grams or scant ounce

    Cookie Layer

    • ½ cup unsalted butter 114 grams or 4 ounces
    • ¾ cup dark brown sugar 150 grams or 5 1//3 ounces*
    • 1 large egg
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract McCormicks is fine here
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • 1 cup all-purpose flour 140 grams or 5 ounces
    • ½ cup chocolate chips 85 grams or 3 ounces
    • ½ cup butterscotch chips 85 grams or 3 ounces
    • Additional chocolate and butterscotch chips for top optional
    • *Light brown sugar is fine, but for the chewiest cookie top dark is preferred. If all you have is light brown sugar whisk 1 tablespoon molasses into the melted butter to make dark brown sugar.

    Instructions
     

    Brownie Layer

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.  Line the bottom of a 9x9 inch square pan with parchment paper.  Spray the paper and the sides of the pan with a non-stick baking release.  Set aside.
    • Whisk together the flour and cocoa.  
    • Place all the ingredients in a mixing bowl and beat on low to bring it together, then on medium briefly to mix completely.
    • Pour into the prepared pan, smooth the top.  Set aside.

    Cookie Layer

    • There is no need to clean the mixing bowl as long as it has been well scraped out.
    • Melt the butter and cool to lukewarm.  Set aside.
    • If using the molasses, whisk it into the butter after cooling.
    • Whisk together the flour, baking soda and salt.  Set aside.
    • Place the butter, brown sugar, egg, and vanilla in the mixing bowl. Mix to blend completely.
    • Add the flour mixture and beat on low to blend then on medium briefly to finishing mixing.  Often, some of the flour will stick to the sides of the bowl.  Scrap down well and remix.
    • Add all the chips and mix them in.
    • With a large spoon, place dollops of batter onto the brownie layer lightly to keep it from sinking into the brownie layer.  Continue until the whole top has been covered.
    • Smooth the top with an offset spatula.
    • Sprinkle with addition chips if desired.
    • Bake for 35 to 40 minutes until completely set.
    • Cool completely before turning out and cutting.
    • Cut four down and four across for 16 or as desired.

    Notes

    • These store well for 4 or 5 days at room temperature.  They can also be frozen, well wrapped, for a couple of months.
    • Use any chips you like. Use all chocolate or all butterscotch.
    • Nuts of any kind, preferably toasted, are a great add in.
    • If using a single add in, measure 1 cup. If using two, use ½ cup each.
    • Dried fruit such as cranberries, raisins, chopped apricots, etc. can be added.
    • McCormick imitation vanilla is fine here.  
    • A small offset spatula is ideal for spreading the cookie batter on top of the brownie.
    • Spread the cookie batter lightly to keep the layers separate when baked.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 309kcalCarbohydrates: 41gProtein: 3gFat: 16gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 46mgSodium: 144mgPotassium: 84mgFiber: 1gSugar: 30gVitamin A: 227IUCalcium: 23mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    A Perfectly Easy Basic Muffin Mix

    Modified: Nov 27, 2025 · Published: Jan 4, 2023 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 36 Comments

    Basic muffins are shown plain and with sanding sugar glistening on top.

    You're going to love this basic muffin recipe because it's so variable. While this recipe uses chocolate chips and raisins, anything from fruit to veggies (think carrot, zucchini) can be used.

    Basic muffins are shown plain and with sanding sugar glistening on top.

    Muffins are one of the easiest treats to make with a few dry ingredients in one bowl and wet in another. After combining, stir in the add ins, fill the paper cups and into the oven they go. Baking doesn't get much more simple or inviting.

    Be sure to check out the Best of All Strawberry Muffins, the Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins, as well as the Easy PBJ Muffin, Blueberry Crumb Muffins with it's Brown Sugar Almond Crumb topping, the over the top Double Chocolate Truffled Muffins as well as the Crunchy Topped Apple Muffins.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • The recipe is perfectly balanced
    • You can sub in anything you want.
    • It's super easy.
    • Just substitute any add in's you desire.
    • It can be made in a variety of sizes and baking times are included for all of them
    • You probably have the ingredients in your pantry

    Ingredients for Basic Muffin Mix

    Sugar, all-purpose flour, milk, baking powder, salt, vanilla, eggs and butter make up the basic muffin mix

    All photos read left to right.

    Back Row: granulated sugar, all-purpose flour, milk. Middle Row: salt, baking powder, vanilla, eggs. Front Row: softened butter.

    Ingredients for Chocolate Chip Raisin Muffins

    Bowls of raisins and chocolate chips to be added to the basic muffin mix.

    Left to Right: raisins and chocolate chips

    See the recipe card for quantities.

    Substitutions

    10 to 12 ounces of fruit, nuts, chocolate chips or a combination of almost anything can be added to the basic muffin mix. Fruit such as blueberries and cranberries are best added frozen so they don't discolor the batter and turn it gray. A teaspoon or two of spices can be added as can the zest of one orange, two lemons or a couple of limes are great additions.

    Top with crumbs, sanding or Swedish Pearl sugar.

    The combinations are endless.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The sugar and butter are  waiting in a mixing bowl to be creamed together.

    Step 1. Place the sugar and butter in a mixing bowl.

    The butter and sugar are creamed until light.

    Step 2. Cream on medium until light and completely combined.

    The mixture curdles which is natural

    Step 3. Add one egg and beat until combined. In reality, the mixture will curdle. This usually happens and will be fixed later. Add the second egg and mix well. More curdling will probably occur..

    One third of the flour is added to the curdled batter.

    Step 4. Add the flour and milk alternately, starting and ending with the flour. Add ⅓ of the flour and mix on low. The batter will come together at this point.

    Half of the milk is added and mixed in on low.

    Step 5. Add the vanilla to the milk. Add half of the milk to the batter and beat on low. When completely mixed, add ½ of the remaining flour and mix on low.

    The remainder of the flour and milk are added alternately to achieve a smooth batter

    Step 6. Next add the remaining milk, blending well. Last, add the rest of the flour and mix to get a smooth batter, scraping down several times.

    The raisins are soaking in very hot water to plump them up.

    Step 7. In the meantime, soak the raisins in really hot water to plump them. After soaking, squeeze all the water out of them and set aside.

    The plumped raisins and chocolate chips are added to the batter.

    Step 8. Add the chocolate chips and plumped raisins to the batter. Mix well, scraping several times to make sure the add ins are evenly distributed.

    The batter is scooped into 8 paper lined Texas muffin cups.

    Step 9. Line 8 Texas size muffin cups with paper liners. (I used Texas muffin cups.) Fill the cups ¾ full. Bake as directed. Sprinkle with sanding sugar if desired.

    Storage

    These store for a couple of days well covered.

    They can also be frozen before baking. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight and bake as called for adding a few minutes.

    Last, they can be baked and frozen, well wrapped, for several months. Thaw at room temperature. Heat for 10 minutes at 350°F for just baked muffins.

    Expert Tips

    By portioning out the muffins in their paper liners and refrigerating overnight before baking, they take on a more professional look. The crowns are taller and they have that "just bought from a bakery" look.

    Chilling the muffin batter overnight allows the starches in the flour to absorb more moisture from the eggs and liquids. This results in the starches swelling allowing more gluten to form, improving the consistency of the batter allowing for higher crowns, and a more moist tender, taller muffin. This will improve any muffin recipe, not just this one.

    Other Recipes You'll Love

    • Cranberry Orange Muffins in three sizes, mini, regular and Texas on a gray plate with a red napkin.
      A Cranberry Orange Muffin
    • Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins
      Crumb Topped Orange Date Muffins
    • Gluten Free Fruit and Nut Muffins
      Gluten Free Fruit and Nut Muffins

    If you love this Perfectly Easy Basic MuffinMix or any other recipe on my website, please please leave a 🌟 star rating in the recipe card and let me know how it went the in 📝 comments below. I appreciate each of you being here!

    Basic muffins are shown plain and with sanding sugar glistening on top.

    A Perfectly Easy Basic Muffin Mix

    Helen S. Fletcher
    Muffins are one of the easiest treats to make with a few dry ingredients in one bowl and wet in another. After combining, stir in the add ins, fill the paper cups and into the oven they go. Baking doesn't get much more simple or inviting.  While I made this muffin with raisins and chocolate chips, ten to twelve ounces of any add ins you like can be added to make these whatever you chose.
    4.41 from 5 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 25 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Muffins
    Cuisine American
    Servings 20 regular size muffins
    Calories 195 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Basic Muffin Mix

    • 1 cup sugar (200 grams or 7 ounces)
    • 1 stick unsalted butter room temperature (114 grams or 4 ounces)
    • 2 large eggs
    • 2 cups all-purpose flour (280 grams or 10 ounces)
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup milk whole or 2%
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla

    Chocolate Chip Raisin Muffins

    • 6 ounces chocolate chips (170 grams)
    • 4 ounces raisins (114 grams)

    Sugar Nutmeg Mix

    • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
    • ½ teaspoon nutmeg or to taste

    Instructions
     

    Basic Muffins

    • Preheat the oven to 375°F.  Line muffin tins of your choice with paper liners.  Set aside.
    • Cream together the sugar and butter until light and fluffy.  Scrape down and add the eggs one at a time.  Beat until light and completely combined.  The mixture may curdle but will be corrected when the flour is added.
    • In the meantime, combine the flour, baking powder and salt.  Mix together.
    • Add the vanilla to the milk.
    • Add the flour and milk alternately, starting with ⅓ of the flour mixture, then ½ cup milk, ½ of the remaining flour and the rest of the milk.  Last add the remaining flour.
    • Add 10 to 12 ounces (280 to 340 grams) of any add ins you want.  Mix in on low, scraping often to make sure they are evenly distributed.
    • Fill the cups ¾ full.  Sprinkle the tops liberally with the sugar/nutmeg mix. (See below).

    Chocolate Chip Raisin Muffins

    • When starting to gather ingredients, soak the raisins in the hotest water available.  When ready to use squeeze all the water from them.
    • Add the chocolate chips and raisins when the batter is finished.  Scrape often to make sure the add ins are evenly distributed.

    Sugar Nutmeg Mix

    • Combine the sugar and nutmeg.

    Baking Times

    • Preheat the oven to 375°F.  
    • Regular size muffins – Bake  23 to 25 minutes – makes about 15 muffins
    • Texas size muffins - 25 to 28 minutes - makes 8 muffins
    • Mini size muffins – bake 15 to 18 minutes – makes about 40

    Notes

    For professional looking muffins with the highest crowns and the best looks, refrigerate overnight.  Bake as directed directly from the refrigerator, adding a few minutes.  This is ideal for warm muffins at breakfast.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 195kcalCarbohydrates: 30gProtein: 2gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 29mgSodium: 83mgPotassium: 102mgFiber: 1gSugar: 15gVitamin A: 175IUVitamin C: 0.3mgCalcium: 45mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Dulce de Leche Cookies - Your Way

    Modified: May 16, 2025 · Published: Dec 19, 2022 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 12 Comments

    Dulche de leche cookies with the five finishes - pecan, pecan and sugar, plain chocolate, plain cookie, with sanding sugar

    Dulce de Leche is an easily made filling of sweetened condensed milk that has been heated in the oven until thick, creamy, and deeply browned. It is perfect for these buttery pecan shortbread sandwich cookies.

    Dulche de leche cookies with the five finishes - pecan, pecan and sugar, plain chocolate, plain cookie, with sanding sugar.

    These melt in your mouth cookies don't even have to be rolled out. While looking like they might be a challenge, they are easily made.I've provided several ways to finish the cookies from simple to extravagant - all elegant looking as if they came from a bakery.

    I am using the recipe from David Lebovitz Dulce de Leche. I tested several methods and this seems to be the fastest and the best.

    Want more sandwich cookies? Try the Milano cookies, Langue de Chat, Peanut Butter Sandwich Cookies, Mexican Chocolate Brownwies or the Viennese Whirls.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Recipe Ingredients

    Pecan Cookies

    Ingredients for the pecan shortbread cookies arranged on a marbletop.

    Left to Right.

    Back Row: Flour, Toasted Pecans. Middle Row: Butter, Powdered Sugar. Front Row: salt, vanilla.

    Cookie Finishes

    Bowls of chocolate, sanding sugar, shortening and chopped, toasted pecans to finish the cookies

    Left to Right:

    Back Row: Chocolate, Sanding sugar. Front Row: Shortening and Toasted Pecans.

    • Pecans are toasted to bring out their maximum flavor. Be sure to cool them before processing.
    • Unsalted butter is used for the purest flavor.
    • Powdered sugar gives a softer texture to the cookie than would granulated sugar. Cookies made with powdered sugar have that melt-in-your-mouth quality.

    See recipe card for quantities.

    Variations

    A salted version can be made by adding sea salt to taste to the sanding sugar and pecans. Salt can also be added to the plain cookie finished with sanding sugar.

    Step-by-Step Instructions

    Dulce de Leche

    There are differences between sweetened condensed milk. Some are thicker, some thinner so the time it takes to caramelize the milk may take longer or shorter. You'll judge when it's done by the color and thickness. The really neat thing is if it isn't thick enough to use as a filling after it's cooled just put it back in the oven with the waterbath and bake it some more.

    A can of Eagle Brand condensed milk

    Step 1. Different brands of condensed milk have different thicknesses. Eagle brand is consistently thicker than most so I use it for this. If a thinner condensed milk is used, the baking time will increase.

    A 12 ounce can of sweetened condense milk is poured into an ovenproof bowl.

    Step 2. Pour a 12 ounce can of sweetened condensed milk into an oven-proof bowl.

    The bowl of condensed milk is placed in a larger oven proof container in order to water bath it.

    Step 3. Place the bowl with the condensed milk into a larger, ovenproof container to make a waterbath.

    For the sake of safety, the bowls are placed on a rimmed baking sheet to make it easier to move into the oven.

    Step 4. The water bath will get very hot. For ease of moving and for safety, place the water bath on a rimmed baking sheet.

    The bowl of condensed milk is tightly covered with aluminum foil.

    Step 5. Cover the bowl tightly with aluminum foil to keep the condensed milk creamy while it thickens. Fill the bottom container with hot water at least halfway up the bowl. Bake for 2 hours or more until dark and very thick.

    Dark brown Dulce-de-leche cooked down to a thick consistency.

    Step 6. Dark brown Dulce-de-leche cooked down to a thick consistency.. Cool completely before using. If it is at all lumpy when you stir it, smooth it out by whisking.

    Pecan Shortbread Cookies

    The toasted pecans and flour are placed in the bowl of a food processor.

    Step 1. Place the toasted pecans and flour in the bowl of the food processor.

    The nuts and flour are processed until the nuts are finely chopped

    Step 2. Process the nuts and flour until the nuts are very finely chopped.

    The powdered sugar and salt are added to the processor bowl.

    Step 3. Add the powdered sugar and salt to the processor.

    The powdered sugar and salt are processed into the flour/pecan mixture.

    Step 4. Process to mix the powdered sugar and salt into the flour/pecan mix.

    Step 5. Place the softened butter and vanilla in a mixing bowl.

    The butter and vanilla are beaten until very creamy.

    Step 6. The butter and vanilla are beaten until very creamy and smooth.

    The flour mixture is added to the butter in the mixing bowl

    Step 7. Add the flour mixture to the butter in the mixing bowl.

    The mixture is beaten and the dough is finished.

    Step 8. Mix until the dough comes together.

    The dough is divided in half.

    Step 9. Divide the dough in half.

    Each half of the dough is rolled into a log.

    Step 10. Roll each half of the dough into a log.

    The logs are wrapped in plastic wrap and placed o a tray to be refrigerated.

    Step 11. The logs are wrapped in plastic wrap and placed on a tray to be refrigerated or frozen.

    Marking the dough with  a finger.

    Step 12. To more evenly cut the rolls, place your finger where you want the cut and cut straight down.

    A tray of unbaked cookies ready for the oven.

    Step 13. A Tray of unbaked cookies ready for the oven.

    Finishing the Cookies

    The sanding sugar and chopped pecans are combined in a bowl.

    Step 1. Combine the sugar and chopped pecans in a small bowl. Set aside.

    Milk chocolate in a bowl and shortening in a bowl.

    Step 2. Combine the milk chocolate and shortening. Microwave on half power to melt together or place over simmering water. Stir to blend together.

    Milk chocolate and shortening are melted in a small bowl.

    Step 3. Melt the chocolate and shortening in a small bowl to maximize the depth

    The Pecan cookies are dipped in chocolate and left plain, topped with a pecan and with the sugar-pecan mix

    Step 4. Pair the cookies for size. Dip the tops in chocolate. Leave plain, top with a pecan half or with the sugar-pecan mix.

    Dulche de leche pipied on the bottom of the cookies

    Step 5. Pipe the dulche de leche on the bottom of the cookies. Place the tops on and press down lightly to evenly distribute the filling.

    Tray of cookies finished with a pecan on top, pecan sugar, plain chocolate, plain cookies or topped with sanding sugar.

    Step 6. Tray of all the finished cookies. Left to right: With sanding sugar, plain, chocolate and pecan, plain chocolate and with the sugar-pecans.

    Recipe FAQs

    What are the storage requirements for leftovers?

    These may be held at room temperature for several days.

    What do you do if the dulce de leche is not thick enough to stay put between the cookies?

    Bake it some more following the original instructions. Make this several days ahead so it is ready when you need it.

    How can I make bigger cookies if they are too small?

    I have made them the cookies are small because they are so rich. If you want bigger cookies, just make the cookie roll larger in size. The cookies don't spread much in the oven so they will be just a bit bigger than the size of roll.

    Expert Tips

    Piping the dulce de leche onto the cookie makes it much easier. I used a #3 plain tip. Lacking a pastry bag, cut the corner off of a heavy plastic bag and use that.

    When dipping the top of the cookies, make sure the bowl of chocolate is small and narrow so the chocolate remains deep and not spread out.

    Other Delicious Cookies to Consider

    • Zippy Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads
      Cheddar Pecan Shortbreads
    • Toasted coconut and macadamia nuts are the basis of these heart shaped shorbreads on a lattice plate over purple.
      Tropical Shortbread Cookies
    • A bunch of French Butter Cookies, Petit Beurre, on a plate. They are rectangular cookies with holes throughout them and have browned edges
      French Butter Cookies - Petit Beurre
    • Levain Style Chocolate Chip Cookies is huge and loaded with chips.
      Levain Style Chocolate Chip Cookies

    Love this recipe or any other on my site? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card & consider leaving a review in the comments further down.  Star ratings help people discover my recipes online. Your support means a great deal to me. Thank you.

    Dulche de leche cookies with the five finishes - pecan, pecan and sugar, plain chocolate, plain cookie, with sanding sugar

    Dulce de Leche Cookies - Your Way

    Helen S. Fletcher
    The dulce de leche filling is as easy as pouring a can of condensed milk in a bowl and baking it for a couple of hours. I've provided several ways to finish the cookies, from simple to extravagant - all elegant and looking like they came from a bakery.  While this recipe looks like it might be a challenge, it is really quite easy and very much worthwhile.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 12 minutes mins
    Inactive Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 2 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine American
    Servings 40 sandwich cookies
    Calories 117 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Dulce de Leche

    • 1- 12 ounce sweetened condensed milk

    Pecan Shortbread Cookies

    • 1 cup toasted pecans (114 grams or 4 ounces)
    • 1 ½ cups all purpose flour (210 grams or 6 ounces)
    • ⅓ cup powdered sugar + 1 tablespoon (45 grams or 1 ½ ounces)
    • ⅓ teaspoon salt
    • 10 tablespoons butter (140 grams, 5 ounces or 1 ¼ sticks)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla

    Finishes for the Cookies

    • 4 ounces milk chocolate good quality
    • 1 tablespoon shortening such as crisco or food grade cocoa butter
    • ¼ cup toasted pecans finely chopped
    • 2 to 3 tablespoons sanding sugar
    • Pecan halves

    Instructions
     

    Dulce de Leche

    • Preheat the oven to 425°F.
    • Pour the condensed milk into an oven proof dish.  Cover it tightly with foil.
    • Place it in a large dish or pan and fill the bottom pan with hot water at least half way up the dulce de leche dish.
    • Bake it for 1 ½ hours.  Remove the foil (be careful of the steam - take the foil off pointing away from you.)  Check the color and the thickness.  If it isn't thick enough, recover, add more water and bake for another 15 minutes.  Check it, repeat if necessary.
    • Cool completely.  If it is at all lumpy when you stir it, smooth it out by whisking. 

    Pecan Shortbread Cookies

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.  Place the pecans on a baking tray and toast for 5 to 9 minutes depending upon if  the pecans are cut or whole.  They will be come fragrant and pick up a little color.
    • Line several baking sheets with parchment paper and set aside.
    • Combine the flour and pecans in the bowl of a processor.  Process  until the nuts are very finely cut in.  
    • Add the powdered sugar and salt and pulse several times to mix.
    • Beat the butter and vanilla in a mixing bowl until creamy.  Add the flour/pecan mixture and mix until it comes together. 
    • Divide the dough in half (about 255 grams or about 9 ounces each).  Roll each piece into a 12" log.  This will make baked cookies about 1 ½ inches.  If you want larger cookies, roll into a 10" log.  The cookies don't spread much so they are a little bigger than unbaked. 
    • Wrap in plastic wrap refrigerate to firm up or freeze for longer storage.
    • If using sanding sugar to finish the tops or sanding sugar with salt mix the sea salt to taste with the sugar.  Set aside.
    • Cut the cookies about ⅓" thick.  At the bakery, this was easiest to do by putting our fingernail where we wanted to cut, placing the knife next to it and slicing straight down.  Place on parchment paper lined baking sheets.  Sprinkle liberally with the sanding sugar or sanding sugar with salt.
    • Bake for 10 to 12 minutes until the edges begin to color.  

    Finishing the Cookies

    • Combine the chocolate and shortening or cocoa butter and melt it over hot water or microwave at half power until melted.  Stir well.  Do not whisk as it is too easy to incorporate air bubbles, which you definitely do not want.  
    • Place the glaze in a narrow container as it will be easier to dip the cookies.   Dip the top of each cookie and set on parchment or waxed paper.  Immediately, top the cookie with a pecan half or the sugar/pecan or sugar/pecan/salt mixture.  
    • Allow to set for several  hours or refrigerate briefly to set.
    • Pair the cookies for size and shape.
    • Turn the bottom cookie upside down with its mate above it right side up.  Fit a piping bag with a #3 plain tip.  Pipe a mound of dulce de leche  on the bottom cookie.  Immediately place the top cookie on, pressing down lightly to move the filling to the edges.
    • After the glaze is set, the cookies can be stored at room temperature.  If you are in a hurry, refrigerate them briefly.  This may dull the glaze somewhat.  They can be stored at room temperature for several days. 

    Notes

    • If, after the dulce de leche cools, it is not thick enough to stay put between the cookies, just bake it some more following the original instructions. Make this several days ahead so it is ready when you need it.
    • As I have made them, the cookies are small because they are so rich. If you want bigger cookies, just make the cookie roll larger in size. The cookies don't spread much in the oven, so they will be just a bit bigger than the size of roll. 
    • Piping the dulce de leche onto the cookie makes it much easier. I used a #3 plain tip. Lacking a pastry bag, cut the corner off of a heavy plastic bag and use that. 
    • When dipping the top of the cookies, make sure the bowl the chocolate on the small and narrow side so the chocolate remains deep and not spread out. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 117kcalCarbohydrates: 12gProtein: 2gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 11mgSodium: 54mgPotassium: 61mgFiber: 1gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 114IUVitamin C: 0.3mgCalcium: 31mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Super Fast and Easy Brioche Rolls

    Modified: Nov 5, 2025 · Published: Dec 12, 2022 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 18 Comments

    Two Brioche Rolls are on a plate with a jar of jam.

    These updated, super-fast, and easy Brioche Rolls are the perfect complement to any special dinner and never more so than during the holidays.  When I say super easy, I mean super easy.  Just a quick turn in a food processor and the dough is are ready to rise.

    Two Brioche Rolls are on a plate with a jar of jam.

    The dough can be made up to 3 days ahead before shaping. The baked rolls can be frozen for several months well wrapped.

    Brioche is a base recipe that can be used in many different ways, both sweet and savory. It is an enriched bread meaning it is made with eggs, butter, and cream.  I have used it for the Raspberry Mascarpone Tarte Tropezienne, Glazed Lemon Twists in 60 Second Brioche, Lemon Gooey Butter Cake in a Brioche Crust and Twice Baked Brioche - A Breakfast Treat.

    If you're looking for a couple of other fast and easy dinner rolls, check out Outback Steakhouse Bread, and the super easy Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients for Brioche Rolls include, butter, eggs, bread flour, sugar, salt, and yeast,

    Photos read left to right.

    Back Row: unsalted cubed butter, eggs, bread flour. Middle Row: water, sugar . Front Row: instant yeast, salt, cream, sugar for starter.

    Butter - unsalted butter is used. The butter is cut into small pieces and must be kept cold before using.

    Eggs - size large are used.

    Bread flour is used for its high protein count which allows a higher rise. Because this dough includes a lot of eggs, butter and cream, it is a slow riser. The bread flour assists in the rising.

    Instant Yeast is used for a quick start to the sponge.

    See recipe card for quantities

    Instructions

    2 tablespoons of bread flour is removed from the measured amount.

    Step 1. Remove 3 tablespoons of bread flour from the measured amount.

    The 2 tablespoons of flour are combined in a bowl with the yeast, water and a pinch of sugar.

    Step 2. Add lukewarm water, yeast and a pinch of sugar to the 2 tablespoons of flour. Stir together until combined.

    The mixed sponge is covered and allowed to double before adding it to the other ingredients.

    Step 3. Cover the sponge and let it rise until double in bulk - about 20 minutes.

    The sponge is in a bowl and is bubbly and has doubled in bulk

    Step 4. The sponge is bubbly and has risen to at least twice its size. It's ready to be used.

    Flour, salt and sugar is added to the processor bowl.

    Step 5. Place the remainder of the flour, salt and sugar in the bowl of a food processor. Process for few seconds to mix.

    Cold, cubed butter is placed over the flour mixture in the processo.

    Step 6. Place the cold butter cubes over the flour mixture in the processor.

    The butter and flour mixture is processed until the butter is indistinguishable.

    Step 7. Process the butter and flour mixture until the butter is indistinguishable.

    The eggs, cream and  yeast are added to the processor bowl.

    Step 8. Add the eggs, yeast and cream to the processor.

    The ingredients are processed continuously until a batter is formed.

    Step 9. The ingredients are processed continuously until a batter is formed - about 25 to 30 seconds. Do not stop the processor until completely mixed.

    The batter is moved from the processor to a bowl to rise.

    Step 10. Place the batter in a bowl or container sprayed with a non-stick baking release to rise. Place plastic wrap directly on top of the batter. Cover the bowl and mark the time on it. Let it rise until doubled, 2 to 3 hours. Stir down and refrigerate overnight.

    An Easy Way to Clean the Processor

    The food processor is one of the most useful pieces of baking equipment in a kitchen. As a former consultant to Cuisinarts, I learned a lot of the ins and outs of this machine. Food Processor Tips When Baking is where I share some of them. Below is one of the most useful.

    The majority of the batter has been removed from the processor

    Step 1. Leaving the bowl on the base with the blade, remove as much batter as you can from the processor bowl.

    Pulse the processor several times and the remaining batter will be flung to the sides of the bowl, cleaning the blade.

    Step 2. Pulse the processor several times and the batter will be flung to the sides of the bowl.

    Remove the blade from the processor bowl and scoop out the remaining batter.

    Step 3. Remove the blade and bowl from the processor and scoop out the rest of the batter with a rubber spatula.

    Shaping the Brioche Rolls

    The dough will be very easy to work. Because it is enriched with eggs, butter and cream, it has no elasticity. It is important to work the dough cold.

    The dough is divided into 8 pieces about 85 grams or 3 ounces each.

    Step 1. Divide the dough into 8 pieces about 85 grams or 3 ounces each.

    For each roll, all the sides of one piece of dough are tucked underneath to obtain a smooth ball on top

    Step 2. Tuck all the sides of the dough underneath to obtain a smooth ball on top.

    The roll with the sides that have been tucked underneath are firmly pinched together are held in my hand.

    Step 3. Firmly pinch the sides together.

    To shape the rolls, cup your hand over the top side of the roll.

    Step 4. Turn the roll over and place on a work surface. Lightly flour the surface if needed. Cup your hand over the top side of the roll.

    the cupped hand completely encloses the roll.

    Step 5. Enclose the roll completely under your cupped hand. With light to medium pressure, rotate the roll clockwise or counter clockwise until the roll is a smooth ball.

    The finished roll is a smooth ball.

    Step 6. Continue to rotate the roll until a smooth ball is formed. Repeat with the next 7 rolls.

    The rolls have been place in brioche forms and in Texas muffin cups.

    Step 7. Spray the brioche molds or Texas muffin cups with a non-stick baking release. Place the rolls in them, cover with a tea towel and let rise until almost doubled about 2 to 3 hours.

    Four brioche rolls in traditional brioche molds

    Step 8. Four brioche rolls in traditional brioche molds with fluted side.

    The rolls are being egg washed so they will obtain a golden sheen when baked.

    Step 9. Egg wash the rolls to obtain a golden sheen when baked.

    The rolls are finished with a sprinkling of sesame seeds.

    Step 10. Finish the rolls with a sprinkling of sesame seeds.

    Variations

    Since this is a base recipe, it can be varied endlessly. Here are some that I like.

    Cheesy Brioche - Add 6 ounces (170 grams or 1 ½ cups) of any hard cheese such as cheddar, asiago or parmesan to 1 basic recipe of brioche at the end of incorporating the butter.  

    Lemon Brioche – Depending upon how lemony you want it, add the grated rind of 1 to 2 large lemons (2 to 3 tablespoons) with the flour.

    Orange Brioche – Again depending upon how orange you want it, add the grated rind of 1 or 2 medium to large oranges with the flour.

    Herbed Brioche – any single herb or combinations of herbs, fresh or dried may be added.  1 to 2 teaspoons for dried or 1 to 2 tablespoons if fresh.

    Brioche Sugar Buns – After the final egg wash, sprinkle with Swedish Pearl Sugar .  Lemon or orange can be added to the dough as above.   

    Storage

    The beauty of these is they can be made ahead at several points.

    After the dough is made and risen, it has to be refrigerated to shape the rolls. It can wait up to three days before shaping.

    After baking, the rolls can be well wrapped (individually is best) and frozen up to two months. Unwrap and thaw them at room temperature. Heat at 350°F for about 10 to 15 minutes to give them that "just baked" taste.

    Top Tips

    1. Keep the processor running until the dough, which is more like a batter, is completely mixed. The machine has a tendency to stall if turned off and then turned back on because of the consistency of the dough.
    2. A sponge is used when the yeast needs to be increased without adding additional dried yeast. This is particularly important for rich doughs that use eggs, butter, sugar, and/or cream. These slow the growth of the yeast so there needs to be a way of speeding it up without imparting a "yeasty" taste. So a bit of flour, water and dried yeast is mixed together. As it sits, the yeast is activated and many, many more yeast cells are formed giving the dough a head start to the rising process.
    3. It is important to keep the dough cold while shaping it. Because of the large amount of butter, the dough can soften fairly easily. To prevent this, after portioning out the rolls, keep them refrigerated and shape one at a time.
    4. These take longer to rise after shaping because they are cold and the dough contains a lot of inhibitors.
    5. If you're wondering where the title "Sixty Second Brioche" comes from, it takes about that much time in the processor. Fast, very fast!
    6. When applying the egg wash, do not let it run down the side of the pan. Just keep it on the roll.
    7. The size of the brioche tin I use is 3 ½" wide x 1 ½" deep.
    Two Brioche Rolls are on a plate with a jar of jam.

    Super Fast and Easy Brioche Rolls

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These updated, super-fast and easy, Brioche Rolls are the perfect complement to any special dinner and never more so than during the holidays.  When I say super easy, I mean super easy.  Just a quick turn in a food processor and the dough is are ready to rise. 
    No ratings yet
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    5 hours hrs
    Total Time 5 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
    Course Bread
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 Rolls
    Calories 337 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Brioche Rolls

    • 1 ½ teaspoon instant yeast
    • 2 tablespoons warm water (105 to 115 degrees)
    • Pinch of sugar
    • 2 ¼ cups bread flour (315 grams or 11 ounces)
    • 1 ½ tablespoons sugar
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¾ cup unsalted butter cold (170 grams or 6 ounces or 1 ½ sticks)
    • 3 eggs room temperature
    • ¼ cup light cream or half and half room temperature

    To Finish

    • 1 egg well beaten
    • Sesame seeds as needed

    Instructions
     

    Making the Brioche

    • In a small bowl, place 3 tablespoons of flour from the measured flour, the yeast and a pinch of sugar.  Stir in 2 tablespoons of warm water.  
    • Cover with plastic wrap and allow to double in bulk – about 15 to 20 minutes. 
    • In a food processor fitted with the steel blade, place the remaining flour, salt and sugar.  
    • Process 5 seconds to mix.   
    • Cut the cold butter into small pieces and place in a circle over the dry ingredients.  
    • Process until the butter is indistinguishable in the mixture, about 20 seconds.   
    • Scrape down and process 20 seconds more.  Place the eggs in a circle over the dry ingredients, pour the cream over the eggs, and add the sponge, also in a circle.  
    • Process approximately 25 seconds until the ball, which initially forms, breaks down into a creamy, evenly dispersed batter in the processor bowl.  Do not stop processing until this batter is formed, as the motor may stall when you try to restart it.
    • If it doesn't break down after the allowed time, that's fine.  Just continue with the instructions.
    • For an easy way to clean the dough off  the blade, pulse the processor several times.  The centrifugal force will throw most of the dough off.  Remove the blade and scoop the remainder out.
    • The dough, which is more like a batter, will be very sticky and that is as it should be.  Remove it from the processor bowl and place in a bowl sprayed with a non-stick baking release.  
    • Place plastic wrap directly on top of the batter and cover with a towel.  Let rise at room temperature 2 ½ to 3 hours, longer if the room is cool until doubled in bulk.  Stir down with a spoon, re-cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate overnight.  The dough may or may not rise again in the refrigerator.  It doesn’t make a difference.  Deflate the dough and use as directed.
    • Note:  This dough may be held in the refrigerator up to 3 days before serving. 
    • Yield:  About 715 grams or about 25 ounces. 

    Shaping the Rolls

    • Spray 8 brioche tins or Texas muffin cups with a non-stick baking release.  Set aside.
    • Divide the dough into 8 equal pieces of 85 grams or 3 ounces each.  Refrigerate.
    • Working with one piece at a time, tuck all the edges underneath.  Pinch together tightly.
    • Place the roll pinched side down on the work surface.  Cup your hand over the roll and rotate it clockwise or counter clockwise to form a smooth, rounded ball.  Place in a tin or cup.  Repeat with the remaining 7 pieces of dough.
    • Cover with a tea towel and let rise until almost doubled in bulk.  
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.  
    • While the oven preheats, beat the egg well.  Brush the tops of each roll with the egg.  Repeat again just before baking and sprinkle with the sesame seeds.
    • Bake for 20 to 25 minutes until deep golden brown.

    Notes

    1. Keep the processor running until the dough, which is more like a batter, is completely mixed. The machine has a tendency to stall if turned off and then turned back on.
    2. A sponge is used when the yeast needs to be increased without adding additional dried yeast. This is particularly important for rich doughs that use eggs, butter, sugar, and/or cream. These slow the growth of the yeast so there needs to be a way of speeding it up without impartng a "yeasty" taste. So a bit of flour, water and dried yeast is mixed together. As it sits, the yeast is activated and many, many more yeast cells are made. 
    3. It is important to keep the dough cold while shaping it. Because of the large amount of butter, the dough can soften fairly easily. To prevent this, after portioning out the rolls, keep them in the refrigerator except for the one you are shaping. 
    4. These take longer to rise after shaping because they are cold and the dough contains a lot of inhibitors. 
    5. If you're wondering where the title "Sixty Second Brioche" comes from, it take about that much time in the processor. Fast, very fast!
    6. When applying the egg wash, do not let it run down the side of the pan. Just keep it on the roll so it doesn't stick the roll to the pan while baking.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 337kcalCarbohydrates: 29gProtein: 8gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 12gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 130mgSodium: 186mgPotassium: 102mgFiber: 1gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 678IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 32mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Bajadera - A No Bake Cookie Bar

    Modified: Jul 25, 2025 · Published: Dec 5, 2022 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 15 Comments

    Bajadera - No Bake Cookie Bars are layered hazelnut bars topped with chocolate.

    You will love this concept because it is a no bake cookie bar and the layering adds a sophistication not often seen in this type of cookie. But the real surprise is that it is not too sweet but intensely flavored.  

    No Bake Cookie Bar - Bajadera

    Bajadera (Bah-ya-deh-ra) has been in existence since the early 1900’s having been a specialty of the Kraš Confectionary Company in Zagreb Croatia.

    It was named after an oriental dancer, and its shape and the unique layering make Bajadera one of the most popular sweet treats in Croatia, Serbia, Bosnia, and Macedonia, all of whom claim it today. 

    Be sure to check out the Mexican Chocolate Brownies for a quick treat.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients for the No Bake Cookie Bar - Petit Beurre cookies, sugar, water, unsalted butter, semisweet chocolate and hazelnuts.

    All ingredients are listed left to right.

    Top Row: Petit Beurre Cookies, granulated sugar, water. Bottom Row: unsalted butter, semisweet chocolate, toasted hazelnuts.

    • Petit Beurre Cookies - can be the ones in last week's blog or they can be purchased online as well as some specialty food shops featuring European items.
    • Unsalted butter is used for clarity of taste.
    • Hazelnuts are toasted to intensify the flavor.
    • Semisweet Chocolate - I use Callebaut Callets professionally and at home. They look like chocolate chips but aren't. I don't recommend using chocolate chips.

    Chocolate Glaze

    Ingredients for the chocolate glaze, semisweet chocolate and shortening for the No Bake Cookie Bar

    Left to right: shortening (such as Crisco) and semisweet chocolate.

    See recipe card for quantities of ingredients.

    Instruction

    Hazelnuts on a tray ready to be toasted.

    Step 1. Hazelnuts ready to be toasted. For a quick and easy way to remove the skins, see Hazelnut Gianduja Cake. Cool the nuts completely before processing

    Step 2. Line an 8x8 inch square pan with a piece of parchment paper 8x16 inches letting the excess hang over the sides.

    Step 3. Melt the chocolate in a double boiler over simmering water or at half power in the microwave. Set aside.

    Half the cookies and half the nuts are in the processor bowl.

    Step 4. Place half the nuts and half the cookies in a processor bowl.

    Step 5. Process the cookies and nuts as finely as possible being careful not to turn them to a paste.

    Step 6. Transfer them to a mixer bowl. Repeat with the second half of the cookies and nuts. Set aside.

    Step 7. Place the water and sugar in a medium saucepan. Stir to combine.

    Step 8. Bring the syrup to a boil.

    Step 9. Wash down the sides of the pan with a brush dipped in cold water. Alternatively, a tight fitting lid can be placed on top for 3 minutes.

    The sugar syrup is brought to a boil in the saucepan.

    Step 10. Bring the syrup to 238°F on a thermometer. Remove from the heat and add the butter to stop the cooking.

    The sugar syrup has been added to the cookie and nuts in the bowl of the mixer for the No Bake Cookie Bar

    Step 11. Pour the syrup over the cookie and nut mixture in the mixing bowl. Beat on low to combine completely. It may be soft at this point, but will firm up as it cools.

    The dough is divided in half in bowls.

    Step 12. Divide the dough in half - about 410 grams or 14 ⅓ ounces each piece. Remove ½ cup, 100 grams or 3 ½ ounces from one piece and add it to the other piece.

    The melted chocolate is added to the bowl with less plain dough in it.

    Step 13. Add the melted chocolate to the bowl with less plain dough in it.

    The chocolate dough is divided in half for the No Bake Cookie Bars.

    Step 13. Divide the chocolate dough in half - about 215 grams or 7 ½ ounces.

    The chocolate bottom layer is pressed firmly into the pan.

    Step 14. Press half the chocolate dough firmly in the bottom of the prepared pan. If it is at all soft, freeze for 5 minutes to keep the layers from dipping into each other.

    After the plain layer is divided in half, one half is placed on the chocolate base layer.

    Step 15. After the plain layer is divided in half, 230 grams or 8 ounces, one half is placed on the chocolate base layer.

    One half of the plain layer is pressed firmly over the bottom chocolate layer.

    Step 16. Press the plain dough firmly over the chocolate base. Freeze for five minutes if it is at all soft. Repeat with the chocolate and plain layer as above. Do not freeze the plain layer after it is pressed onto the top.

    Chocolate Glaze

    Chocolate and shortening in a bowl for the top glaze.

    Step 17. Place the chocolate and shortening in a bowl to be melted.

    The chocolate and shortening are melted and stirred together.

    Step 18. Melt the chocolate and shortening over simmering water or at half power in the microwave and stir together.

    The glaze for the No Bake Cookie Bar is poured over the top layer in the pan.

    Step 19. Pour the glaze over the top layer of the bars.

    The pan is tilted from side to side and up and down to distribute the glaze evenly over the base.

    Step 20. Tilt the pan from side to side and up and down to distribute the glaze evenly, making sure to get into the corners. Refrigerate overnight.

    Releasing and Cutting the Bars

    A hair dryer is held close to the pan with the No Bake Cookie Bar to heat the side so the cookie can release cleanly.

    Step 21. Hold a hair dryer set on high close to the pan with the No Bake Cookie Bar to heat the sides so the cookie can release cleanly. Go around the entire pan to heat all the sides. Be careful not to melt the chocolate.

    The No Bake Cookie Bar is lifted out of the pan and place on the work area still on the paper.

    Step 22. Lift the bar out of the pan using the parchment that overlaps the sides. Leave it on the paper.

    A dry, hot knife melts through the chocolate layer and cuts straight down.

    Step 23. To cut the bars cleanly, heat a knife under very hot water. Dry immediately on a paper towel. Melt through the chocolate layer and cut straight down. Pull the knife out at the bottom. Do not pull it out at the top or the bar will be smeared with chocolate. Do not use a sawing motion. Repeat the heating and drying for each cut.

    The No Bake Cookie Bars are cut 4 down and 7 across.

    Step 24. The bars, still on the paper are cut 4 down and 7 or 8 across. These are very rich and small bars are ideal.

    Substitutions

    All almonds or half almonds may be used. Toast the nuts as for hazelnuts.

    Storage

    The bars may be stored at room temperature for several days or refrigerated for longer storage.  Bring to room temperature before serving.  

    Expert Tips

    • Be sure to toast the nuts and cool them for the best, most intense flavor. This can be done days ahead.
    • Combining chocolate with a bit of shortening such as Crisco ensures a smooth finish that reduces the chance of a grey or mottled finish to the glaze which is caused by the chocolate becoming untempered. Oil and butter should not be used because they will not set up firmly at room temperature.
    This Bajadera, a no bake bar, consists of a cookie and nut base in alternate layers of plain and chocolate finished with a chocolate glaze.

    Bajadera - A No Bake Cookie Bar

    Helen S. Fletcher
    You will love this concept because it is a no bake cookie bar and the layering adds a sophistication not often seen in this type of cookie. But the real surprise is that it is not too sweet, but intensely flavored.  
    Bajadera (Bah-ya-deh-ra) has been in existence since the early 1900’s having been a specialty of the Kraš Confectionary Company in Zagreb Croatia. It is the pride of Croatia, Serbia, Bosnia, and Macedonia, all of whom claim it today. 
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 45 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Bars
    Cuisine Croatian
    Servings 32 bars
    Calories 211 kcal

    Equipment

    • Candy Thermometer Should go to at least 300°F
    • 8"x8" baking pan
    • Food Processor
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    For the Base

    • 7 ounces blanched hazelnuts almonds or half and half (200 grams)
    • 3 ½ ounces semisweet chocolate (100 grams)
    • 7 ounces Petit Beurre cookies* (200 grams)
    • ⅔ cup water
    • 1 ½ cups granulated sugar (300 grams or 10 ½ ounces)
    • ¾ cup unsalted butter cold and cut into small pieces (170 grams, 6 ounces or 1 ½ sticks)
    • *These cookies can be found on my blog French Butter Cookies - Petit Beurre, which I highly recommend, or they can be purchased online or in specialty food shops featuring European foods.

    Chocolate Base

    • 8 ounce semisweet chocolate (225 grams)
    • 2 tablespoons shortening

    Instructions
     

    The Dough Mixture

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.  Place the nuts on a rimmed baking sheet and toast for 7 to 10 minutes until fragrant and medium brown.  Cool completely.
    • Line an 8 x8 inch pan with a piece of parchment 8 x 16 inches letting the excess hang over the edges.  Only the bottom and two sides will be covered and that is as it should be.
    • Melt the chocolate over simmering water or in the microwave at half power.  Set aside.
    • Place half the nuts and half the cookies in a food processor and process until they are almost a powder but do not let them become a paste. Place the mixture in the bowl of a mixer.  Repeat with the second half of each. Set aside.
    • Bring the water and sugar to a boil in a medium size saucepan.  Wash down the sides of the pan with a brush dipped in cold water or place a tight fitting lid on the pan for 3 minutes. Remove the lid and boil to a temperature of 238°F.  Remove from the heat and immediately stir in the cold butter to stop the cooking.
    • Pour over the nut and cookie mixture in the mixing bowl and combine on low speed until completely mixed.  It may seem soft at this point but it will firm up as it cools.
    • Divide the dough in half (about 410 grams or 14 ⅓ ounces each piece).
    • Remove ½ cup (100 grams or 3 ½ ounces) from one piece and add it to the other piece. Add the melted chocolate to the smaller amount of dough.

    Assembly

    • Divide the chocolate dough in half (about 215 grams or 7 ¾ ounces) each piece.  Press one half firmly and evenly into the bottom of the prepared pan.  Freeze for about 5 minutes if it is at all soft.
    • Divide the plain dough in half (about 240 grams or 8 ½ ounces each piece).  Press one half on top of the chocolate dough.  Freeze for about 5 minutes if it is at all soft.
    • Repeat with the chocolate and plain dough.  Do not freeze after the plain dough has been pressed in on top.
    • Top with the Chocolate Glaze below.

    Chocolate Glaze

    • Combine the ingredients and microwave to melt them or place over simmering water until melted.  Whisk gently to mix completely. Immediately pour over the Bajadera and tilt the pan from side to side to completely cover the top with an even layer of chocolate.  Refrigerate overnight.

    Releasing and Cutting the Bars

    • Using a blow dryer, heat the sides of the pan briefly.  With the overhanging parchment, remove the cookies from the pan. Carefully, pull away the parchment.
    • While still on the parchment, cut into 8 pieces in one direction and 4 across in the other direction to make small bars.

    Notes

    1. Be sure to toast the nuts and cool them for the best, most intense flavor. This can be done days ahead.  For a quick and easy way to remove the skins of the hazelnuts, please see Hazelnut Gianduja Cake.
    2. Combining chocolate with a bit of shortening such as Crisco ensures a smooth finish that reduces the chance of a grey or mottled finish to the glaze which is caused by the chocolate becoming untempered. Oil and butter should not be used because they will not set up firmly at room temperature. 
    3. For petit four size cut the bars 8 in both directions for 64.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 211kcalCarbohydrates: 20gProtein: 2gFat: 14gSaturated Fat: 6gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 12mgSodium: 24mgPotassium: 107mgFiber: 1gSugar: 15gVitamin A: 145IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 16mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    French Butter Cookies - Petit Beurre

    Modified: May 27, 2025 · Published: Nov 28, 2022 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 14 Comments

    A bunch of French Butter Cookies, Petit Beurre, on a plate. They are rectangular cookies with holes throughout them and have browned edges

    These French Butter Cookies, Petit Beurre, are simple, buttery, crisp, barely sweet but addictive, easily made and last indefinitely.

    While these cookies are wonderful on their own they are also used in the no bake Bajadera cookie bar from Serbia or Croatia, both of whom claim it.  I'll be posting those next week.

    A bunch of French Butter Cookies, Petit Beurre, on a plate.  They are rectangular cookies with holes throughout them and have browned edges

    To get the requisite crispness these cookies are leavened with Ammonium Carbonate also known as baker’s ammonia.  Baking powder can be substituted but the cookies won’t be as crisp. They also benefit from being baked ahead and stored in an air tight container where they will last for weeks.

    Traditionally, these cookies have little extensions at each corner called "ears" and wavy edges. For the sake of expediency I omit the "ears" and use a pastry cutter when cutting the cookies. Plain edges are fine also.

    For more information on baking the best cookies see Cookie Tips for the Best Cookies. Another European Cookie that is naturally gluten free and great is the Viennese Lemon Valentines Cookie.

    Ingredients

    Flour, mil, butter, sugar,salt, vanilla, ad ammonia carbonate are the ingredients used for the French Butter Cookie

    All ingredients are listed left to right.

    Back Row: all-purpose flour, milk. Middle Row: unsalted butter, granulated sugar. Front row: ammonium carbonate, vanilla, salt.

    • Butter - Unsalted European butter with its higher fat content is best here since these depend upon butter for their flavor.
    • Ammonium Carbonate - Also known as Baker's Ammonia is used for the crispest cookies and crackers. While baking powder can be used the cookies won't be as crisp.
    A Bottle of ammonium carbonate or baker's ammonia

    See recipe card for quantities

    Instructions

    All-purpose flour,salt and ammonium carbonate or baking powder are placed in the bowl of a food processor

    Step 1. Flour, salt, and ammonium carbonate are placed in the bowl of a processor.

    The butter pieces are distributed over the flour in the bow of the processor

    Step 2. Cold, cut up butter is placed over the flour in the bowl of the processor.

    The butter is cut in until it is indistinguishable.

    Step 3. The ingredients are processed until the butter is indistinguishable.

    The milk and vanilla are combined in a cup.

    Step 4. The milk and vanilla are combined in a cup.

    The milk and vanilla are poured over the ingredients in the processor

    Step 5. The milk and vanilla are poured over the ingredients in the food processor.

    The mixture will process into large clumps.

    Step 6. The dough will process in large clumps first. Scrape down and continue processing, rearranging if needed to form a ball. It may take a bit before it does.

    The dough has been processed into a ball at this point.

    Step 7. The dough processed into a ball (mostly). The dough should be quite cold and ready to roll. If not, chill until cold but not hard.

    The dough is out of the processor and on the work surface.

    Step 8. The dough is out of the processor and placed on the work surface.

    The dough is brought together and flattened into a round

    Step 9. The dough is brought together and flattened into a round. Although the dough can be rolled all at once it is easier if divided in two.

    The flattened dough is placed between two pieces of waxed paper.

    Step 10. The round is placed between two pieces of waxed paper to be rolled out. Look at this post of cut out cookies for technique photos and why I prefer waxed paper to parchment or anything else.

    The dough is rolled between waxed paper and rolled about ⅛" thick

    Step 11. Roll the dough between two pieces of waxed paper to about ⅛"thick. Place it on a tray and refrigerate or freeze before cutting.

    Step 12. Cut into rectangles 1 ¼ x 2 ½ inches. Freeze again before transferring to baking pans. Bring dough scraps to room temperature and re-roll as necessary.

    Lifting the frozen cookie off the waxed paper with an offset spatula

    Step 13. Lift the frozen cookies off the waxed paper with an offset spatula. The cookies don't spread much so place them about 1" apart.

    The cookies are pricked 4 or 5 times down the legnth of the cookie before baking.

    Step 14. Prick the cookies with a fork four or five times down the length of the cookie.

    Baked French Butter Cookies on a tray

    Step 15. Tray of baked cookies on a tray.

    Equipment

    Pastry Wheel is used to make the traditional wavy edges as in the opening photo.

    Storage

    These cookies should be made ahead and stored in an airtight tin where they will last indefinitely.

    Top Tip

    Ammonium Carbonate or Baker's Ammonia is used as their leaving agent in Europe whenever a crisp cookie or cracker is desired. Be aware the smell is very strong - this is what is used to bring people who have fainted to so don't take a whiff. While some of the smell may permeate the kitchen while the cookies bake, no hint will be left in the cookies or the kitchen.

    These are easiest rolled very, very thin between wax paper and frozen before easily cutting them with a pastry wheel or just a knife.  The holes, made with a fork, are de rigueur.

    If using salted butter, reduce the salt to ¼ teaspoon.

    More Cookies I Think you Might Like:

    Langue de Chat

    Tropical Shortbread Cookies

    French Macarons with Chocolate and Raspberry Filling

    Sarah Bernhardts

    A bunch of French Butter Cookies, Petit Beurre, on a plate. They are rectangular cookies with holes throughout them and have browned edges

    French Butter Cookies - Petit Beurre

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These French Butter Cookies are barely sweet, simple little butter cookies that come from France where they are a much-loved cookie with tea, coffee or as a snack.  They are particularly good in recipes calling for crushed cookies.  
    5 from 4 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 40 minutes mins
    Cook Time 18 minutes mins
    Total Time 58 minutes mins
    Course Cookies
    Cuisine French
    Servings 60 cookies (up to 70)
    Calories 36 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups all-purpose flour (280 grams or 10 ounces)
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon ammonium carbonate or baking powder
    • ½ cup unsalted butter cold (114 grams or 4 ounces)
    • ½ cup sugar + 2 tablespoons (125 grams or 4 ⅓ ounces)
    • ⅓ cup milk whole or 2% can be used
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla

    Instructions
     

    • Place the flour, salt and ammonium carbonate or baking powder in the processor bowl. 
    • Cut the butter into little cubes and add it to the processor.  Process until the butter is indistinguishable. 
    • Add the sugar and process several seconds to mix. 
    • Combine the milk and vanilla; pour it over the ingredients in the processor and process.  Scrape down,    rearrange in the bowl and continue processing until a ball forms.  It may take a bit before it does.   It should be quite cold and easy to roll; if not refrigerate briefly to chill it. 
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F / 175°C.  Line several baking sheets with parchment paper.   
    • Divide the dough in half (about 300 grams or 10 ½ ounces each).  Place one piece between 2 pieces of wax paper and roll ⅛” thick.  Place on a baking sheet and freeze for a few minutes so they firm up. 
    • Remove the top piece of paper and measure strips 1 ¼” wide.  Cut with a pastry wheel or knife.  If the dough becomes soft, return it to the freezer.  Cut strips 2 ½” wide in the opposite direction.  You will have cookies that are 1 ¼” x 2 ½”.  Freeze until hard.
    • Remove the cookies to baking sheets, placing them about 1” apart.  Prick with a fork 4 or 5 times down the long side. 
    • Bake for 13 to 17 minutes until the edges are browned.  Cool completely.   
    • Repeat with the second piece of dough, adding the scraps from the first.   

    Notes

    If using salted butter, reduce the salt to ¼ teaspoon
    Ammonium Carbonate or Baker's Ammonia is used as their leaving agent in Europe whenever a crisp cookie or cracker is desired. Be aware the smell is very strong - this is what is used to bring people who have fainted to so don't take a whiff. While some of the smell may permeate the kitchen while the cookies bake, no hint will be left in the cookies or the kitchen. 
    These are easiest rolled very, very thin between wax paper and frozen before easily cutting them with a pastry wheel or just a knife.  The holes, made with a fork, are de rigueur.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 36kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 0.5gFat: 2gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.4gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 4mgSodium: 24mgPotassium: 7mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 49IUCalcium: 5mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    A Thanksgiving Roundup

    Modified: Jul 3, 2025 · Published: Nov 19, 2022 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · Leave a Comment

    Sweet potatoes, squash green and red peppers and red onions roasted in a honey and thyme

    Here are some last minute recipes for Thanksgiving including savory as well as sweet, from side dishes to desserts as well as breakfast treats. Most can be made ahead to save you time.

    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways
    These soft and fluffy Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways recipe, with its subtle spicing, is an easy peasy recipe that take no time to make but yield great taste.  These are perfect served with Thanksgiving dinner or a leftover turkey sandwich. Finishing them Swedish Pearl Sugar turns them into the perfect roll with a cup of coffee or tea in the morning.
    Check out this recipe
    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls and Breakfast Rolls out of one recipe
    The Smoked Turkey Salad is served in a lettuce cup on a green plate with a fork.
    Smoked Turkey Salad
    This quickly made Smoked Turkey Salad, came from my take out shop. A few easy to get ingredients with the star being the smoked turkey are easily assembled into this winner of an entree salad.
    Serve it with cold fresh cantaloupe or watermelon and a piece of good bread and dinner is ready!
    Check out this recipe
    Dutch Peach Pie
    Fresh summer peaches just beg to be made into this amazing looking Dutch Peach Pie, which is one of the most sensational tasting pies around. While this is not a recipe that you'll make in twenty minutes, it's worth every second it takes. 
    Check out this recipe
    A slice of Dutch Peach Pie on a white lace plate with a fork beside it.
    Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart
    Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart
    This Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart is a twist on the traditional pecan pie and is the perfect tart to sit next to a pumpkin pie for Thanksgiving. The toasted pecans are sandwiched between a deep chocolate ganache and a homemade caramel which is very easy to make.
    Check out this recipe
    Apple Fritters with Speculaas Spice
    Apple Fritters with Speculaas Spice are a great way to welcome the fall. These warm and crispy treats are only  30 minutes away when you follow this easy recipe.  The Speculaas spice used in the batter and for the sugar coating gives a deeper flavor than cinnamon alone and can be used anywhere gingerbread spice is needed.  
    Check out this recipe
    Speculaas Spiced Apple Fritters
    Cranberry Orange Muffins in three sizes, mini, regular and Texas on a gray plate with a red napkin.
    A Cranberry Orange Muffin
    A Cranberry Orange Muffin recipe features the flavors of fall fruit and is quickly made featuring fresh or frozen cranberries and orange zest.  A great recipe for beginner bakers. 
    Check out this recipe
    A cookie crust, peanut butter filling and chocolate topping make up the No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
    No Bake Peanut Butter Bars
    These No Bake Peanut Butter Bars fall into the ridiculously easy category and are great for something to do with the kids. A chocolatey crust, insanely delicious, smooth, and creamy filling and a just right chocolate top, make these one of the best bars around.
    Check out this recipe
    Spice Bars
    This recipe for Spice Bars is one of those fantastic treasures where you make the base, press it into a pan, add a few more ingredients to the reserved amount, pour it on top, and bake.  It couldn't be easier. 
    Check out this recipe
    Spice bars ready to eat surrounded by spices.

    Want more Holiday Recipes? Check out our Holiday Roundup!

    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways

    Modified: Jul 24, 2025 · Published: Nov 14, 2022 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 6 Comments

    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls and Breakfast Rolls out of one recipe

    These Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways with their subtle spicing are an easy recipe that take no time to make but yield great taste. This make ahead, foolproof dough can go from dinner roll to breakfast roll with the addition of one ingredient.

    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls and Breakfast Rolls out of one recipe

    To make Thanksgiving easier, these golden, soft and fluffy pumpkin rolls can be made ahead and frozen.

    A couple of other easy, exceptionally tasty dinner rolls include, Outback Steakhouse Bread and the Super Fast snd Easy Brioche Rolls made in 60 seconds in the processor.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients used to make Pumpkin Dinner Rolls

    Back Row: Flour,milk and canned pumpkin. Second from Back Row: honey, instant mashed potato flakes, egg, butter. Third from Back Row: cloves, salt, ginger, vanilla. Front Row: nutmeg, instant yeast, cinnamon

    • Milk can be whole or 2%. Milk makes a softer yeast roll that remains soft.
    • Pumpkin is canned pumpkin but do not accidentally use pumpkin pie filling. They are different.
    • Instant Mashed Potato flakes are used because they add moisture and softness to the rolls and for this small amount it is a lot easier than cooking and mashing a potato.
    • Egg is size large
    • Butter is salted or unsalted. It makes no difference in this recipe. The salt in the recipe doesn't need to be adjusted.
    • Instant Yeast is specified but if not available and using active dry yeast, increase the yeast to 2 ¼ teaspoons. I use instant yeast in my yeasted recipes because it doesn't require dissolving in liquid and it acts a bit faster. The most important requirement of either yeast is to make sure it does not come in direct contact with salt. Yeast is a living organism and can be killed by contact with salt.
    • Swedish Pearl Sugar is a special sugar I love to use as a finish to sweet baked goods. It stays bone white and doesn't melt in the heat of the oven. It, of course, adds sweetness but also crunch. It can be found online.

    See recipe for exact amounts of ingredients for the Pumpkin Dinner Rolls

    Instructions

    The milk, butter, honey and potato flakes cooling in the saucepan.

    Step 1. The milk, butter, honey and instant mashed potato flakes in a saucepan after being heated together. They should be cooled to room temperature before using.

    The pumpkin, egg and vanilla in the mixing bowl

    Step 2. The pumpkin, egg and vanilla in the mixing bowl.

    The pumpkin, egg and vanilla mixed together in the mixing  bowl.

    Step 3: The pumpkin, egg an vanilla are blended together in the mixing bowl.

    The milk, butter, honey and potato flakes are added to the egg, pumpkin and vanilla in the mixing bowl.

    Step 4. The cooled milk mixture is added to the pumpkin mixture in the mixing bowl.

    Step 5. The mixtures in steps 3 and 4 are combined in the mixing bowl.

    The flour, spices, yeast, and salt are whisked together before being added to the liquids in the mixing bowl.

    Step 6. The flour, spices, salt, and yeast should be whisked together before adding to the liquid in the mixing bowl.

    Step 7. The flour with spices and yeast are added to to the mixing bowl.

    Pumpkin Dinner Roll dough completely mixed in bowl.

    Step 8. The dough is completely mixed and cleans the bowl. It is soft and a bit sticky and that is how it should be.

    The Pumpkin Dinner Roll dough in placed in an oiled container to rise.  It is covered with plastic wrap and a lid.

    Step 9. The dough is place in a container that has been sprayed with a non-stick baking release. It is covered directly with plastic wrap and a lid. It will take 2 ½ to 3 hours to double in bulk. At this point refrigerate the dough for 5 to 6 hours, overnight or up to 3 days before shaping.

    After chilling, the dough is divided into 10 equal pieces

    Step 10. After chilling, the dough is divided into 10 equal pieces by weight.

    The dough rolled into a log with several pieces cut off to make the Pumpkin Dinner Rolls

    Step 11. Alternatively, the dough can be rolled into a 10" log and then cut into 10 equal pieces.

    The dough for one roll gathered up from the edges of the ball.

    Step 12. Take one piece of dough and flatten into a round. Gather the edges and bring them to the center of the dough. Pinch them together so there are no loose ends.

    The roll has been turned over to finish the shaping

    Step 13. The roll has been turned over so the pinched edges are now on the bottom.

    The roll is partially covered with a cupped hand.

    Step 14. The roll is partially covered with a cupped hand for the final shaping.

    The roll is completely covered with the palm of your hand.

    Step 15. The roll is completely covered with the cupped palm of your hand. It is rotated, with moderate pressure on the roll, counter clockwise in a circle several times to seal the edges under-neath. Repeat the circling until the bottom is even and no edges are sticking out.

    The shaped Pumpkin Dinner Roll

    Step 16. The shaped dinner roll.

    10 Pumpkin Dinner Rolls on a sheet tray

    Step 17. Ten Pumpkin dinner rolls on a half sheet tray.

    The rolls are covered on a sheet tray to rise

    Step 18. The rolls are covered while they rise.

    Step 19. The risen dinner rolls that have been brushed with egg wash. Five of them are halfway finished with Swedish Pearl Sugar for breakfast rolls. The easiest way to do this is cup your hand behind the roll and generously apply the sugar getting as far down to the bottom as possible.

    Five of the dinner rolls have been finished with Swedish Pearl Sugar.

    Step 20. The tray was turn around so the unsugared part is facing you and the Swedish Pearl Sugar is applied again to completely cover the roll. Press the sugar in lightly to make sure that it adheres to the egg wash. Place in a 350°F oven for about 25 minutes.

    A package of Swedish Pearl Sugar

    Step 21. Swedish Pearl Sugar is a specialty baking sugar that adds sweetness as well as crunch to baked goods. It is snow white and doesn't melt in the oven. It is one of my favorite ways to finish sweet breads.

    The Pumpkin Dinner and Breakast Rolls are baked on a sheet pan.

    Step 21. The Pumpkin Dinner Rolls and the Pumpkin Breakfast Rolls are baked.

    See recipe for exact amounts of ingredients.

    Substitutions

    Sanding sugar can be substituted for the Swedish Pearl Sugar. It will not have the same visual effect but will still be very good.

    Storage

    These Dinner Rolls can be baked, cooled and frozen. Wrap well and store for several months. Thaw at room temperature and refresh in a 350°F oven for about 10 minutes. The Breakfast Rolls can also be frozen but be especially careful when wrapping as the sugar decor can come off easily.

    Top Tips

    1. If mixing other ingredients with flour, whisk them all together before continuing with the recipe. This way they will distribute more evenly throughout the recipe.
    2. Chilling yeast doughs overnight not only helps develop flavor, it makes the dough much, much easier to roll and shape. The dough when worked cold holds it shape better.
    3. A proofer for yeast doughs can be easily made at home by simply putting the yeast dough in a cold oven with the light turned on. Check the temperature of the oven from time to time to make sure it doesn't get higher than 90°F. If it is too hot, prop the door open with a wooden spoon. This method will cut the rising time about in half.
    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls and Breakfast Rolls out of one recipe

    Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways

    Helen S. Fletcher
    These soft and fluffy Pumpkin Dinner Rolls Two Ways recipe, with its subtle spicing, is an easy peasy recipe that take no time to make but yield great taste.  These are perfect served with Thanksgiving dinner or a leftover turkey sandwich. Finishing them Swedish Pearl Sugar turns them into the perfect roll with a cup of coffee or tea in the morning.
    5 from 2 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 50 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Inactive Time 4 hours hrs
    Total Time 5 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
    Course Yeast Rolls
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10 rolls
    Calories 359 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Pumpkin Rolls

    • ⅞ cup milk 1 cup less 2 tablespoons
    • 4 tablespoons butter cut into pieces (60 grams or 2 ounces)
    • ¼ cup honey
    • 3 tablespoons instant mashed potato flakes (10 grams or about ⅓ ounce)
    • ½ cup pumpkin puree
    • 1 large egg
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 3 ½ cups bread flour (490 grams or 17 ¼ ounces)
    • 1 ½ teaspoons instant yeast
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon ginger
    • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
    • ¼ teaspoon cloves
    • 1 egg well beaten

    Breakfast Rolls

    • Swedish Pearl Sugar as needed

    Honey Butter

    • ½ cup butter (114 grams or 4 ounces)
    • Honey to taste

    Instructions
     

    • Heat the milk, butter, and honey until the butter melts.  Remove from the heat and add the instant mashed potato flakes.  Whisk all together.  Let cool to room temperature.
    • In the meantime, add the pumpkin, 1 egg, and vanilla the mixing bowl. Whisk to blend completely.  
    • Add the room temperature milk mixture, whisking to combine completely.
    • Combine the flour, instant yeast, salt, (be sure to put them on opposite sides of the bowl) cinnamon, ginger, nutmeg and cloves.  Whisk to combine.  
    • Add the flour mixture all at once to the mixing bowl and beat on low to combine. Raise the speed to medium and beat for 3 minutes.  The dough should clean the bowl.  
    • Spray a container at least 3 times as big as the dough with a non-stick baking spray.  Place the dough in it, cover with plastic wrap and put a lid on the container.  
    • Let it rise at room temperature for 2 ½ to 3 hours until doubled.  Refrigerate overnight or 4 to 6 hours until completely chilled before shaping.  
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.  Line a half sheet pan or baking sheet with parchment paper.  
    • Divide the dough into ten 90 grams or 3 ounce pieces.  If not using a scale, roll the dough into a 10" log and cut it into 10 pieces.  
    • Taking one piece at a time, shape it into a round and flatten it slightly, gather the edges into the center and pinch them together securely.  
    • Turn the roll over and finish shaping the roll by cupping your hand over it and rolling it, seam side down, counter-clockwise in a circular motion five or six times.  Repeat if necessary to make sure the bottom is sealed together.
    • Place on the baking sheet.  Repeat with the remaining 9 rolls.
    • Cover and let rise until doubled, about 2 hours.  Shortly before the rolls are finished rising, preheat the oven to 350F.  Alternatively, place the sheet pan in an oven with only the light on.  The rolls will rise in about 45 minutes to an hour.  Remove from the oven to preheat it.
    • Brush the dinner rolls with the beaten egg at once while the oven is preheating.  For a deeper color and shine, brush again just before they go into the oven.  
    • Bake for 20 to 25 minutes until golden brown and baked through.  A thermometer will register 200°F. 

    Breakfast Rolls

    • As soon as the rolls are brushed with the egg, cover half of the roll with Swedish Pearl Sugar.  This is easiest done by cupping your hand directly behind the roll but not touching it.  Sprinkle the sugar on.  Turn the baking sheet around and repeat to cover the other side.  Pat the sugar gently, but firmly to make sure it adheres to the egg.
    • Bake both the Pumpkin Dinner Rolls and the Breakfast Rolls for 20 to 25 minutes or  until a thermometer registers 200°F.

    Honey Butter

    • Combine softened butter and honey together.  Serve with either roll. 

    Notes

     If mixing other ingredients with flour, whisk them all together before continuing with the recipe. This way they will distribute more evenly throughout the recipe. 
    Chilling yeast doughs overnight not only helps develop flavor, it makes the dough much, much easier to roll and shape. The dough when worked cold holds it shape better.
    A proofer for yeast doughs can be easily made at home by simply putting the yeast dough in a cold oven with the light turned on. Check the temperature of the oven from time to time to make sure it doesn't get higher than 90°F. If it is too hot, prop the door open with a wooden spoon. This method will cut the rising time about in half.
    Both of the rolls can be frozen after baking.  Freeze them, wrap well and store for a month or so.  Be careful with the breakfast roll version so the sugar doesn't come off.  

    Nutrition

    Calories: 359kcalCarbohydrates: 45gProtein: 8gFat: 16gSaturated Fat: 10gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 72mgSodium: 370mgPotassium: 190mgFiber: 2gSugar: 9gVitamin A: 2414IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 50mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart

    Modified: Nov 28, 2025 · Published: Nov 7, 2022 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 10 Comments

    Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart

    This Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart is a twist on the traditional pecan pie and is the perfect tart to sit next to a pumpkin pie for Thanksgiving. The toasted pecans are sandwiched between a deep chocolate ganache and a homemade caramel, which is very easy to make.

    Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart

    The entire tart can be made ahead in steps or can be frozen in its entirety a month ahead making Thanksgiving that much easier.

    A few other tarts to spruce up your offerings include: How to Make a S'Mores Tart, the ever popular Chocolate Cranberry Curd Tart, Butter Rum Pecan Tart, Cinnamon Whiskey Apple Tart and the Café au Lait Chocolate Tart.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Recipe Ingredients

    Pâte Sucrée Crust

    Pate-sucree-crust ingredients include butter, flour, sugar and egg yolks.

    CLOCKWISE: Flour, granulated sugar, egg yolks, unsalted butter

    Dark Satin Ganache

    The ingredients for the dark satin ganache are 
semisweet chocolate,heavy cream, corn syrup and unsalted butter.

    BACK ROW: Semisweet chocolate, heavy cream

    FRONT ROW: Corn syrup, unsalted butter

    Filling

    The ingredients for the tart shown are chocolate, cream, butter, corn syrup, and pecans

    BACK ROW: Semi Sweet Chocolate, heavy cream

    FRONT ROW: Butter, corn syrup and pecan halves

    Caramel

    Ingredients for the caramel are water, granulated sugar, heavy cream, unsalted butter, vanilla and corn syrup

    BACK ROW: Water, granulated sugar, heavy cream

    FRONT ROW: Unsalted butter, vanilla, corn syrup

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!

    Step by Step Instructions

    Blind Baked Pâte Sucrée Crust

    The completed Pate Sucree Crust ready to be baked

    Step 1. The unbaked Pate Sucree Crust ready to be baked.

    Foil is sprayed prior to lining the unbaked crust.

    Step 2. Foil is sprayed prior to lining the unbaked crust.

    The foil is flipped over so the sprayed side covers the inside of the crust.

    Step 3. The foil is flipped over so the sprayed side is touching the pastry. Fit the foil to the crust.

    Beans or other weights fill the foil lined crust to the top.

    Step 4. It is important that beans or other weights fill the foil lined crust to the top.

    Weighted crust on rimmed baking sheet for easy handling.

    Step 5. The weighted crust is placed on a rimmed baking sheet for easy handling in and out of the oven.

    The Pate sucree crust is baked in a tart pan with a removable bottom

    Step 6. The baked crust after the weights are removed. A crack in the crust may appear if slightly over-baked as it does here. That's fine as long as it doesn't go all the way through to the pan.

    Dark Satin Ganache

    The Dark Satin Ganache is used in many recipes on this blog. Australia's favorite snack, Lamingtons. See my American take on the Lamington Torte using this ganache.

    Filling

    Using the ingredients listed in the Recipe Card, go to the Lamington Torte for process shots of the ganache.

    Chocolate ganache in the bottom of the baked pate sucree for the Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart

    Step 7. The chocolate ganache covers the bottom of the tart shell. Refrigerate or freeze until the top is just set. Do not let it get solid. Reserve the remainder of the ganache. Keep it at room temperature.

    Toasted pecan halves cover the chocolate ganache

    Step 8. Pecan halves cover the chocolate ganache. Press them in lightly so they adhere to the ganache.

    Caramel Layer

    Using the ingredients listed in the Recipe Card, go to Caramel A Building Block of Pastry for process shots.

    Caramel layer poured on with air bubbles showing

    Step 9. Freshly made caramel is poured over the pecans with the resultant air bubbles popping up.

    Using a toothpick to break the air bubbles on the caramel layer of the Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart

    Step 10. Breaking the air bubbles on the caramel layer with a toothpick.

    Piping chocolate ganache around the edge of the Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart

    Step 11. Piping an edge around the tart with the reserved chocolate ganache.

    The Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart completely edged.  Refrigerate  to set.

    Step 12. The Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart completely edged. Refrigerate to set.

    Recipe FAQ's

    Why is my caramel runny?

    It is important when making caramel to use a candy thermometer or one that will go to at least 350°F. Caramel will be thinner or thicker depending upon the temperature. It will thicken as it cools.

    Why are beans used in the pate sucree?

    The beans or pie weights keep the bottom flat and the sides from sliding down the side of the tart pan. It is important to line the unbaked shell with foil (do not use parchment paper, it isn't strong enough) that has been sprayed on the side that touches the crust. Fill the pan to the very top with the beans or pie weights. Follow the baking directions given.

    Is there more than one way to make caramel

    Yes, there is the dry method and the wet method. The dry method melts and browns the sugar in a heavy pan - preferably cast iron. This is tricky, since some of the sugar melts faster than other and it can granulate easily. The wet method adds water to the sugar to make it easier for the sugar to melt and color uniformly.

    Why do you have to brown the sugar after melting?

    The taste of the caramel depends upon how deep the color of the sugar is. A very light color will not have a lot of taste. The deeper the color the more intense the taste.

    Why does caramel become grainy

    Caramel can become grainy when even one grain of grain of sugar is not dissolved. Washing down the sides of the pan with a pastry brush and cold water helps remove any grains stuck to the sides of the pan. Another aid is to add corn syrup which is a invert sugar. It is used in candy making to prevent granulation.

    Storage

    This pecan tart can be made several days ahead and refrigerated. Bring to room temperature to serve. It can also be frozen completely made. After it is made, freeze it, wrap well and store for up to a month. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator.

    Expert Tips

    • The caramel, and chocolate ganache can be made days ahead and stored in the refrigerator.
    • The pate sucree shell can be made the day ahead and held, covered, at room temperature.
    • If you don't want to edge the tart with the ganache, finish it with chopped pecans.
    • If there is any leftover ganache, thin it with a little cream or water and use it as the best chocolate sauce ever.
    The completed tart in its pan is finished with a caramel top wreathed in chocolate ganache

    Some other tantalizing recipes to consider

    • Snicker-ama Tart with caramel, peanut butter mousse filled with snicker's pieces and a chocolate ganache
      No Bake Snickers Pie
    • A slice of the S'more Tart with it's browned marshmallow topping sits on a brown rimmed plate with a fork and napkin in the background.
      How to Make A S'mores Tart
    • A slice of Tropical Macadamia & Coconut Tart sits on a clear plate with a teal colored napkin and cup and saucer beside it.
      Macadamia and Coconut Tart
    • A butter crust holds a raspberry jam filling topped with an almond filling of toasted almonds, sugar, butter, eggs, amaretto, almond and vanilla flavoring. It is finished with a dusting of powdered sugar
      Easy Almond Raspberry Tart

    Love this recipe or any other on my site? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card & consider leaving a review in the comments further down, thanks!  Star ratings help people discover my recipes online. Your support means a great deal to me.

    Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart

    Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart is a twist on the traditional pecan pie and is the perfect tart to sit next to a pumpkin pie for Thanksgiving. The toasted pecans are sandwiched between a deep chocolate ganache and a homemade caramel which is very easy to make.
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
    Course Tarts
    Cuisine American
    Servings 14 servings
    Calories 590 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Blind Baked Pâte Sucrée Crust

    • 1 ¼ cup all-purpose flour (175 grams or 6 ¼ ounces)
    • ½ cup unsalted butter cold and cut into small pieces (114 grams or 4 ounces)
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams or 1 ¾ ounces)
    • 2 large egg yolks

    Chocolate Ganache

    • 5 ounces pecan halves (140 grams)
    • ½ cup 40% or heavy cream
    • ¼ cup clear corn syrup
    • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter (75 grams or 2 ⅓ ounces)
    • 10 ounces semisweet chocolate (280 grams)

    Caramel

    • 1 cup cold water
    • 1 ¼ cups granulated sugar (250 grams or about 8 ¾ ounces)
    • ½ cup corn syrup
    • 1 cup heavy cream hot
    • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter (75 grams or 2 ⅔ ounces)
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla

    Instructions
     

    Blind Baked Pâte Sucrée Crust

    • Go here to make the crust.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • Spray a piece of foil large enough to cover the the inside of the crust and extend over the sides.
    • Flip the sprayed foil over so the sprayed side fits inside and up the sides of the crust.
    • Fill it with beans or another pie weight.
    • Bake for 25 minutes.  Remove the weights and bake for an additional 10 minutes.  Do not over-bake as the crust can crack.  Cool completely.

    Chocolate Ganache

    • Go here for process photos.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • Place the pecan halves on a rimmed baking sheet in a single layer.  Toast for 6 to 8 minutes until fragrant and slightly browner. Cool completely.
    • Combine the cream, corn syrup, and butter in a small saucepan.  Heat until the butter melts.  It should be steamy hot but not boiling.
    • Remove from the heat and submerge the chocolate.  Wait for 2 minutes then gently whisk until smooth.
    • Pour 1 ½ cups into the crust, smooth it out, and refrigerate or freeze just until the top is set.  Do not let it get hard.  It takes about 10 minutes in a freezer, but longer in the refrigerator.
    • Reserve the remainder of the ganache at room temperature.

    Caramel

    • Go here for process photos.
    • Place the water, sugar and corn syrup in a 2-quart saucepan.  Stir over heat until the sugar is dissolved completely.
    • Bring to a boil; wash sides of the pan down with a natural bristle pastry brush dipped in cold water or place a tight fitting lid on the pan for 3 minutes.  Remove the lid and boil without stirring until the mixture becomes a medium golden color.
    • Heat the cream until very hot.  Off heat add the vanilla.  
    • Off heat, immediately add the butter and stir until it is melted.
    • Pour the hot cream with the vanilla in all at once and stir.  If some of the cream lumps up don’t worry.  It will dissolve in the next step.
    • Return to medium high heat and bring to a boil.  Boil to 236°F on a candy thermometer.
    • Wait about 5 minutes and pour the hot caramel over the pecans to the top of the crust.
    • Most likely, there will be air bubble that come to the top.  Prick them with a toothpick or a cake tester.  Repeat until they are all broken.
    • Cool the tart at room temperature until the caramel is  set.

    Finishing 

    • Fit a pastry bag with a ¼ inch open star tip.  Pipe small circles all the way around the edge.

    Notes

    1. The tart crust can be made a month ahead, frozen, and wrapped well.  Blind bake as above from the freezer.
    2. The caramel may be made a week ahead and stored in the refrigerator.  Heat it or microwave it gently, stirring often, until pourable.  Use as above.
    3. The tart can be made several days ahead.  Store in the refrigerator.  It can also be frozen up to a month, well wrapped, and thawed overnight in the refrigerator.
    4. This is very rich so small pieces should be served.
    5. There may be some ganache and/or caramel left.  Make two great sauces by adding a bit of cream to each one.  Heat them to loosen them.  Serve with cake, ice cream, tarts, etc.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 590kcalCarbohydrates: 57gProtein: 5gFat: 40gSaturated Fat: 21gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 13gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 97mgSodium: 25mgPotassium: 202mgFiber: 3gSugar: 44gVitamin A: 880IUVitamin C: 0.3mgCalcium: 49mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    The Easiest Pâte Sucrée Pastry Crust

    Modified: Jul 24, 2025 · Published: Nov 1, 2022 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 23 Comments

    The Pâte Sucrée Crust in a tart pan with a removable bottom ready to be baked.

    This Pâte Sucrée Crust, with its sugar and egg yolk, is light, crisp, tender, slightly sweet, and sturdy enough to hold custards, creams, frangipane and curd fillings among others. It is a building block and master pastry for all sweet tarts.

    The Pâte Sucrée Crust in a tart pan with a removable bottom ready to be baked.

    It can be used for full size tarts as well as mini tarts and is easier than most tart shells to make. Four pantry ingredients is all it takes for this fantastic French crust. The Cinnamon Whiskey Tart, Chocolate Caramel Pecan Tart, and the Peach Curd Tart are all good examples of this tart shell.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    One of Three French Pastry Crusts

    There are three main French pastry crusts. Each one has its own particular use. All of them use the same ingredients but the method of putting them together makes the difference.

    • Pâte Sucrée means sweet dough in French. This shortcrust pastry is a light, tender, crisp, crust that can hold liquid fillings without leaking. It is made of four ingredients, flour, butter, sugar and egg yolk. With this crust the sugar and butter are creamed together, the egg yolks are added and last the flour. It lends itself to sweet fillings such as custards, creams, fruit curds, and frangipagne. This is the perfect crust when you don't want to roll the pastry as I show you below.
    • Pâte Sablée is the richest of the three pastries and has a reputation for being difficult to use. Sablée means sandy or grainy and this crust has a higher percentage of sugar making for a crumbly texture. Some recipes also use almond or nut flours to enhance the tender, crumbly texture of the pastry similar to shortbread. This pastry uses the creaming method also. Because it is so short, it can be difficult to roll out but using the press in method makes this much easier. This crust is generally used with sweet fillings.
    • Pâte Brisée is closest to an American pie crust. Brisée means broken and refers to the butter being left in pieces in the pastry. There are two versions of this pastry. The most basic one uses all butter, flour, salt and water. The second is the Pâte Brisée a l'Oeuf which uses and egg along with the water. It is the only pastry of the three to use salt. It is also the only flaky crust among the three that leaves the butter in chunky pieces as opposed to creaming. This pastry is used for savory as well as sweet dishes. The Brie and Bacon Tart, Honey Thyme Apple Tart, and the Individual Apple Crostatas all use the this crust.

    Recipe Ingredients

    ingredients for the pate sucree, butter, floour, egg yolks and sugar

    Clockwise from: Unsalted Butter, All Purpose Flour, Sugar and Egg Yolks

    Key Ingredients

    • All-purpose flour is used for its strength. Eggs and sugar are both tenderizers and with the large amount of butter, the flour has to be able to stand up.
    • Egg yolks from size large eggs are used. They are the only binder in the crust and contribute a beautiful yellow color to the pastry, as well taste.
    • Butter - This is a perfect place for European butter with its intensity of taste although I must admit I was out when I made this. Great either way.

    Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients and instructions.

    Step by Step Instructions

    The first collage shows the tart tin with a removable bottom, the ingredients - butter, flour, sugar and egg yolk - the flour in the processor and the butter added.

    Step 1. This is a 9 x 1 inch tart pan with a removable bottom which makes removing the tart a cinch.  Step 2. Cut the butter legnth-wise, then crosswise into smaller pieces. Refrigerate to keep cold. Step 3.  Pulse the flour in the food processor several times. Step 4. Distribute the cold butter in a circle over the flour.

    The second collage shows the butter being cut into the flour, the sugar added to the processor followed by the egg yolk and the pastry balling up after processing.

    Step 5. Process to cut the butter into the flour so that it is indistinguishable. Step 6. Pour the sugar over the flour/butter mixture in the food processor. Pulse several times to mix. Step 7.  Add the egg yolks to the food processor. Step 8. Process the ingredients until they form a ball. Rearrange the dough as needed if it isn't forming a ball.

    The dough is divided into thirds, a photo with a rope of dough in front of the pan, the rope halfway around the tin and the second rope going around the inside edge.

    Step 9. Divide the pastry in half. Divide one half into half again making l large piece and two smaller pieces. Step 10. Spray the center of the tart pan only. Roll one piece of the smaller ball into a 14" rope.  Step 11. Place the rope of pastry on one side of the tart pan going a little over halfway around the inside.  Step 12. Place the second rope along the other edge making sure the ends overlap by about 1". Press them together firmly.

    The fourth collage shows the pastry pressed against the edge of the tin, it is moved out towards the center, the bottom is pressed in and the bottom and edge pressed together.

    Step 13. Press the ropes along the sides of the pan. Step 14. Press the bottom edge out towards the center for about and inch. Step 15. Flatten the remaining piece of pastry and press it out to meet the pastry at the edge of the pan. Step 16. Press the side and bottom edges together so no seam shows.

    Baking the Crust

    The four photos in th is collage show the finished crust, sprayed foil, foil pressed into the crust, the foil filled with beans.

    Step 17. With the heel of your hand, press the bottom crust so it is perfectly smooth. Then press down on the top edge of the pan so it is even with the pan. Chill the pastry until very cold or frozen. Place the pan on a baking sheet. Step 18. Spray a large piece of foil with a non-stick baking spray. Step 19. Place the foil, sprayed side down into the pan. Press the edges of the foil against the pastry. Step 20. Fill the shell with pie weights or beans.

    The final collage shows the weights being removed from the pastry, the pastry after the beans are removed, the partially baked shell and the completely baked shell.

    Step 21. Lift the 4 corners of the foil. Step 21. Remove the weights from the shell. Step 23. A partially or par baked shell that will be filled and baked. Step 24. The fully baked shell ready to fill.

    Recipe FAQs

    What does Pâté Sucrée mean?

    Pâté Sucrée is French for sweet dough that is used for tarts. including fruit tarts and tarts with creamy filling. Although light and crisp in texture, it stays intact for creamy fillings and fruit tarts.

    What is the difference between a shortcrust and Pâté Sucrée?

    The shortcrust has more butter in the recipe resulting in a more flaky and crumbly baked shell requiring firmer fillings.

    What is the difference between and American Pie crust and Pâté Sucrée?

    An American pie crust is usually made with shortening, not butter and has no sugar. Pea size pieces of shortening left in the finished dough makes it very flaky and tender. Pâté Sucrée is made with butter and sugar which are creamed together.

    Storage

    The pâté sucrée crust can be baked immediately filled or unfilled or it can be frozen, well wrapped for several months to use later.

    Expert Tips

    • The pastry is ready to press in as soon as it comes from the processor. If, for any reason it is very soft, refrigerate briefly to firm up. Do not leave it in the refrigerator too long or it will be difficult to work with because of the large amount of butter.
    • When baking the crust without a filling, be sure to line the shell with foil. It is strong enough to hold the pie weights or beans without breaking when removed. Do not use parchment paper. It can and will break scattering hot pie weights or beans everywhere.
    • I don't dock my dough (use a fork to make holes in it)for a couple of reasons. It is usually docked to prevent the crust from bubbling up. I haven't found that this dough does that since it is not a flaky dough, which is more prone to bubbles. The other reason I don't is that if you are filling it with a liquid filling, the crust has to be sealed. While this is easily done by brushing the bottom of the crust with a beaten egg white, the white can seal the crust to the pan if it goes through the hole completely.
    • Honey Thyme Apple Tart
      Honey Thyme Apple Tart
    • Peach Curd Tart
      Peach Curd Tart - A Summer Treat
    • Chocolate Glazed Bakewell Tart

    Love this Pâte Sucrée Crust or any other on my site? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card & consider leaving a review in the comments further down, thanks!  Star ratings help people discover my recipes online. Your support means a great deal to me.

    The Pâte Sucrée Crust in a tart pan with a removable bottom ready to be baked.

    The Easiest Pâte Sucrée Crust

    Helen S. Fletcher
    While most pastry crusts often meet with dread, this is the easiest crust to make.  With only four ingredients and using  the press in technique this makes an easy, go to crust that is light, crisp, tender, slightly sweet, and sturdy enough to hold custards, creams, frangipane and curd fillings among others. It is a building block and master pastry for all sweet tarts.  Of the three main French pastry crusts, the pate sucree is the easiest to make.  
    4.58 from 7 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 35 minutes mins
    Course Pastry
    Cuisine French
    Servings 16 servings
    Calories 106 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9x1" tart pan with removable bottom
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    • 1 ¼ cup all-purpose flour (175 grams)
    • ½ cup unsalted butter, cold and cut into small pieces (114 grams)
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams)
    • 2 large egg yolks

    Instructions
     

    • Have a 9”x1” tart pan with a removable bottom for the tart handy.
    • Place the flour in the bowl of a processor. Pulse several times. 
    • Place the cold butter over the flour and process until the butter is indistinguishable.  
    • Pour the sugar over the mixture and process briefly to mix in. 
    • Add the yolks and process until the crust comes together in a ball.  This may take a bit.  Reorganizing the pastry in the processor helps.  If your processor is a smaller one, divide the mixture in half and process each half separately.  Join the two pieces together by kneading them a few times.
    • Divide the dough in half (about 180 grams). 
    • Divide one half in half again (about 90 grams).
    • Roll one of the smaller pieces of dough into a 14" rope that will go a little over halfway around the inside of the tart pan.  
    • Repeat with the second half, overlapping the edges of the dough. Press the edges together so no line appears.
    • Press the pastry into the edges of the pan.
    • Press the dough about 1" into the bottom of the pan towards the center. 
    • Flatten the remaining half of the dough and place it in the center of the pan.  Press it out to join the edge dough.  Join these completely so there is no line that can be seen.  
    • To partially bake the shell, freeze the crust until hard. Preheat the oven to 375°F. Tear a piece of foil about 13" long and spray one side of it with a non-stick baking release.  Line with the crust with the foil, sprayed side down.  Fill the pan to the top with pie weights or with beans.
      Bake for 20 minutes,  remove the weights carefully by grasping all four corners of the foil and lifting out.  Return the crust to the oven and bake for about 5 minutes more until about two thirds done baked.  It should not be completely baked but should be firm.
    • To completely bake the crust, follow the above instructions and bake until golden brown, about 8 to 10 minutes more.

    Notes

    • The pastry is ready to press in as soon as it comes from the processor. If, for any reason it is very soft, refrigerate briefly to firm up. Do not leave it in the refrigerator too long or it will be difficult to work with because of the large amount of butter.
    • When baking the crust without a filling, be sure to line the shell with foil. It is strong enough to hold the pie weights or beans without breaking when removed. Do not use parchment paper. It can and will break scattering hot pie weights or beans everywhere.
    • I don't dock my dough (use a fork to make holes in it)for a couple of reasons. It is usually docked to prevent the crust from bubbling up. I haven't found that this dough does that since it is not a flaky dough, which is more prone to bubbles. The other reason I don't is that if you are filling it with a liquid filling, the crust has to be sealed. While this is easily done by brushing the bottom of the crust with a beaten egg white, the white can seal the crust to the pan if it goes through the hole completely.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 16servingsCalories: 106kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 1gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 40mgSodium: 2mgPotassium: 15mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 210IUCalcium: 6mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    A Cranberry Orange Muffin

    Modified: Aug 25, 2025 · Published: Oct 26, 2022 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 14 Comments

    Cranberry Orange Muffins in three sizes, mini, regular and Texas on a gray plate with a red napkin.

    These Cranberry Orange Muffins are a variation of the Cranberry Vanilla Muffins which are equally good. Cranberries team up well with other fruits especially orange and nowhere better than in these muffins.

    Cranberry Orange Muffins in three sizes, mini, regular and Texas on a gray plate with a red napkin.

    One of my most favorite things about Fall is cranberries arriving around the middle of October and this is a perfect recipe to use them in. Other recipes featuring cranberries on my blog you might want to try are, Cranapple PIe, Chocolate Cranberry Curd Tart and Cranberry Pecan Streusel Coffee Cake. My Basic Muffin Mix allows you to tailor your muffins to your preferences. For sure see another fall favorite my Really Easy Pumpkin Muffins.

    Ingredients for A Cranberry Orange Muffin including flour, cranberries, eggs, sugar, milk, orange zest, baking powder, vanilla and almond extract.

    From Left to Right. Back Row: All-purpose flour, cranberries. Middle Row: Butter, eggs, granulated sugar, milk. Front Row: orange zest, baking powder, vanilla extract, almond extract, salt.

    Ingredients

    • Cranberries can be fresh or frozen. If fresh are used, freeze them until hard.
    • Milk can be whole or 2%.
    • Eggs are size large.
    • Orange Zest. A microplaner is best for obtaining the zest. A medium to large orange will yield the amount needed.
    • Butter can be salted or unsalted for this recipe.

    Instructions

    Butter and sugar in the bowl of a mixer.

    Step 1. Butter and granulated sugar in a mixing bowl.

    Butter and sugar creamed in the mixing bowl.

    Step 2. The butter and sugar creamed together.

    The vanilla and almond extracts as well as the orange zest is added to the creamed mixture.

    Step 3. The vanilla and almond extracts along with the orange zest are added to the creamed mixture.

    The extracts and orange zest added to the creamed sugar and butter.

    Step 4. The extracts and zest added to the creamed mixture.

    Eggs added to the mixing bowl.

    Step 5. One egg at a time is beaten into the batter.

    After the eggs are are added, the batter will look curdled.

    Step 6. After both eggs are added the batter will most likely look curdled. That will be fixed in the next step.

    The flour, baking powder and salt in a bowl to be mixed.

    Step 7. The baking powder and salt to be mixed with the flour.

    The first addition of flour to the mixture in the bowl.

    Step 8. The first third of flour added to the mixing bowl. The flour will be added alternately with the milk.

    The first third of the flour mixed in.

    Step 9. The first third of the flour mixed in.

    The first half of the milk added to the mixing bowl.

    Step 10. The first half of the milk added.

    The finished batter after three additions of flour and  2 of milk.

    Step 11. The finished batter after 3 additions of flour alternating with 2 of milk.

    Frozen cranberries in the food processor.

    Step 12. The frozen cranberries are placed inside a food processor.

    The cranberries are pulsed in the processor until chopped into smaller pieces.

    Step 13. The frozen cranberries are pulsed in the processor to make smaller pieces.

    The cranberries are added to the batter in the mixing bowl.

    Step 14. The cranberries are added to the batter in the mixing bowl.

    The muffin tins are filled ¾ full.

    Step 15. The muffins are filled ¾ full. This applies to either the mini, regular or Texas size muffins.

    Sanding sugar is sprinkled on top to add crunch.

    Step 16. Sanding sugar is sprinkled liberally on top to add a bit of crunch.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions

    Variations

    The number of muffins will increase if adding either of these.

    • 2 cups of Mini chocolate chips can be added. Chocolate, cranberries and orange are a great combination.
    • 1 cup of any coarsely chopped nuts can be added. For extra flavor toast the nuts at 350°F for 7 to 10 minutes depending upon the nut. Cool before chopping.

    Storage

    These muffins can be stored for several days at room temperature or frozen for longer storage. Thaw at room temperature.

    Top Tips

    Freezing the cranberries before adding them to the batter keeps the batter from turning that dreaded gray color from fruit juices. Chopping them in the food processor and immediately adding them to the batter and filling the muffin tins keeps the color vibrant and inviting.

    To use or not to use paper liners? The muffins bake up softer and stay more moist if paper liners are used. If they are baked directly in sprayed pans, they brown much faster and the outside of the muffins are sturdier.

     

    Cranberry Orange Muffins in three sizes, mini, regular and Texas on a gray plate with a red napkin.

    A Cranberry Orange Muffin

    Helen S. Fletcher
    A Cranberry Orange Muffin recipe features the flavors of fall fruit and is quickly made featuring fresh or frozen cranberries and orange zest.  A great recipe for beginner bakers. 
    4.34 from 3 votes
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 45 minutes mins
    Course Muffins
    Cuisine American
    Servings 20 muffins
    Calories 144 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Sugar Nutmeg Topping

    • ⅓ cup sanding or granulated sugar
    • 1 teaspoon nutmeg

    Cranberry Orange Muffins

    • 12 ounces fresh cranberries, fresh or frozen (340 grams)
    • 1 cup sugar (200 grams or 7 ounces)
    • ½ cup butter, softened (114 gram, 4 ounces or 1 stick)
    • 1 tablespoon grated orange zest
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 teaspoon almond extract
    • 2 large eggs
    • 2 cups all purpose flour (280 grams or 10 ounces)
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup milk

    Instructions
     

    Sugar Nutmeg Topping

    • Combine the sugar and the nutmeg. Set aside

    Cranberry Orange Muffins

    • Freeze the cranberries hard. 
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line muffin cups with paper liners or spray them well.
    • Cream together the sugar and butter until light and fluffy. 
    • Add the vanilla and almond extracts as well as the grated orange rind, mixing in completely.
    • Scrape down and add the eggs one at a time.  Beat until light and completely combined.  
    • In the meantime, combine the flour, baking powder and salt.  Mix together.  
    • Add the flour and milk alternately, starting and ending with the flour in thirds and the milk twice.  
    • Last, place the cranberries in a food processor and pulse to coarsely chop.  Add to the batter and mix in just until well combined.  The batter will be stiff at this point because the cranberries are frozen.
    • Fill the cups ¾ full.  This applies to whatever size you are using.
    • Sprinkle the tops liberally with the sugar/nutmeg mix. 
    • Regular size muffins – bake  24 to 26 minutes – makes about 20 muffins
    • Mini size muffins - bake 117 to 20 minutes - makes about 40
    • Texas size muffins - bake 27 to 30 minutes - makes about 10 to 12

    Notes

    1. 2 cups mini chips can be added.
    2. 1 cup toasted, chopped nuts of  your choice can be added.
    3. Either addition will increase the the number of muffins.  
    4. Freezing the cranberries will keep the muffins vibrant without turning an off color.
    5. Using paper liners for the muffin tins makes a softer, muffin that stays more moist.  If baked directly in sprayed tins the muffins brown more quickly and have a sturdier outside to them.  They don't stay fresh as long.  

    Nutrition

    Calories: 144kcalCarbohydrates: 22gProtein: 2gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 29mgSodium: 117mgPotassium: 45mgFiber: 1gSugar: 11gVitamin A: 187IUVitamin C: 3mgCalcium: 39mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!

    Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe

    Modified: Sep 9, 2025 · Published: Oct 10, 2022 by Helen S Fletcher · This post may contain affiliate links · 11 Comments

    Pumpkin cake donuts on a plate with a cup of tea.

    This quick, easy Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe doesn't get any faster. With no yeast to wait for, these are ready in no time. They stay fresh for days. No cake donut pan? No problem. There's a work around below.

    Pumpkin cake donuts on a plate with a cup of tea.

    This old fashioned cake doughnut recipe was inspired by another fall favorite, Apple Cake Doughnuts and the Carrot Cake Baked Doughnuts which I'm sure you'd enjoy also. All of the cake donuts including the are baked and not fried including the Crumbed Cake Baked Donuts Recipe. There's a great discussion on my post, Fried or Baked Doughnuts.

    Crumb Topping Ingredients

    Ingredients for the crumb topping on the Pumpkin Cake Donuts

    Back Row: flour, brown sugar. Front Row: sugar, butter, salt

    Crumb Topping Instructions

    Softened butter,brown and granulated sugars and salt in a mixing bowl.

    Step 1. Butter, brown and granulated sugars, salt in a mixing bowl

    Butter, sugars and salt creamed in mixing bowl for the Pumpkin Cake Donuts

    Step 2. The butter, sugars and salt creamed together.

    Add the flour to the creamed mixture and mix to get crumbs

    Step 3. Add the flour all at once and mix on medium to form crumbs. Don't over-mix or it will become a paste. Refrigerate until needed.

    Pumpkin Cake Donut Ingredients

    Sugar, flour, eggs, oil, pumpkin puree, spices, baking powder, baking soda,salt and vanilla for the pumpkin cake donuts.

    Front Row: vanilla, baking soda. Third Row: ginger, oil, pumpkin puree, nutmeg. Second Row: salt, cloves, baking powder, cinnamon. Front Row: vanilla, baking soda.

    Pumpkin Cake Donut Instructions

    Cake donut pan sprayed with a non-stick baking release

    Step 1. Spray 2 cake donut pans with a non-stick baking release and set aside. Alternatively, spray a 12 well, regular size muffin tin. Set aside.

    Flour, baking powder, baking soda,spices and salt for the Pumpkin Cake Donut batter

    Step 2. The dry ingredients for the pumpkin batter. Whisk together.

    The oil, eggs, sugar, pumpkin puree and vanilla in a mixing bowl for the Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe

    Step 3. The oil, eggs, brown sugar, pumpkin puree and vanilla in the mixing bowl.

    Pumpkin batter mixed in bowl.

    Step 4. Pumpkin batter mixed.

    Crumbs covering the bottom of a cake donut pan.

    Step 5. The crumbs from above are divided between the 12 cake donut wells.

    The pumpkin batter piped over the crumbs.

    Step 6. Spoon or pipe the batter over the crumbs. It is easier to pipe the batter using a piping bag or heavy plastic food bag with the tip cut off.

    If using a muffin pan, fill about ¾ ful

    Step 7. If using a muffin tin, place the crumbs on the bottom and fill about ¾ full.

    Baked Pumpkin Donut Cake Recipe donuts on a cooling rack

    Step 8. Baked cake donuts cooling on a rack before dusting with powdered sugar.

    Storage

    These will keep for several days at room temperature. The powder sugar may need to be replenished. For longer storage, freeze without the powdered sugar. Thaw at room temperature and then powder sugar.

    Top Tip

    If you don't have the cake donut pan, a regular size muffin tin will do. It will take a few minutes longer to bake because of the depth. Both will make 12.

    Pumpkin cake donuts on a plate with a cup of tea.

    Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe

    Helen S. Fletcher
    This Pumpkin Cake Donut Recipe doesn't get any easier or faster. With no yeast to wait for, these are ready in no time. Pumpkin forward with plenty of spice, they stay fresh for days. No cake donut pan? No problem. Just substitute a regular size 12 well muffin tin.  
    5 from 1 vote
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 16 minutes mins
    Total Time 36 minutes mins
    Course Donuts
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 329 kcal
    Prevent your screen from going dark

    Ingredients

    Crumb Topping

    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, softened (90 grams or 3 ounces)
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar (50 grams 1 ¾ ounces)
    • ¼ cup packed dark brown sugar (50 grams or 1 ¾ ounces)
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¾ cup all-purpose flour (90 grams or 3 ounces)

    Pumpkin Cake Donut 

    • 1 ¼ cups flour (175 grams 6 ⅛ ounces)
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
    • ½ teaspoon ginger
    • ⅛ teaspoon cloves
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup oil
    • 2 eggs
    • 1 cup brown sugar, packed (200 grams or 7 ounces)
    • ¾ cup pumpkin puree (170 grams or 6 ounces1 teaspoon vanilla)
    • Powdered sugar as needed

    Instructions
     

    Crumb Topping

    • Combine the butter and both sugars in a mixing bowl.  Cream until very light.
    • Whisk the salt and flour together; add all at once and beat on medium just until large crumbs form.  Scrape down the sides and the bottom for unincorporated flour.  If crumbs don't form, add a couple of teaspoons of water at a time to help them along. Mix briefly.
    • Do not over mix or you will end up with a really thick cohesive mixture.Store the crumbs in the refrigerator while you make the cake.

    Pumpkin Cake Donuts

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.  Lightly spray 2 6-hole doughnut pans or regular size muffin tins with a non-stick baking spray.  Set aside.
    • Whisk the flour, cinnamon, nutmeg, ginger, cloves, baking powder, baking soda, and salt together.  Set aside.
    • Combine the oil, eggs, brown sugar, pumpkin, and vanilla in the bowl of a mixer.  Beat on low until completely combined.  Add the flour, all at once, and beat on medium until well blended.
    • Divide the crumbs between the donut or muffin tins.
    • Fill the wells of the donut or muffin tins just under the top.   It is easiest to pipe this in because it is thick.  Just cut about ½” off a plastic piping back or a heavy plastic food storage bag.  Fill with batter and pipe it over the crumbs.
    • Bake the donut for 12 to 15 minutes until a tester comes out clean or they spring back when lightly touched.
    • Bake the muffin tins for 14 to 16 minutes.
    • Cool for a few minutes, then release from the tins.
    • Sprinkle lightly with powdered sugar when cool.

    Notes

    Do not use pumpkin pie filling as it is not the same as the pumpkin puree.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 329kcalCarbohydrates: 44gProtein: 3gFat: 16gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 42mgSodium: 281mgPotassium: 98mgFiber: 1gSugar: 27gVitamin A: 2598IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 73mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Mention @helensfletcher or tag #pastrieslikeapro!
    • « Previous Page
    • 1
    • 2
    • 3
    • 4
    • 5
    • 6
    • …
    • 14
    • Next Page »

    Hi, I'm Helen! Being a self-taught baker and owning a bakery for over 25 years, I found many ways to make baking more successful and less intimidating. Even busy people can bake as in many cases, recipes can be done over days. The goal is to make your baking life easier, more enjoyable, with great outcomes on a consistent basis.

    More about me →

    Subscribe to receive our free ebook

    SUBSCRIBE

    Spring Baking

    • A sour cream cake laden with poppyseeds filled with orange curd and finished white chocolate buttercream
      Poppyseed Cake with Orange Curd and White Chocolate Buttercream
    • A lone Banana Split Cupcake with its vibrant pink strawberry buttercream and drizzled with chocolate sits on a pink rimmed plate.
      Banana Split Cupcakes
    • Turtle Cake
      Gluten Free Turtle Cake with Salted Caramel
    • Sweet Kolache with pineapple, cream cheese, fig, raspberry fillings
      The Marvelous Variable Kolache
    • A slice of Lemon Glazed Lemon Twists made with Sixty Second Brioche
      60 Second Brioche
    • Rhubarb Cream Tart
      Rhubarb Cream Tart with Strawberry Sauce

    Popular Recipes

    • This Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cake features a pineapple slice with a cherry in the middle on top of a yellow cake sitting on a blue and white plate.
      Mini Pineapple Upside Down Cakes
    • A plate of Cuccidati, fig and nut filled Italian Cookies sprinkled with multi-colored nonpariels.
      Cuccidati - Italy's Finest Cookie
    • This picture shows a slice of the coffee cake on a white, lace edged plate on a marble counter.
      Apricot Crumb Coffee Cake
    • Langue de Chat cookies in a bowl.
      Langue de Chat
    • Angel food Cake
      Perfectly Easy Angel Food Cake
    • Large nut pieces for Chopping Nuts
      Chopping Nuts - A Quicker Way

    Available Now

    Available on Amazon, Barnes & Noble, Apple Books, as well as other sites and in book stores.
    AUTOGRAPHED COPIES ARE AVAILABLE
    Click here to purchase an autographed copy.

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    About

    • About Helen
    • Privacy Policy

    Newsletter

    • Sign Up! for emails and updates

    Contact

    • Contact
    • Press
    • Facebook
    • Pinterest
    • Instagram
    • Threads
    • Bluesky

    COPYRIGHT © 2025 PASTRIES LIKE A PRO

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required